Motorcycle Maintenance Manual: Benelli

TNT125
Benelli
Motorcycle Maintenance
Manual
0
Benelli
Motorcycle Maintenance Manual
All rights reserved! Without the prior written consent of Zhejiang Qianjiang Motorcycle Co., Ltd., no part of
this Maintenance Manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form (electronic
form, mechanical copying, recording, etc.).
We have made every effort to ensure that this Manual is complete and accurate, but will not assume any
responsibility for any inaccuracies or omissions that may appear in this Manual.
We reserve the right to modify this Manual without prior notice and do not have the obligation to modify
previous products accordingly. For the latest product perfection information prepared after the release of this
Manual, please consult your motorcycle .
The contents of this Manual are compiled according to the latest product information at the time of
compilation. The illustrations and pictures in this Manual are for reference only and may differ from the actual
parts
1
Abbreviations
A Ampere lb Pound
ABDC After bottom dead center m Meter
AC Alternating current min Minute
ATDC After top dead center N Newton
BBDC Before bottom dead center Pa Pascal
BDC Bottom dead center PS Horsepower
BTDC Before top dead center psi Pound per square inch
℃ Degree celsius r Revolution
DC Direct current rpm Revolutions per minute
F Farad TDC Top dead center
℉ Fahrenheit degree TIR Total indicator reading
ft Foot V Volt
g Gram W Watt
h Hour Ω Ohm
L Liter
2
Exhaust Emission Control Information
In order to protect our common environment, Zhejiang Qianjiang Motorcycle Co., Ltd. has introduced
crankcase blow-by gas filtration system (1) and exhaust emission control system (2) which conform to the
applicable regulations of the US Environmental Protection Agency and California Air Resources Board, and
equipped the motorcycles sold in California only with fuel vapor recovery system (3) which conform to the
applicable regulations of California Air Resources Board.
1. Crankcase blow-by gas filtration system
This system is used to prevent crankcase gas from being discharged to the atmosphere. The crankcase gas is
forced into the intake side of the engine after passing oil separator. When the engine is working, the gas is fed into
the combustion chamber and then will combust with the fuel and air from the fuel injection system.
2. Exhaust emission control system
This system can reduce the amount of pollutants discharged to the atmosphere in the exhaust generated by
this motorcycle. The fuel injection system, ignition system and exhaust system of this motorcycle are carefully
designed and assembled to ensure efficient engine operation and low emissions of pollutants.
The exhaust system of this motorcycle includes a catalytic converter system.
3. Fuel vapor recovery system
The fuel vapor in the fuel injection system is not discharged to the atmosphere but is forced into the working
engine and will burn out. If the engine is not started, the vapor will be stored in the canister. If it is a fluid fuel, it
will be sucked into oil separator, and then return to fuel tank.
Atmospheric Protection Act is a federal law that deals with motor vehicle pollution and includes provisions
commonly known as “Modification Regulations of Air Pollution Control Act”.
“203(a) No one may do or instigate others to do the following:
(3) (A) Before the final buyer purchases or receives the motorcycle or motorcycle engine, no person shall
dismantle or damage any part mounted on the motorcycle or motorcycle engine according to the regulations of the
manual; the manufacturer or dealer shall not intentionally remove or damage any part after the sale or delivery of
any motorcycle or motorcycle engine to the final purchaser.
(3) (B) After the sale or delivery of any motorcycle or motorcycle engine to the final purchaser, any person
who engages in the repair, maintenance, sale, lease or transaction of motorcycle or motorcycle engine or the
operation of motorcade shall not remove damage any part mounted on the motorcycle or motorcycle engine…”
Remark
It is generally accepted that “the removal or damage of any part” has the following meaning:
1. The temporary removal of any part for maintenance or temporary failure to operate the part does not belong to
“modification”.
2. The following cases belong to “modification”:
a. Incorrectly adjust vehicle components, so that the exhaust emissions exceed the emission standards.
b. Use replacement part or accessory, thus affecting the performance or durability of motorcycle.
c. Add part or accessory, thus making motorcycle out of the standard.
d. Permanently remove, disassemble or damage any part of exhaust emission control system.
It is recommended that all dealers comply with the above regulations of federal law and any violators will
be subject to civil fines.
1
Strictly Prohibiting the Modification of Noise
Control System
Federal law prohibit anyone from doing or instigating others to do the following: (1) Any person removes
any part or make it inoperative before the final buyer purchases or receives any new motorcycle or in the course of
the use of motorcycle, unless there is a need to repair, maintain or replace this part; (2) any person continues to
use the motorcycle after removing any part of any motorcycle or making it inoperative.
The following acts belong to “modification of motorcycle”:
 Replace the original exhaust system or muffler with parts that do not comply with federal regulations.
 Remove muffler or any of its internal components.
 Remove air filter or its cover.
 Modify muffler or inlet system by means of cutting, drilling or otherwise, to increase noise level.
2
Contents
Exhaust Emission Control Information ..................................................................................................................... 1

Strictly Prohibiting the Modification of Noise Control System ................................................................................ 2
Preface ..................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Chapter I Basic Information ................................................................................................................................ - 20 -
Notes before Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... - 21 -
Battery Grounding ............................................................................................................................... - 21 -
Sharp Edge of Part ............................................................................................................................... - 21 -
Solvent ................................................................................................................................................. - 21 -
Cleaning Motorcycle before Disassembly ........................................................................................... - 22 -
Collecting and Cleaning Removed Part ............................................................................................... - 22 -
Storing Removed Part .......................................................................................................................... - 22 -
Check ................................................................................................................................................... - 22 -
Replacement Part ................................................................................................................................. - 23 -
Assembly Order ................................................................................................................................... - 23 -
Fastening Order ................................................................................................................................... - 23 -
Tightening Torque ................................................................................................................................ - 23 -
Force .................................................................................................................................................... - 24 -
Gasket and O-Ring Seal....................................................................................................................... - 24 -
Mould Closing Glue and Threaded Fastening Glue............................................................................. - 24 -
Press Fitting ......................................................................................................................................... - 24 -
Ball Bearing and Needle Bearing ........................................................................................................ - 26 -
Oil Seal and Grease Oil Seal................................................................................................................ - 26 -
Circlip and Cotter Pin .......................................................................................................................... - 27 -
Lubrication........................................................................................................................................... - 27 -
Rotation Direction of Engine ............................................................................................................... - 27 -
Wire ..................................................................................................................................................... - 27 -
Cable Connector Check ....................................................................................................................... - 28 -
1. Disconnection .......................................................................................................................... - 28 -
2. Check ....................................................................................................................................... - 28 -
3. Check ....................................................................................................................................... - 28 -
4. Check ....................................................................................................................................... - 29 -
5. Check ....................................................................................................................................... - 29 -
Cable Arrangement .............................................................................................................................. - 30 -
Tool ...................................................................................................................................................... - 30 -
Model Information ....................................................................................................................................... - 31 -
China.................................................................................................................................................... - 31 -
Europe.................................................................................................................................................. - 33 -
Non-Europe ......................................................................................................................................... - 35 -
Basic Specification ...................................................................................................................................... - 38 -
General Technical Parameter ....................................................................................................................... - 40 -
Unit Conversion Table ......................................................................................................................... - 43 -
Chapter II Regular Maintenance.......................................................................................................................... - 44 -
Regular Maintenance Table ......................................................................................................................... - 46 -
3
Torque and Locking Agent .......................................................................................................................... - 48 -
Main Locking Torque Specifications ................................................................................................... - 48 -
Nut, Bolt, Screw Fastening Torque and Relative Parameters .............................................................. - 52 -
Technical Parameters ................................................................................................................................... - 53 -
Special Tools ................................................................................................................................................ - 55 -
Regular Maintenance Procedures ................................................................................................................ - 56 -
Electronic Fuel Injection System (EFI) ............................................................................................... - 56 -
Checking Throttle Control System .............................................................................................. - 56 -
Checking Idle Speed .................................................................................................................... - 57 -
Checking Fuel Hose (Fuel Leakage, Hose Break and Hose Installation Situations) ................... - 58 -
Checking Fuel Evaporation and Recovery System (Chinese, European and US Models) .......... - 59 -
Engine Cylinder Head and Cylinder Head Cover ................................................................................ - 61 -
Checking Valve Clearance ........................................................................................................... - 61 -
Adjusting Valve Clearance........................................................................................................... - 63 -
Clutch................................................................................................................................................... - 64 -
Checking Whether Clutch Control System is Normal ................................................................. - 64 -
Checking Free Travel of Clutch Handle ...................................................................................... - 64 -
Wheel/Tire ........................................................................................................................................... - 65 -
Checking Tire Pressure ................................................................................................................ - 65 -
Checking Whether Wheel/Tire is Broken .................................................................................... - 65 -
Checking Wear Situations of Thread ........................................................................................... - 66 -
Checking Whether Wheel Bearing is Damaged........................................................................... - 66 -
Final Drive Mechanism ....................................................................................................................... - 68 -
Checking Lubrication State of Drive Chain................................................................................. - 68 -
Checking Whether Drive Chain is Loose .................................................................................... - 68 -
Adjusting Slackness of Drive Chain ............................................................................................ - 69 -
Checking Wheel Alignment ......................................................................................................... - 70 -
Checking Wear of Drive Chain .................................................................................................... - 70 -
Checking Wear of Chain Guide ................................................................................................... - 71 -
Brake.................................................................................................................................................... - 72 -
Check Whether Brake Hose and Brake Pipe are Damaged and Their Installation States ............ - 72 -
Free Travel of Front Brake........................................................................................................... - 72 -
Free Travel of Rear Brake............................................................................................................ - 72 -
Checking Brake ........................................................................................................................... - 73 -
Checking Brake Fluid Level ........................................................................................................ - 73 -
Checking Wear of Brake Pad ....................................................................................................... - 76 -
Checking Brake Light Switch ...................................................................................................... - 76 -
Suspension System .............................................................................................................................. - 77 -
Checking Front Fork/Rear Shock Absorber ................................................................................. - 77 -
Check for Oil Leakage of Front Fork Shock Absorber ................................................................ - 77 -
Check for Oil Leakage of Rear Shock Absorber.......................................................................... - 78 -
Steering System ................................................................................................................................... - 79 -
Checking Steering Clearance ....................................................................................................... - 79 -
Adjusting Tightness of Steering Seat ........................................................................................... - 79 -
Applying Lubricant to Steering Column Bearing ........................................................................ - 81 -
Electrical System ................................................................................................................................. - 82 -
Checking Light and Switch.......................................................................................................... - 82 -
4
Checking Accuracy of Headlight ................................................................................................. - 87 -
Checking Emergency Flameout Switch ....................................................................................... - 88 -
Others................................................................................................................................................... - 89 -
Applying Lubricant to Frame Parts.............................................................................................. - 89 -
Check Tightness of Bolt, Nut and Fastener ................................................................................. - 92 -
Replacing Air Filter Element ....................................................................................................... - 94 -
Replacing Fuel Pipe ..................................................................................................................... - 96 -
Replacing oil ................................................................................................................................ - 98 -
Replacing Brake Hose and Brake Pipe ...................................................................................... - 100 -
Replacing brake fluid ................................................................................................................. - 103 -
Replacing Rubber Parts of Master Cylinder .............................................................................. - 107 -
Replacing Rubber Parts of Calipers ........................................................................................... - 109 -
Replacing Spark Plug................................................................................................................. - 117 -
Chapter III Electronic Fuel Injection System (EFI)........................................................................................... - 118 -
Introduction to EFI .................................................................................................................................... - 122 -
EFI System ................................................................................................................................................ - 123 -
EFI Part Position ........................................................................................................................................ - 125 -
Technical Parameters ................................................................................................................................. - 131 -
Fuel tank .................................................................................................................................................... - 133 -
Exploded View of Fuel Tank ............................................................................................................. - 133 -
Evaporative Emission Recovery System of Fuel ............................................................................... - 135 -
Disassembly of Fuel Tank.................................................................................................................. - 136 -
Check ................................................................................................................................................. - 138 -
Installatation of fuel tank ................................................................................................................... - 140 -
Notes for EFI Overhaul ............................................................................................................................. - 141 -
Notes for EFI Overhaul ..................................................................................................................... - 141 -
ECU ........................................................................................................................................................... - 143 -
Engine controller (MT05.2ECU) ....................................................................................................... - 143 -
ECU Appearance ............................................................................................................................... - 143 -
ECU Disassembly .............................................................................................................................. - 143 -
ECU Installation ................................................................................................................................ - 144 -
Notes for ECU ................................................................................................................................... - 144 -
ECU Power Supply Requirements ..................................................................................................... - 144 -
ECU Temperature Requirements ....................................................................................................... - 145 -
Fuel pump .................................................................................................................................................. - 146 -
Working of Fuel Pump ....................................................................................................................... - 146 -
Appearance of Fuel Pump.................................................................................................................. - 147 -
Composition of Fuel Pump ................................................................................................................ - 148 -
Label and Mark of Fuel Pump ........................................................................................................... - 148 -
Working Environment of Fuel Pump ................................................................................................. - 149 -
Fuel pump Maintenance Process ....................................................................................................... - 149 -
Safety Protection:....................................................................................................................... - 149 -
Fault Diagnosis of Fuel Pump Assembly: .................................................................................. - 150 -
Disassembly of Fuel Pump Assembly: ...................................................................................... - 150 -
Installation of Fuel Pump Assembly: ......................................................................................... - 151 -
Fuel Pressure Release Process: .................................................................................................. - 151 -
5
Fuel Leakage Check Process: .................................................................................................... - 152 -
Notes for Use: .................................................................................................................................... - 152 -
Throttle Body............................................................................................................................................. - 154 -
Working Principle of Throttle Body: ................................................................................................. - 154 -
Appearance of Throttle Body: ........................................................................................................... - 154 -
Technical Parameters ......................................................................................................................... - 154 -
Throttle Body: ............................................................................................................................ - 154 -
Throttle Position Sensor: ........................................................................................................... - 155 -
Air Control Valve of Idle Speed: ............................................................................................... - 155 -
Working Environment of Throttle...................................................................................................... - 155 -
Disassembly of Throttle ..................................................................................................................... - 155 -
Cleaning Method of Throttle ............................................................................................................. - 155 -
Installation of Throttle ....................................................................................................................... - 155 -
Precautions for Installation of Throttle .............................................................................................. - 155 -
Notes for Use of Throttle ................................................................................................................... - 156 -
Idle speed stepper motor .................................................................................................................... - 156 -
Working Principle of Idle speed stepper motor.......................................................................... - 156 -
Appearance of Idle speed stepper motor .................................................................................... - 156 -
Definition of pin ........................................................................................................................ - 157 -
Characteristic parameter: ........................................................................................................... - 157 -
Fault determination of idle speed stepper motor:....................................................................... - 157 -
Circuit inspection of idle speed stepper motor: ......................................................................... - 158 -
Cleaning ..................................................................................................................................... - 158 -
Resetting of idle speed stepper motor ........................................................................................ - 158 -
Fuel injector ....................................................................................................................................... - 159 -
Working Principle of Fuel Injector .................................................................................................... - 159 -
Appearance of Fuel Injector .............................................................................................................. - 159 -
Sealing Ring of Fuel Injector ............................................................................................................. - 160 -
O-ring Seal Connected to Oil Rail or Oil Injection Cap ............................................................ - 160 -
O-ring Seal Connected to Intake Pipe End ................................................................................ - 160 -
Recommended Lubricant ........................................................................................................... - 160 -
Overvoltage Impact of Fuel Injector .................................................................................................. - 160 -
Temperature Range of Fuel Injector: ................................................................................................. - 161 -
Fuel Contaminants of Fuel Injector ................................................................................................... - 161 -
Fuel Injector Harness Arrangement ................................................................................................... - 161 -
Notes for Use of Fuel Injector ........................................................................................................... - 161 -
Requirements for Installation of Fuel Injector ................................................................................... - 162 -
Replacement Method of Fuel Injector ............................................................................................... - 163 -
Fuel Injector Replaceability ............................................................................................................... - 164 -
Blocking of Fuel Injector ................................................................................................................... - 164 -
General Failure Mode and Prevention and Solving Measures in Using Process ............................... - 165 -
Intake Pressure Sensor ............................................................................................................................... - 166 -
Working Principle of Intake Pressure Sensor .................................................................................... - 166 -
Appearance of Intake Pressure Sensor............................................................................................... - 166 -
Working Environment........................................................................................................................ - 166 -
Storage Environment ......................................................................................................................... - 166 -
Electric environment .......................................................................................................................... - 166 -
6
Pin definition ..................................................................................................................................... - 167 -
Position .............................................................................................................................................. - 167 -
Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................. - 167 -
Fault Determination ........................................................................................................................... - 167 -
Oxygen Sensor........................................................................................................................................... - 168 -
Working Principle of Oxygen Sensor ................................................................................................ - 168 -
Appearance of Oxygen Sensor .......................................................................................................... - 168 -
Installation Requirements .................................................................................................................. - 168 -
Oxygen Sensor Pin Definition: .......................................................................................................... - 169 -
Characteristic curve ........................................................................................................................... - 170 -
Requirements for Fuel Quality .......................................................................................................... - 170 -
Temperature Sensor of Engine Cylinder Head .......................................................................................... - 171 -
Working Principle of Temperature Sensor of Engine Cylinder Head ................................................ - 171 -
Appearance of Temperature Sensor of Engine Cylinder Head .......................................................... - 171 -
Electrical environment ....................................................................................................................... - 171 -
Fault Determination and Characteristic of Output Resistance ........................................................... - 172 -
Canister Solenoid Valve (ECP) .................................................................................................................. - 173 -
Overview of Working Principles........................................................................................................ - 173 -
Appearance ........................................................................................................................................ - 173 -
ECP Pin .............................................................................................................................................. - 173 -
Ignition Coil............................................................................................................................................... - 175 -
Appearance of Ignition Coil .............................................................................................................. - 175 -
Fault Description: .............................................................................................................................. - 175 -
Fault Maintenance Diagnosis Method of EFI System ............................................................................... - 176 -
Diagnosis Directly Using the Flashing Fault Lamp at Instrument ..................................................... - 176 -
Diagnosing Fault Using Diagnostic Apparatus .................................................................................. - 179 -
Checking Fault Using Diagnostic Software PCHUD ........................................................................ - 180 -
Common Troubleshooting Methods of Electronic Fuel Injection System ................................................. - 185 -
Maintenance Tool .............................................................................................................................. - 185 -
Engine Working Data Flow Displayed by Diagnostic Apparatus ...................................................... - 185 -
Step I .......................................................................................................................................... - 185 -
Step II......................................................................................................................................... - 185 -
Step III ....................................................................................................................................... - 186 -
Simple Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................... - 186 -
Daily Use and Maintenance ....................................................................................................... - 186 -
Fault phenomenon-Start fault .................................................................................................... - 187 -
Fault phenomenon—Start failure with tempering...................................................................... - 188 -
Fault phenomenon—Instable idle speed .................................................................................... - 188 -
Fault phenomenon—Too high or too low idle speed (idle speed is obviously inconsistent with
target idle speed) ........................................................................................................................ - 189 -
Fault phenomenon—Instable idle speed with deceleration and flameout.................................. - 189 -
Fault phenomenon—Insufficient power of deceleration............................................................ - 189 -
7
Fault phenomenon—Slight burning phenomenon ..................................................................... - 189 -
Fault phenomenon—Fault lamp is on, but fault code is inconsistent with fault ........................ - 189 -
Fault phenomenon—Extremely high fuel consumption ............................................................ - 190 -
Fault diagnosis instructions for Delphi .............................................................................................. - 191 -
Chapter IV Engine ............................................................................................................................................. - 193 -
Main Parameters of Engine ....................................................................................................................... - 197 -
Lubrication System .................................................................................................................................... - 198 -
Diagram of Lubrication System......................................................................................................... - 198 -
Position of Fuel pump ........................................................................................................................ - 200 -
Preparation Information ..................................................................................................................... - 202 -
Conventional Information .......................................................................................................... - 202 -
Torque Value .............................................................................................................................. - 203 -
Special Tools ...................................................................................................................................... - 204 -
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................. - 205 -
Oil level is too low ..................................................................................................................... - 205 -
Oil pressure is low ..................................................................................................................... - 205 -
There is no oil pressure .............................................................................................................. - 205 -
Oil pressure is high .................................................................................................................... - 205 -
Oil is polluted ............................................................................................................................ - 205 -
Oil is emulsified ......................................................................................................................... - 205 -
Checking Fuel pump .......................................................................................................................... - 206 -
Cylinder Head / Distribution ..................................................................................................................... - 207 -
Exploded View of Cylinder Head / Distribution ................................................................................ - 207 -
Torque Value .............................................................................................................................. - 208 -
Fault Diagnosis .................................................................................................................................. - 209 -
Compression pressure is low ..................................................................................................... - 209 -
The sound of cylinder head is abnormal .................................................................................... - 209 -
Compression pressure is too high .............................................................................................. - 209 -
Special Tools ...................................................................................................................................... - 210 -
Cylinder Head .................................................................................................................................... - 211 -
Disassembling Cylinder Head ................................................................................................... - 211 -
Checking Cylinder Head............................................................................................................ - 214 -
Replacing Valve Guide .............................................................................................................. - 216 -
Finishing Valve Seat Ring.......................................................................................................... - 218 -
Cylinder Block / Piston.............................................................................................................................. - 221 -
Exploded View of Cylinder Block / Piston ........................................................................................ - 221 -
Exploded View of Crankshaft ............................................................................................................ - 222 -
Torque Value .............................................................................................................................. - 224 -
Fault Diagnosis .................................................................................................................................. - 225 -
Compression pressure is high .................................................................................................... - 225 -
Exhaust pipe is emitting white smoke ....................................................................................... - 225 -
8
The sound of piston is abnormal ................................................................................................ - 225 -
Special Tools ...................................................................................................................................... - 226 -
Cylinder Block ................................................................................................................................... - 228 -
Disassembling ............................................................................................................................ - 228 -
Check ......................................................................................................................................... - 228 -
Piston ................................................................................................................................................. - 228 -
Disassembling ............................................................................................................................ - 228 -
Check ......................................................................................................................................... - 229 -
Installation ................................................................................................................................. - 231 -
Installation of Cylinder Block.................................................................................................... - 232 -
Crankshaft.......................................................................................................................................... - 232 -
Check ......................................................................................................................................... - 232 -
Sub-assembly of Crankcase ....................................................................................................................... - 234 -
Exploded View of Crankcase ............................................................................................................. - 234 -
Dismounting and Mounting Diagram of Crankcase Bearing............................................................. - 235 -
Overview.................................................................................................................................... - 236 -
Torque Value .............................................................................................................................. - 236 -
Crankcase........................................................................................................................................... - 237 -
Disassembling Crankcase .......................................................................................................... - 237 -
Checking Crankcase .................................................................................................................. - 237 -
Assembling Crankcase............................................................................................................... - 239 -
Clutch......................................................................................................................................................... - 241 -
Exploded View of Left Cover ............................................................................................................ - 241 -
Exploded View of Clutch ................................................................................................................... - 242 -
Torque Value .............................................................................................................................. - 244 -
Special Tools ...................................................................................................................................... - 245 -
Clutch lever is too hard to pull................................................................................................... - 246 -
Clutch is slipping when accelerating ......................................................................................... - 246 -
Clutch does not disengage or clutch disengages suddenly during the running of motorcycle ... - 246 -
Right Cover........................................................................................................................................ - 247 -
Disassembing Right Cover ........................................................................................................ - 247 -
Assembling Right Cover ............................................................................................................ - 247 -
Clutch................................................................................................................................................. - 248 -
Disassembling Clutch ................................................................................................................ - 248 -
Assembling Clutch..................................................................................................................... - 249 -
Check ......................................................................................................................................... - 250 -
Subassembly of Cylinder Head Cover ....................................................................................................... - 252 -
Exploded View of Cylinder Head Cover ........................................................................................... - 252 -
Overview ........................................................................................................................................... - 253 -
9
Torque Valve .............................................................................................................................. - 253 -
Cylinder Head Cover ......................................................................................................................... - 253 -
Disassembling Cylinder Head Cover ......................................................................................... - 253 -
Checking Cylinder Head Cover ................................................................................................. - 254 -
Installing Cylinder Head Cover ................................................................................................. - 254 -
Kickstarter Component .............................................................................................................................. - 255 -
Exploded View of Kickstarter Component ........................................................................................ - 255 -
Overview.................................................................................................................................... - 256 -
Torque Value .............................................................................................................................. - 256 -
Kickstarter Mechnism ........................................................................................................................ - 256 -
Disassembling Kickstarter Mechanism...................................................................................... - 256 -
Installing Kickstarter Mechanism .............................................................................................. - 257 -
Gearshift Mechanism ................................................................................................................................. - 258 -
Exploded View of Gearshift Mechanism ........................................................................................... - 258 -
Torque Value .............................................................................................................................. - 259 -
It is difficult to shift gears .......................................................................................................... - 259 -
Shift pedal is not returned .......................................................................................................... - 259 -
Gearshift Mechanism ......................................................................................................................... - 260 -
Disassembling gearshift mechanism .......................................................................................... - 260 -
Checking Gearshift Mechanism................................................................................................. - 261 -
Installing Gearshift Mechanism ................................................................................................. - 261 -
Drive System ............................................................................................................................................. - 262 -
Exploded View of Drive System........................................................................................................ - 262 -
Drive system trips over stop or is out of gear ............................................................................ - 264 -
The noise of engine is too large ................................................................................................. - 264 -
Primary Shaft Component ................................................................................................................. - 265 -
Auxiliary Shaft Component ............................................................................................................... - 265 -
Check ................................................................................................................................................. - 266 -
Installing Drive System ..................................................................................................................... - 268 -
Assembling Primary Shaft Component and Aauxiliary Shaft Component ................................ - 268 -
Installng Drive System............................................................................................................... - 269 -
Starter Mechanism ..................................................................................................................................... - 271 -
Exploded View of Starter Mechanism ............................................................................................... - 271 -
Torque Value .............................................................................................................................. - 272 -
Engine cannot start .................................................................................................................... - 272 -
Starter Mechanism ............................................................................................................................. - 273 -
Disassembling Starter Mechanism ............................................................................................. - 273 -
Installing Starter Mechanism ..................................................................................................... - 275 -
Chapter V Finished Motorcycle ......................................................................................................................... - 276 -
10
Wheel / Tire ............................................................................................................................................... - 281 -
Exploded View of Front Wheel / Tire ................................................................................................ - 281 -
Special Tools ...................................................................................................................................... - 285 -
Wheel (Rim) ...................................................................................................................................... - 286 -
Disassembling Front Wheel ....................................................................................................... - 286 -
Installing Front Wheel ............................................................................................................... - 287 -
Disassembling Rear Wheel ........................................................................................................ - 288 -
Installing Rear Wheel ................................................................................................................ - 290 -
Checking Wheels ....................................................................................................................... - 291 -
Checking Wheel Axle ................................................................................................................ - 291 -
Checking Dynamic Balance....................................................................................................... - 292 -
Adjusting Dynamic Balance ...................................................................................................... - 292 -
Disassembling Grip End ............................................................................................................ - 292 -
Installing Grip End .................................................................................................................... - 293 -
Checking / Adjusting Tire Pressure............................................................................................ - 294 -
Checking Tire............................................................................................................................. - 294 -
Disassembling Tire .................................................................................................................... - 295 -
Installing Tire ............................................................................................................................. - 296 -
Hub Bearing ....................................................................................................................................... - 298 -
Disassembling Hub Bearing ...................................................................................................... - 298 -
Installing Hub Bearing ............................................................................................................... - 298 -
Checking Hub Bearing............................................................................................................... - 299 -
Hub Bearing Lubrication ........................................................................................................... - 299 -
Drive Mechanism....................................................................................................................................... - 300 -
Exploded View of Drive Mechanism ................................................................................................ - 300 -
Special Tools ...................................................................................................................................... - 303 -
Drive Chain........................................................................................................................................ - 304 -
Checking the Slackness of Drive Chain..................................................................................... - 304 -
Checking / Adjusting Wheel Alignment .................................................................................... - 304 -
Checking the Wear of Drive Chain ............................................................................................ - 304 -
Lubrication of Drive Chain ........................................................................................................ - 304 -
Disassembling Drive Chain ....................................................................................................... - 304 -
Installing Drive Chain................................................................................................................ - 305 -
Sprocket, Shaft Sleeve, Shaft Sleeve Bearing ................................................................................... - 306 -
Disassembling Rear Sprocket .................................................................................................... - 306 -
Installing Rear Sprocket............................................................................................................. - 306 -
Disassembling Shaft Sleeve Bearing ......................................................................................... - 307 -
Installing Shaft Sleeve Bearing.................................................................................................. - 307 -
Checking Shaft Sleeve Bearing ................................................................................................. - 307 -
Lubrication of Shaft Sleeve Bearing .......................................................................................... - 307 -
Checking the Damper of Shaft Sleeve ....................................................................................... - 308 -
Checking the Wear of Sprocket ................................................................................................. - 308 -
Checking the Deformation of Rear Sprocket ............................................................................. - 308 -
Brake.......................................................................................................................................................... - 309 -
11
Exploded View of Front Brake .......................................................................................................... - 309 -
Exploded View of Rear Brake ........................................................................................................... - 311 -
CBS of Hydraulic Brake .................................................................................................................... - 313 -
Special Tools ...................................................................................................................................... - 317 -
Brake Lever, Brake Pedal .................................................................................................................. - 318 -
Checking the position of brake pedal......................................................................................... - 318 -
Adjusting the Position of Brake Pedal ....................................................................................... - 318 -
Removing the Brake Pedal ........................................................................................................ - 319 -
Installing the Brake Pedal .......................................................................................................... - 319 -
Calipers .............................................................................................................................................. - 321 -
Disassembling Front Calipers .................................................................................................... - 321 -
Disassembling Rear Calipers ..................................................................................................... - 322 -
Installing Calipers ...................................................................................................................... - 323 -
Assembling Front Calipers ........................................................................................................ - 323 -
Assembling Rear Calipers ......................................................................................................... - 323 -
Checking the Liquid Seal of Calipers for Damage .................................................................... - 323 -
Checking Dust Seal of the Calipers for Damage ....................................................................... - 324 -
Checking the Calipers Piston and Brake Cylinder for Damage ................................................. - 326 -
Brake pad ........................................................................................................................................... - 327 -
Disassembling Front Brake pad ................................................................................................. - 327 -
Installing Front Brake pad ......................................................................................................... - 328 -
Disassembling RearBrake pad ................................................................................................... - 328 -
Installing Rear Brake Pad .......................................................................................................... - 329 -
Checking the Wear of Brake Pad ............................................................................................... - 329 -
Master Cylinder ................................................................................................................................. - 329 -
Disassembling Front Master Cylinder ....................................................................................... - 329 -
Installing Front Master Cylinder................................................................................................ - 330 -
Disassembling Rear Master Cylinder ........................................................................................ - 331 -
Installing Rear Master Cylinder ................................................................................................. - 331 -
Assembling Master Cylinder ..................................................................................................... - 332 -
Checking Master Cylinder (Visual Check) ................................................................................ - 332 -
Brake Discs ........................................................................................................................................ - 333 -
Disassembling Brake Discs ....................................................................................................... - 333 -
Installing Brake Disc ................................................................................................................. - 333 -
Checking the Wear of Brake Disc .............................................................................................. - 333 -
Checking the Deformation of Brake Disc .................................................................................. - 334 -
Brake Fluid ........................................................................................................................................ - 335 -
Checking the Level of Brake Fluid ............................................................................................ - 335 -
Replacing Brake Fluid ............................................................................................................... - 335 -
Exhausting Air from Brake Pipe ................................................................................................ - 335 -
Brake Hose ........................................................................................................................................ - 337 -
Disassembling / Installing Brake Hose and Brake Pipe ............................................................. - 337 -
12
Checking Brake Hose and Brake Pipe ....................................................................................... - 337 -
Suspension System .................................................................................................................................... - 338 -
Exploded View of Front Suspension System ..................................................................................... - 338 -
Exploded View of Rear Suspension System ...................................................................................... - 340 -
Special Tools ...................................................................................................................................... - 342 -
Front Shock Absorber ........................................................................................................................ - 343 -
Disassembling Front Shock Absorber ........................................................................................ - 343 -
Installing Front Shock Absorber ................................................................................................ - 344 -
Replacing Front Shock Absorber Oil......................................................................................... - 344 -
Checking Inner Pipe and Outer Pipe.......................................................................................... - 350 -
Checking Dust Seal.................................................................................................................... - 350 -
Checking Spring Tension ........................................................................................................... - 350 -
Rear Shock Absorber ......................................................................................................................... - 351 -
Adjusting Spring Pre-tightening Force ...................................................................................... - 351 -
Disassembling Rear Shock Absorber ......................................................................................... - 352 -
Installing Rear Shock Absorber ................................................................................................. - 353 -
Checking Rear Shock Absorber ................................................................................................. - 353 -
Rear Swing Arm ................................................................................................................................ - 354 -
Disassembling Swing Arm......................................................................................................... - 354 -
Installing Swing Arm ................................................................................................................. - 354 -
Disassembling Swing Arm Bushing .......................................................................................... - 355 -
Checking Damper ...................................................................................................................... - 355 -
Control System .......................................................................................................................................... - 356 -
Exploded View of Control System ............................................................................................ - 356 -
Special Tools .............................................................................................................................. - 358 -
Control System .................................................................................................................................. - 359 -
Checking Control System .......................................................................................................... - 359 -
Adjusting Control System.......................................................................................................... - 359 -
Steering Lever .................................................................................................................................... - 360 -
Disassembling Steering Lever and Steering Lever Bearing....................................................... - 360 -
Installing Steering Lever and Steering Lever Bearing ............................................................... - 361 -
Steering Lever Bearing Lubrication........................................................................................... - 364 -
Checking Deformation of Steering Lever .................................................................................. - 364 -
Handlebar........................................................................................................................................... - 365 -
Disassembling Handlebar .......................................................................................................... - 365 -
Installing Handlebar................................................................................................................... - 366 -
Frame ......................................................................................................................................................... - 368 -
Exploded View of Frame ................................................................................................................... - 368 -
Exploded View of Left Pedal ............................................................................................................. - 370 -
Exploded View of Right Pedal........................................................................................................... - 372 -
Exploded View of Muffler ................................................................................................................. - 374 -
Exploded View of Front Fender ......................................................................................................... - 376 -
Exploded View of Rear Fender .......................................................................................................... - 378 -
Exploded View of Cowling................................................................................................................ - 380 -
Exploded View of Fuel Tank Guard .................................................................................................. - 382 -
13
Exploded View of Seat Cushion and Guard....................................................................................... - 384 -
Exploded View of Engine .................................................................................................................. - 386 -
Seat Cushion ...................................................................................................................................... - 388 -
Disassembling Seat Cushion ...................................................................................................... - 388 -
Installing Seat Cushion .............................................................................................................. - 388 -
Cowling ............................................................................................................................................. - 389 -
Disassembling Cowling ............................................................................................................. - 389 -
Installing Cowling ..................................................................................................................... - 390 -
Guard ................................................................................................................................................. - 391 -
Disassembling Left Guard ......................................................................................................... - 391 -
Installing Left Guard.................................................................................................................. - 391 -
Disassembling Right Guard ....................................................................................................... - 392 -
Installing Right Guard ............................................................................................................... - 392 -
Rear Tail Cover .................................................................................................................................. - 393 -
Disassembling Tail Cover .......................................................................................................... - 393 -
Installing Tail Cover .................................................................................................................. - 393 -
Rear Fender........................................................................................................................................ - 394 -
Disassembling Rear Fender ....................................................................................................... - 394 -
Installing Rear Fender ................................................................................................................ - 394 -
Front Fender....................................................................................................................................... - 395 -
Disassembling Front Fender ...................................................................................................... - 395 -
Installing Front Fender............................................................................................................... - 395 -
Fuel Tank Guard and Fairing ............................................................................................................. - 396 -
Disassembling Fuel Tank Guard ................................................................................................ - 396 -
Installing Fuel Tank Guard ........................................................................................................ - 396 -
Frame ................................................................................................................................................. - 397 -
Disassembling Frame ................................................................................................................. - 397 -
Installing Frame ......................................................................................................................... - 397 -
Checking Frame ......................................................................................................................... - 397 -
Side Stand .......................................................................................................................................... - 398 -
Disassembling Side Stand .......................................................................................................... - 398 -
Installing Side Stand .................................................................................................................. - 398 -
Left Front Pedal ................................................................................................................................. - 399 -
Disassembling Left Front Pedal ................................................................................................. - 399 -
Installing Left Front Pedal ......................................................................................................... - 400 -
Left Rear Pedal .................................................................................................................................. - 401 -
Disassembling Left Rear Pedal .................................................................................................. - 401 -
Installing Left Rear Pedal .......................................................................................................... - 401 -
Front Right Pedal ............................................................................................................................... - 402 -
Disassembling Front Right Pedal .............................................................................................. - 402 -
Installing Front Right Pedal ....................................................................................................... - 402 -
Rear Right Pedal ................................................................................................................................ - 403 -
Disassembling Rear Right Pedal................................................................................................ - 403 -
Installing Rear Right Pedal ........................................................................................................ - 403 -
Muffler ............................................................................................................................................... - 404 -
Disassembling Muffler .............................................................................................................. - 404 -
Installing Muffler ....................................................................................................................... - 406 -
14
Disassembling/Installing Engine ....................................................................................................... - 407 -
Exploded View of Engine Disassembly and Installation ........................................................... - 407 -
Disassembling Engine................................................................................................................ - 409 -
Installing Engine ........................................................................................................................ - 415 -
Chapter VI Electrical System ............................................................................................................................ - 418 -
Precautions................................................................................................................................................. - 421 -
Special Tools .............................................................................................................................................. - 423 -
Electrical Wiring ........................................................................................................................................ - 424 -
Wiring Inspection .............................................................................................................................. - 424 -
Charging System........................................................................................................................................ - 425 -
Circuit Diagram of Charging System ................................................................................................ - 425 -
Battery ............................................................................................................................................... - 426 -
Disassembling Battery ............................................................................................................... - 426 -
Battery Installation..................................................................................................................... - 427 -
Battery Activation ...................................................................................................................... - 427 -
Initial Charge ............................................................................................................................. - 429 -
Charging State Inspection .......................................................................................................... - 430 -
Magneto ............................................................................................................................................. - 430 -
Disassembling Magneto............................................................................................................. - 431 -
Checking Magneto ..................................................................................................................... - 432 -
Installing Magneto ..................................................................................................................... - 434 -
Rectifier ............................................................................................................................................. - 435 -
Disassebling rectifier: ................................................................................................................ - 435 -
Main Wiring Terminal Circuit Inspection .................................................................................. - 435 -
Rectifier Inspection .................................................................................................................... - 435 -
Rectifier Installation .................................................................................................................. - 436 -
Ignition System .......................................................................................................................................... - 437 -
Circuit Diagram of Ignition System................................................................................................... - 437 -
Operation Precautions ........................................................................................................................ - 438 -
Crankshaft Sensor .............................................................................................................................. - 439 -
Disassembling Crankshaft Position Sensor ............................................................................... - 439 -
Check ......................................................................................................................................... - 439 -
Ignition Coil ....................................................................................................................................... - 439 -
Disassembling Ignition Coil: ..................................................................................................... - 439 -
Checking Ignition Coil............................................................................................................... - 440 -
Installing ignition coil ................................................................................................................ - 440 -
Spark Plug.......................................................................................................................................... - 440 -
Checking Spark Plug ................................................................................................................. - 440 -
Check ......................................................................................................................................... - 441 -
IC Igniter Inspection .................................................................................................................. - 441 -
ECU Group ........................................................................................................................................ - 442 -
Ignition System Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... - 443 -
Starter System ............................................................................................................................................ - 444 -
Circuit Diagram of Starter System..................................................................................................... - 444 -
Starter Motor ...................................................................................................................................... - 445 -
Disassembling Starter Motor ..................................................................................................... - 445 -
15
Checking Starter Motor ............................................................................................................. - 445 -
Carbon Brush Inspection ........................................................................................................... - 446 -
Commutator Cleaning and Inspection ....................................................................................... - 446 -
Carbon Brush Lead Inspection .................................................................................................. - 447 -
Right-hand End Cover Assembly Inspection ............................................................................. - 447 -
Starter Relay ...................................................................................................................................... - 448 -
Disassembling Starter Relay ...................................................................................................... - 448 -
Checking Starter Relay .............................................................................................................. - 448 -
Installing Starter Relay .............................................................................................................. - 449 -
Lighting System ......................................................................................................................................... - 450 -
Headlight ........................................................................................................................................... - 450 -
Tail light ............................................................................................................................................. - 450 -
Turn Signal Light ............................................................................................................................... - 451 -
License Plate Light ............................................................................................................................ - 451 -
Instrument .................................................................................................................................................. - 452 -
Disassembling Instrument.................................................................................................................. - 452 -
Instrument and Indicator Light .......................................................................................................... - 452 -
Status Indicator Light................................................................................................................. - 453 -
Function Buttons ........................................................................................................................ - 453 -
Tachometer: ............................................................................................................................... - 454 -
All / part of kilometer counters .................................................................................................. - 454 -
Speedometer .............................................................................................................................. - 454 -
Digital clock (8): ........................................................................................................................ - 454 -
Fuel gauge (9): ........................................................................................................................... - 454 -
Switch, Sensor and Other Parts ................................................................................................................. - 455 -
Power Lock Switch ............................................................................................................................ - 455 -
Disassembling power lock ......................................................................................................... - 455 -
Power Lock Inspection .............................................................................................................. - 455 -
Handle Switch.................................................................................................................................... - 456 -
Switch State (Non-Europe) ........................................................................................................ - 456 -
Switch State (Europe) ................................................................................................................ - 457 -
Checking the time to turn on brake lamp ........................................................................................... - 459 -
Adjsuting the time to turn on brake lamp .......................................................................................... - 459 -
Switch Inspection............................................................................................................................... - 459 -
Rear Brake Lamp Switch Connection........................................................................................ - 459 -
Side Stand Switch Connection ................................................................................................... - 459 -
Oil Level Sensor ................................................................................................................................ - 460 -
Disassemble Oil Level Sensor ................................................................................................... - 460 -
Checking Oil Level Sensor ........................................................................................................ - 460 -
Installing Oil Level Sensor ........................................................................................................ - 461 -
Horn ................................................................................................................................................... - 462 -
Disassembling Horn................................................................................................................... - 462 -
Checking Horn ........................................................................................................................... - 462 -
Installing Horn ........................................................................................................................... - 462 -
Fuse .................................................................................................................................................... - 463 -
Disassmbling Fuse ..................................................................................................................... - 463 -
Installing Fuse ............................................................................................................................ - 463 -
16
Checking Fuse ........................................................................................................................... - 463 -
Chapter VII Appendix ....................................................................................................................................... - 465 -
Winding Method of Cable, Wire and Hose ................................................................................................ - 467 -
Main Cable ........................................................................................................................................ - 467 -
Throttle Cable .................................................................................................................................... - 470 -
Clutch Cable ...................................................................................................................................... - 471 -
Oil Pipe .............................................................................................................................................. - 472 -
Leaking pipe Troubleshooting Guide ..................................................................................................... - 473 -
Troubleshooting Guide .............................................................................................................................. - 473 -
The engine cannot start or is difficult to start: ................................................................................... - 473 -
Starter motor does not run: ........................................................................................................ - 473 -
Starter motor is running, but the engine does not run: ............................................................... - 473 -
Engine does not run: .................................................................................................................. - 473 -
There is no fuel flow: ................................................................................................................. - 473 -
There is no spark; spark is weak: ............................................................................................... - 473 -
There is problem with fuel / air mixture: ................................................................................... - 474 -
Cylinder pressure is too low: ..................................................................................................... - 474 -
The running is abnormal during low-speed driving: .......................................................................... - 474 -
Spark is weak: ............................................................................................................................ - 474 -
Others: ....................................................................................................................................... - 475 -
Motorcycle cannot run properly or do not have sufficient power at high speed:....................... - 475 -
Ignition is abnormal: .................................................................................................................. - 475 -
There is a “click” to give an alarm for fault:.............................................................................. - 476 -
Others: ....................................................................................................................................... - 476 -
Temperature is too high: .................................................................................................................... - 476 -
Ignition is abnormal: .................................................................................................................. - 476 -
Muffler is overheated: ................................................................................................................ - 476 -
Cylinder pressure is too high: .................................................................................................... - 477 -
Insufficient engine output power: .............................................................................................. - 477 -
Improperly adding lubrication oil: ............................................................................................. - 477 -
Oil cooler is abnormal: .............................................................................................................. - 477 -
Clutch is abnormal: ............................................................................................................................ - 477 -
Clutch is slipping: ...................................................................................................................... - 477 -
Clutch cannot be properly separated:......................................................................................... - 477 -
There is a problem with shifting： .................................................................................................... - 477 -
It is unable to engage the gear; control pedal cannot be reset： ................................................ - 477 -
Trip Stop .................................................................................................................................... - 477 -
Excessive speed change: ............................................................................................................ - 478 -
Engine gives an abnormal noise: ....................................................................................................... - 478 -
There is a “click” to give an alarm for fault:.............................................................................. - 478 -
There is knocking noise at piston: ............................................................................................. - 478 -
Valve gives a noise:.................................................................................................................... - 478 -
17
The drive system makes an unusual noise: ........................................................................................ - 478 -
Clutch noise: .............................................................................................................................. - 478 -
Transmission device makes a noise: .......................................................................................... - 479 -
Drive system makes a noise: ...................................................................................................... - 479 -
The frame gives an unusual noise: ..................................................................................................... - 479 -
Front fork gives a noise: ............................................................................................................ - 479 -
Rear shock absorber gives a noise: ............................................................................................ - 479 -
Brake disc gives a noise:............................................................................................................ - 479 -
Other noises: .............................................................................................................................. - 479 -
Oil perssure warning light is on : ....................................................................................................... - 479 -
Too much exhaust: ............................................................................................................................. - 479 -
White exhaust: ........................................................................................................................... - 479 -
Black exhaust:............................................................................................................................ - 479 -
Brown exhaust: .......................................................................................................................... - 479 -
Poor performance and / or stability: .................................................................................................. - 479 -
The handlebar is difficult to turn: .............................................................................................. - 479 -
The handlebar shakes or vibrates severely: ............................................................................... - 480 -
Handlebar is swinging to one side: ............................................................................................ - 480 -
Shock absorption effect is not ideal: .......................................................................................... - 480 -
Brake cannot work ..................................................................................................................... - 480 -
Battery fault: ...................................................................................................................................... - 480 -
Battery power runs out:.............................................................................................................. - 480 -
Battery overcharging: ................................................................................................................ - 481 -
Circuit Diagram ......................................................................................................................................... - 482 -
18
Preface
This Manual is designed for well-trained according to the main systems of motorcycle. “Quick
mechanics in well-equipped shops. And the contents Guide” can make you know all the systems of the
of this Manual are exhaustive and the basic motorcycle at a glance and help you quickly find the
information is complete, so the motorcycle owner can corresponding chapters. Each chapter has a
carry out the basic maintenance and repair work with comprehensive catalog.
the help of this Manual. In order to maintain or repair For example, if you want to understand the
the motorcycles smoothly, the operator must have the ignition coil, you can find the chapter of “Electrical
basic knowledge of the mechanic and understand how System” by using the “Quick Guide” and then find the
to correctly use the maintenance tools and the process section in which the “Ignition Coil” is from the
of workshop. If the motorcycle owner has insufficient Contents in the first page.
experience or cannot ensure to adjust, maintain and If you see the following warning and alert signs,
repair the motorcycle properly, he/she must ask a please pay attention to the contents on the signs!
qualified mechanic to carry out the above operations. Remember safe operation!
In order to carry out the above operations
efficiently and avoid serious mistakes, it is necessary
Warning
to read this Manual, familiarize yourself with the
This warning sign is used to remind operation
relevant procedures and operate in a clean place
personnel to comply with the specific descriptions
before operation. Do not use other temporary
or procedures, otherwise the personal injury or
substitutes if there are Special Tools or equipment
death will be caused.
specified in this Manual. The accuracy of
measurement results can be ensured only by using the
appropriate tools. In addition, the use of alternative Note
tools will affect the safety of operations. This alert sign is used to remind operation
During the warranty period, it is recommended to personnel to comply with the specific descriptions
carry out repair and maintenance in strict accordance or procedures, otherwise the equipment will be
with this Maintenance Manual. If the motorcycle damaged or destroyed.
owner fails to perform maintenance or repair in
accordance with this Manual, the motorcycle will not In addition to “Warning” and “Alert”, this Manual
covered by the warranty. also includes another four signs to help you
In order to extend the service life of your distinguish different information.
motorcycle as far as possible, please comply with the
following requirements:
Remark
 Comply with the Regular Maintenance Table in ○This sign indicates some operation tips which can
the maintenance manual; make operation more convenient and improve the
 Carefully observe and pay attention to regular efficiency.
maintenance; ●This sign indicates a certain step or a task to be
 Use appropriate tools and original Benelli completed.
motorcycle parts. This Maintenance Manual has ○This sign indicates a certain substep or how to
described the specific tools, instruments and test complete the work of this step. This symbol may be
devices required in the maintenance process of also placed in front of a certain “Remark”.
Benelli motorcycle. For the original parts used as ★ This sign indicates the measures taken in
spare parts, see List of Parts. accordance with the test or check results in the
 Carry out operations in strict accordance with the previous step.
procedures in this Manual, do not take a shortcut There are exploded views of system parts below the
for quickness. contents of most of the chapters. These illustrations
 Remember to keep detailed maintenance and describe the parts that the torque, oil, grease or thread
repair records, including date and new parts fastening agent needs to be tightened specifically
installed. during installation.
How to use this Manual
This Manual describes all systems in chapters
19
Chapter I Basic Information
Contents
Notes before Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... - 21 -

Battery Grounding ............................................................................................................................... - 21 -
Sharp Edge of Part ............................................................................................................................... - 21 -
Solvent ................................................................................................................................................. - 21 -
Cleaning Motorcycle before Disassembly ........................................................................................... - 22 -
Collecting and Cleaning Removed Part ............................................................................................... - 22 -
Storing Removed Part .......................................................................................................................... - 22 -
Check ................................................................................................................................................... - 22 -
Assembly Order ................................................................................................................................... - 23 -
Fastening Order ................................................................................................................................... - 23 -
Tightening Torque ................................................................................................................................ - 23 -
Force .................................................................................................................................................... - 24 -
Gasket and O-Ring Seal....................................................................................................................... - 24 -
Mould Closing Glue and Threaded Fastening Glue............................................................................. - 24 -
Press Fitting ......................................................................................................................................... - 24 -
Ball Bearing and Needle Bearing ........................................................................................................ - 26 -
Oil Seal and Grease Oil Seal................................................................................................................ - 26 -
Circlip and Cotter Pin .......................................................................................................................... - 27 -
Lubrication........................................................................................................................................... - 27 -
Rotation Direction of Engine ............................................................................................................... - 27 -
Wire ..................................................................................................................................................... - 27 -
Cable Connector Check ....................................................................................................................... - 28 -
1. Disconnection .......................................................................................................................... - 28 -
2. Check ....................................................................................................................................... - 28 -
3. Check ....................................................................................................................................... - 28 -
4. Check ....................................................................................................................................... - 29 -
5. Check ....................................................................................................................................... - 29 -
Cable Arrangement .............................................................................................................................. - 30 -
Tool ...................................................................................................................................................... - 30 -
Model Information ....................................................................................................................................... - 31 -
China.................................................................................................................................................... - 31 -
Europe.................................................................................................................................................. - 33 -
Non-Europe ......................................................................................................................................... - 35 -
Basic Specification ...................................................................................................................................... - 38 -
General Technical Parameter ....................................................................................................................... - 40 -
Unit Conversion Table ......................................................................................................................... - 43 -
- 20 -
Notes before Maintenance
Please read the following precautions before checking, disassembling or assembling motorcycles. In order to
facilitate the actual operation, the chapters are provided with notes, illustrations, pictures, precautions and detailed
descriptions. This section describes the special precautions during the removal and reassembly or disassembly and
reassembly of common parts.
Pay special attention to the following matters:
Battery Grounding
Before any operation is conducted for the
motorcycle, disconnect the battery wire and battery to
prevent the engine from starting accidentally.
Disconnect the negative wire (-) and then disconnect
the positive wire (+). After the operation is completed,
connect the positive wire (+) to the positive terminal
(+) of the battery and then connect the negative wire
(-) to the negative terminal (-).
Sharp Edge of Part

To avoid that the hands are scratched by the sharp
edges of parts, gloves must be worn when the
larger-size or heavier parts are moved.
Solvent
The solvent with high flash point shall be used
when parts are cleaned. Use the solvent with high flash
point according to the instructions provided by the
solvent manufacturer.
- 21 -
Cleaning Motorcycle before Disassembly
Thoroughly clean the motorcycle before
disassembly. If dust or other foreign matters enter the
sealing area in the disassembly process, the excessive
wear will be caused and the performance of
motorcycles will be reduced.
Collecting and Cleaning Removed Part

The removed parts are easily confused. So
arrange the removed parts in accordance with the
disassembly order and reinstall the parts after they are
cleaned.
Storing Removed Part

After all parts (including subparts) are cleaned,
store the parts in a clean area. Cover the parts with a
clean cloth or plastic film to prevent any foreign
matters from falling into the parts before reassembly.
Check
The use of worn or damaged parts may lead to
major accidents. Visually check whether the removed
parts have been corroded, discolored or suffered other
damages. The use limits of individual parts are
described in the appropriate chapters of this Manual. If
any damage is found or the part has exceeded the use
limit, the part must be replaced.
- 22 -
Replacement Part
The replacement part must be an original part of
Benelli or a part recommended by Benelli. Gaskets,
O-ring seals, oil seals, grease seals, circlips or cotter
pins and other parts must be replaced with new parts
once they are removed.
Assembly Order
In most cases, the assembly order is contrary to
the disassembly order, but the assembly must be
carried out according to the order given if this
Maintenance Manual gives the assembly order.
Fastening Order
In general, when a part is fastened with several
bolts, nuts or screws, put the part into the
corresponding hole, screw them in without applying
torque, and then tighten them in the specified order to
prevent the warping or deformation which can cause
faults of parts. Whereas, if the bolts, nuts or screws
need to be unscrewed, turn a quarter circle, unscrew
them and then continue to screw them off. If the
fastening order is not specified, the fasteners shall be
alternately screwed diagonally.
Tightening Torque
If a wrong torque is applied to a bolt, nut, or
screw, the serious damage may be caused. It is
necessary to tighten the fasteners with a good quality
torque wrench in accordance with the specified torque.
- 23 -
Force
The common sense and basic ability of judgement

must be owned in the part removal and installation
process to prevent excessive force from resulting in
maintenance difficulties or high maintenance cost. If
necessary, remove the screws with threaded fastening glue
by using a pneumatic wrench. If it is needed to beat the
fastener, a mallet must be used.
Gasket and O-Ring Seal
If the gasket and O-ring seal hardens, shrinks or is

damaged after they are removed, the sealing performance
will be reduced. Remove the old gasket and thoroughly
clean the sealing surface to prevent any gasket material or
other materials from remaining on the sealing surface. Use
a new gasket during reinstallation and replace the O-ring
seal which has been used simultaneously.
Mould Closing Glue and Threaded Fastening Glue
If it is needed to use the mould closing glue or

threaded fastening glue, the contact surface must be
cleaned first to prevent any oil stain from remaining on
the contact surface before the mould closing glue and
threaded fastening glue are used. Do not use too much
mould closing glue or threaded fastening glue, because
excessive mould closing glue or threaded fastening glue
will block the oil channel and cause serious damages.
Press Fitting
- 24 -
Bearings, oil seals and other parts can be fit in place
only by press-fitting, so a small amount of oil shall be
applied on the contact parts. The parts must be aligned to
the contact part during installation and then the parts can
be slowly pressed.
- 25 -
Ball Bearing and Needle Bearing
If not necessary, do not remove the ball or needle in

the bearing. Once the ball or needle is removed, it must be
replaced with a new one. When pressing the bearing, note
that the manufacturer and size signs shall be placed
outward. Apply force to the correct bearing race (as
shown in the figure) and press the bearing in place.
If the force is applied to the wrong bearing race, the
stress on inner ring and outer ring will produce, which
will damage the bearing.
Oil Seal and Grease Oil Seal
If not necessary, do not remove the oil seal or grease

oil seal which has been tightly sealed. Once it is removed,
it must be replaced with a new one. When pressing the
new oil seal, note that the manufacturer and size signs
shall be placed outward. Make sure that the oil seal is
correctly positioned.
Apply the grease on the edges of oil seal in

accordance with the specified quantity before it is
installed. Grease
- 26 -
Circlip and Cotter Pin
Replace the removed circlip or cotter pin with a
new one. In order to prevent deformation, the opening
of circlip or cotter pin cannot be too large during
installation.
Lubrication
In order to minimize the abrasion during
running-in, the lubricant must be applied to the
rotating parts or sliding parts. The appropriate amount
of lubricant or grease shall be injected in accordance
with the specifications, and this Manual will give the
various lubrication points.
Rotation Direction of Engine

When the crankshaft is rotated by hands, the
misjudgement of relevant clearance adjustment will be
caused if the rotation direction is wrong. So please
rotate the crankshaft in the positive direction
(clockwise direction from the output).
Wire
Dual-color wire: the first is the base color, then
the color of stripe. Unless noted otherwise, only the
wires with the same color can be connected.
- 27 -
Cable Connector Check
Make sure that there are no corrosion, moisture
and other foreign matters on the connector.
1. Disconnection
 Wire
 Connector
 Joint
2. Check
 Wire
 Connector
 Joint
If there are moisture traces, use the compressed air
to dry it.
If there is corrosion, plug the connection parts for
several times or use the rust remover, and replace
the parts with serious corrosion timely.
3. Check
 All connectors
 If any joint is loose, conduct correct connection
again.
Note
If the “A” pin on the terminal is flat, please bend it.
- 28 -
4. Check
 Wire
 Connector
 Joint
Note
Make sure that all joints are assembled firmly.
5. Check
Continuity (with multimeter)
Note
If there are no items to be checked, please wash the
terminals.
When checking the wire sheath, please carry out the
operations in accordance with Steps 1 to 3
If you want to correct the operations rapidly, please
use the [Contactor Reducer] sold in many spare
parts shops.
- 29 -
Cable Arrangement
Loose cable is a potential electrical safety hazard.
Check the latter cable after the cable is clamped to
ensure the electrical safety;
It is not allowed to bend the cable clamp in the
direction of welding spot;
Bind the cables at the specific position;
It is not allowed to arrange the cables at the end
of frame or at the position of sharp corner;
It is not allowed to arrange the cables at the end
of bolts or screws;
The position of heat source or the position where
the cables may be clamped shall be avoided during
cable arrangement;
The cables shall not be pulled too tightly or too
loosely and shall not interfere with any adjacent part in
any turning position when they are arranged along the
faucet handle;
The cables shall be arranged smoothly without
distortion or tangle;
Make sure whether the connector sheath is
damaged or whether the connector is opened
excessively before the connector is docked.
If the cable is at the position of sharp corner or
corner, please protect it with tape or hose;
After the cable is repaired, bind up the bare parts
reliably with tape;
The control cables shall not be bent or twisted. If
the control cables are damaged, the manipulation will
not be flexible;
Tool
In order to make the measurement results
accurate, the instrument with accurate scale shall be
used. Read the instructions provided by the
manufacturer carefully before using the instrument.
Inaccurate measured values may affect the adjustment
results.
- 30 -
Model Information
China
Left view
- 31 -
Right view
- 32 -
Europe
(European standard) Left view
- 33 -
(European standard) Right view
- 34 -
Non-Europe
(Non-European) Left view
- 35 -
(Non-European) Right view
Frame No. Engine No.:

China: *LBBPEJ3E?????????* BJ154FMI-7A*□□□□□□□□*
Europe: *ZBNC02???????????*
Non-Europe: *LBBPEJ3E?????????*
- 36 -
Position of nameplate on frame
Nameplate is riveted on the frame
China Registered Vehicle

trademark Benelli model:
Two-wheeled motor vehicle Curb mass
Displacem
Engine model
ent
Zhejiang Qianjiang Motorcycle Co., Ltd. Manufactu
(China) red in:
Europe:
Non-Europe:
- 37 -
Basic Specification
China
Dimension Standard
Overall length 1840mm
Overall width 755mm
Overall height 1025mm
Wheel base 1215mm
Enrope and Non-Europe:
- 38 -
Dimension Standard
Overall length 1770mm
Overall width 760mm
Overall height 1025mm
Wheel base 1215mm
- 39 -
General Technical Parameter
Item BJ125-3E
Dimension China Enrope and Non-Europe:
Overall length 1840mm 1770mm
Overall width 755mm 760mm
Overall height 1025mm 1025mm
Wheel base 1215mm 1215mm
Height above ground 160mm 160mm
Height of seat 790mm 790mm
Curb mass : 121kg 124
Front wheel axle load 60kg
Rear wheel axle load 61kg
Capacity of fuel tank 7.2±0.3L 7.2±0.3L
Rated maximum payload 150kg 177kg
Performance
Minimum turning radius 5m
Engine European Standard
Type Four-stroke, double overhead camshaft, single cylinder
Cooling system Air cooling type
Cylinder diameter and travel 54×58.8mm 54×54.5mm
Displacement 135ml 125ml
Compression ratio 9.8：1
Maximum horsepower 9.3kW/9000rpm 8.2kw/9500rpm
Maximum torque 10.8N•m/7000rpm 10Nm/7000rpm
Idle speed-rpm 1500±100rpm/min
Cylinder pressure 1.25MPa/1500rpm
Fuel evaporation system EFI (Fuel injection)
Start-up system Electric starter
Ignition system Battery and coil (full-crystal ignition system)
Ignition advance angle control Electronic advance angle control (there is electronic igniter in ECU)
Ignition timing From 10° BTDC @1 100 r/min (rpm)
Spark plug A7RC
Valve timing :
Air inlet :
Open valve 41°
Closed valve 71°
Total time interval 292°
Air exhaust:
Open valve 64°
Closed valve 34°
Total time interval 278°
Lubrication system Force-feed and splash
Air cleaner Oil filtering type
- 40 -
Item BJ125-3E
Oil :
Type API SE, SFor SG
API SH, SJ or SL（Including JASO MA, MA1or MA2）
Viscosity SAE 10W-40
Capacity 1.1 L
Driving mechanism
Primary deceleration system:
Type Gear
Reduction ratio 3.750
Clutch type Wet multiple-piece type
Transmission:
Type 5-speed, regular mesh, reciprocating gear
Gear ratio:
First 2.833
Second 1.824
Third 1.333
Fourth 1.100
Fifth 0.909
Final drive system:
Type : Chain drive
Reduction ratio 2.800
Maximum design speed 95km/h
Gradeability ≥20°
Frame
Type Suspension spine frame
Caster angle (angle) 25°
Tail 94 mm
Front tire:
Type: Vacuum tire
Dimension : 120/70-12
Tire pressure 190±10kPa
Wheel type 12-spoke aluminium alloy
Rim dimension 12×MT3.00
Rim material Aluminium alloy
Rear tire :
Type Vacuum tire
Dimension 130/70-12
Tire pressure 210±10kPa
Wheel type 12-spoke aluminium alloy
Rim dimension 12×MT3.50
Rim material Aluminium alloy
- 41 -
Item BJ125-3E
Front suspension system:
Type Inverted, extension-sleeve, oil damping absorber
Total travel 125mm
Rear suspension system:
Type Single-cylinder, hydraulic spring, damping absorber
Total travel 51mm
Brake type:
Front wheel Single disc φ220mm
Rear wheel Single disc φ190mm
Electrical equipment
Battery 12V-6Ah
Head light:
Type Semi-closed reflected light beam
Bulb:
High beam light LED
Low beam light LED
Tail light/stoplight 12V/（LED）
Alternating-current
generator:
Type : Three-phase alternating-current generator
Rated output power 12.8V/200W/8500 rpm
If some changes are made, there will be no further notice and the changes may not be applicable in every country.
- 42 -
Unit Conversion Table
Prefix of unit: Unit of length:
Prefix Symbol Power km × 0.6214 = mile
mega M × 1 000 000 m × 3.281 = foot
kilo k × 1 000 mm × 0.03937 = inch
centi c ×0.01
milli m ×0.001 Unit of torque:
micro μ × 0.000001 N·m × 0.1020 = kgf·m
N·m × 0.7376 = ft·lb
Unit of mass: N·m × 8.851 = in·lb
kg ×2.205=lb kgf·m × 9.807 = N·m
g × 0.03527 = oz kgf·m × 7.233 = ft·lb
kgf·m × 86.80 = in·lb
Unit of volume
L × 0.2642 = gallon (US) Unit of pressure:
L × 0.2200 = gallon (imp) kPa × 0.01020 = kgf/cm²
L × 1.057 = quart (US) kPa × 0.1450 = psi
L × 0.8799 = quart (imp) kPa × 0.7501 = cmHg
L × 2.113 = pint (US) kgf/cm² × 98.07 = kPa
L × 1.816 = pint (imp) kgf/cm² × 14.22 = psi
mL × 0.03381 = ounce (US) cmHg×1.333=kPa
mL × 0.02816 = ounce (imp)
mL × 0.06102 = cubic inch Unit of speed:
km/h × 0.6214 = mph
Mechanical unit: Unit of Power:
N × 0.1020 = kg kW ×1.360=PS
N × 0.2248 = lb kW ×1.341=HP
kg ×9.807=N PS × 0.7355 = kW
kg ×2.205=lb PS × 0.9863 = HP
Unit of temperature:
- 43 -
Chapter II Regular Maintenance
Contents
Regular Maintenance Table ......................................................................................................................... - 46 -

Torque and Locking Agent .......................................................................................................................... - 48 -
Main Locking Torque Specifications ................................................................................................... - 48 -
Nut, Bolt, Screw Fastening Torque and Relative Parameters .............................................................. - 52 -
Technical Parameters ................................................................................................................................... - 53 -
Special Tools ................................................................................................................................................ - 55 -
Regular Maintenance Procedures ................................................................................................................ - 56 -
Electronic Fuel Injection System (EFI) ............................................................................................... - 56 -
Checking Throttle Control System .............................................................................................. - 56 -
Checking Idle Speed .................................................................................................................... - 57 -
Checking Fuel Hose (Fuel Leakage, Hose Break and Hose Installation Situations) ................... - 58 -
Checking Fuel Evaporation and Recovery System (Chinese, European and US Models) .......... - 59 -
Engine Cylinder Head and Cylinder Head Cover ................................................................................ - 61 -
Checking Valve Clearance ........................................................................................................... - 61 -
Adjusting Valve Clearance........................................................................................................... - 63 -
Clutch................................................................................................................................................... - 64 -
Checking Whether Clutch Control System is Normal ................................................................. - 64 -
Checking Free Travel of Clutch Handle ...................................................................................... - 64 -
Wheel/Tire ........................................................................................................................................... - 65 -
Checking Tire Pressure ................................................................................................................ - 65 -
Checking Whether Wheel/Tire is Broken .................................................................................... - 65 -
Checking Wear Situations of Thread ........................................................................................... - 66 -
Checking Whether Wheel Bearing is Damaged........................................................................... - 66 -
Final Drive Mechanism ....................................................................................................................... - 68 -
Checking Lubrication State of Drive Chain................................................................................. - 68 -
Checking Whether Drive Chain is Loose .................................................................................... - 68 -
Adjusting Slackness of Drive Chain ............................................................................................ - 69 -
Checking Wheel Alignment ......................................................................................................... - 70 -
Checking Wear of Drive Chain .................................................................................................... - 70 -
Checking Wear of Chain Guide ................................................................................................... - 71 -
Brake.................................................................................................................................................... - 72 -
Check Whether Brake Hose and Brake Pipe are Damaged and Their Installation States ............ - 72 -
Free Travel of Front Brake........................................................................................................... - 72 -
Free Travel of Rear Brake............................................................................................................ - 72 -
Checking Brake ........................................................................................................................... - 73 -
Checking Brake Fluid Level ........................................................................................................ - 73 -
- 44 -
Checking Wear of Brake Pad ....................................................................................................... - 76 -
Checking Brake Light Switch ...................................................................................................... - 76 -
Suspension System .............................................................................................................................. - 77 -
Checking Front Fork/Rear Shock Absorber ................................................................................. - 77 -
Check for Oil Leakage of Front Fork Shock Absorber ................................................................ - 77 -
Check for Oil Leakage of Rear Shock Absorber.......................................................................... - 78 -
Steering System ................................................................................................................................... - 79 -
Checking Steering Clearance ....................................................................................................... - 79 -
Adjusting Tightness of Steering Seat ........................................................................................... - 79 -
Applying Lubricant to Steering Column Bearing ........................................................................ - 81 -
Electrical System ................................................................................................................................. - 82 -
Checking Light and Switch.......................................................................................................... - 82 -
Checking Accuracy of Headlight ................................................................................................. - 87 -
Checking Emergency Flameout Switch ....................................................................................... - 88 -
Others................................................................................................................................................... - 89 -
Applying Lubricant to Frame Parts.............................................................................................. - 89 -
Check Tightness of Bolt, Nut and Fastener ................................................................................. - 92 -
Replacing Air Filter Element ....................................................................................................... - 94 -
Replacing Fuel Pipe ..................................................................................................................... - 96 -
Replacing oil ................................................................................................................................ - 98 -
Replacing Brake Hose and Brake Pipe ...................................................................................... - 100 -
Replacing brake fluid ................................................................................................................. - 103 -
Replacing Rubber Parts of Master Cylinder .............................................................................. - 107 -
Replacing Rubber Parts of Calipers ........................................................................................... - 109 -
Replacing Spark Plug................................................................................................................. - 117 -
- 45 -
Regular Maintenance Table
To keep good running state of motorcycle, regular maintenance must be conducted according to the following
table. The maintenance for the first time is very important, so it should not be neglected.
Regular Check Table
Whichever is the earlier Odometer reading
Frequency
× 1 000 km Page
Item
Interval 1 6 12 18 24 30 36
Fuel Injection System
Throttle control system (running, smooth return,
1 year ● ● ● ●
no resistance)—check
Idle speed—check ● ● ● ●
Fuel leakage (fuel hose and fuel pipe) —check 1 year ● ● ● ●
Fuel hose and fuel pipe damage —check 1 year ● ● ● ●
Fuel hose and fuel pipe installation state
1 year ● ● ● ●
—check
Function of evaporative emission control
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
system—check (model of CAL and SEA)
Engine cylinder head and cylinder head cover
Valve Model of US, CA, AU ●
clearance
Other models except US, CA, AU Every 42000 km
—check
Damage of air induction system—check ● ● ●
Clutch
Clutch operation mechanism (running,
● ● ● ●
detaching, closing)—check
Free travel of clutch handle 1 year ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Wheels and tires
Tire pressure—check 1 year ● ● ●
Wheel/tire damage—check ● ● ●
Tire tread wear, abnormal wear—check ● ● ●
Wheel bearing damage—check 1 year ● ● ●
Final drive mechanism
Lubrication state of drive chain—check# Every 600 km
Drive chain loosening—check# Every 1000 km
Drive chain wear—check# ● ● ●
Chain guide wear—check ● ● ●
Brake
Brake fluid leakage (brake hose)—check 1 year ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Damage of brake hose—check 1 year ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Installation state of brake hose—check 1 year ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Brake operation (effectiveness, running, no
1 year ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
resistance)—check
Brake fluid level—check 6 months ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Brake pad wear—check# ● ● ● ● ● ●
Operation of brake light switch—check ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
- 46 -
(Continued)
Whichever is the earlier Odometer reading
Frequency
× 1 000 km Page
Item
Interval 1 6 12 18 24 30 36
Suspension system
Front fork / rear shock absorber operation
● ● ●
(damping and travel is smooth)—check
Oil leakage of front fork / rear shock 1 year ● ● ●
absorber—check
Swing arm operation—check ● ● ●
Pull rod—check ● ● ●
Steering system
Steering clearance—check 1 year ● ● ● ●
Steering rod bearing—lubrication 2 year ●
Electrical system
Light and switch operation—check 1 year ● ● ●
Headlight accuracy—check 1 year ● ● ●
Operation of single-supporting switch—check 1 year ● ● ●
Operation of emergency flameout 1 year ● ● ●
switch—check
Others
Frame part—lubrication 1 year ● ● ●
Tightness of bolts and nuts—check ● ● ● ●
—Clean# Every 3000 km
Air filter element
—Replacement# Every 6000 km
Fuel hose—replacement 4 years ●
Oil—replacement# 1 year ● ● ● ● ●
Oil filter—replacement 1 year ● ● ● ● ●
Brake hose—replacement 4 years ●
Brake fluid—replacement 2 years ● ●
Spark plug—replacement ● ● ● ● ●
#: In case of using motorcycle in dusty, wet and muddy environment and other severe environment or often
operating it at high speed or frequently starting and stopping it, the maintenance frequency shall be increased.
*: If the odometer reading exceeds the number in this table, please repair it repeatedly according to frequency
interval specified in this Manual.
- 47 -
Torque and Locking Agent
Main Locking Torque Specifications
The following table shows the locking torque of the main fasteners that are to be used with locking agent or
silicone sealants.
The letters in “Remark” column have the following meanings:
AL: Tighten the mounting bolts alternately twice in accordance with the higher locking torque.
G: Apply grease.
L: Apply thread fastening adhesive.
M: Apply grease containing molybdenum disulfide.
MO: Apply oil solvent containing molybdenum disulfide. (Mixture of oil and grease containing molybdenum
disulfide prepared in a weight ratio of 10: 1)
R: Replacement parts.
S: Observe the specified tightening sequence.
Si: Apply silicone grease.
SS: Apply silicone sealant.
Torque
Fastener Remark
N·m kgf·m
Fuel Injection System (EFI)
Air filter element cover bolts 6 0.70
Air filter cartridge support screw 6 0.70
Camshaft position sensor bolt 10 1.0
Crankshaft sensor bolt 5.9 0.60
Pipe clamp bolt 2.0 0.20
Fuel tank mounting bolt 10 1.0
Fuel pump bolt 4 0.4 S
Intake pressure sensor bracket screw 10 1.0
Oxygen sensor 25 2.5
ECU bolt 3.9 0.40 L
Speed sensor bolt 3.9 0.40 L
Engine cylinder head and cylinder head cover
Cylinder head cover bolt 10 1.0 L
Camshaft sprocket mounting bolt 15 1.5 L
Camshaft cover bolt 10 1.0 S
Camshaft timing chain guide chain bolt 12 1.2 S
Camshaft timing chain tensioner mounting bolt 10 1.0
Cylinder head bolt (M11) 50 5.0 L（3）
Exhaust pipe mounting bolt 22 2.2
Spark plug 25 2.5
Clutch
Clutch cover bolt
Clutch hub nut 10 1.0 L（1）
Clutch spring bolt 120 12.0 R
Clutch 10 1.0
Clutch cover bolt
Engine lubrication system
Oil drain bolt M12
Plug of fuel filler 30 3.0
Fuel pump bolt - - Tighten it with hands
Fuel pump cover bolt 10 1.0
Engine lubrication system 10 1.0
Oil drain bolt M12
- 48 -
(Continued)
Torque
Fastener Remark
N·m kgf·m
Crankshaft / drive mechanism
Balancer shaft fastening nut M14 40 4.0
Mould closing bolt M6 12 1.2 S
Crankcase bolt 12 1.2 S
Flywheel locking nut M25 100 10.0
Driving gear nutM20 80 8.0
Shifting and positioning plate bolt M6 12 1.2
Disassembly / installation of engine
Front bracket bolt of engine (M10)
Upper bracket bolt of engine (M8) 45 4.5 S
Upper mounting bolt of engine (M10) 25 2.5 S
Front mounting bolt of engine (M10) 50 5.0 AL、S
Rear mounting bolt of engine (M10) 50 5.0 AL、S
Wheels / Tires
Front axle mounting bolt 20 2.0 AL
Front axle 80 8.0 Si
Front axle bolt 80 8.0
Rear axle 90 9.0 Si
Rear axle bolt 90 9.0
Chain upper limit block bolt
Chain protection block bolt 10 1.0 L
Engine sprocket cover bolt 10 1.0 L
Engine sprocket Nut 10 1.0
Rear sprocket nut 125 12.5 MO
Brake
Release valve
Brake hose hollow bolt 7.8 0.80
Brake handle pivot axle bolt 25 2.5
Brake handle pivot axle bolt locking nut 2 0.2 Si
Brake pedal bolt 6 0.6
Front brake disc mounting bolt 22 2.2
Front brake light switch screw 27 2.7 L
Front brake upper pump oil reservoir cover fixing 1.2 0.12
screw
Front caliper mounting bolt 1.2 0.12
Front caliper mounting bolt 27 2.8 L
Front upper pump bleed valve 34 3.5
Front upper pump mounting bolt 7.8 0.80
Rear brake disc mounting bolt 11 1.1 S
Rear caliper mounting bolt 27 2.8 L
Rear caliper mounting bolt 25 2.5
Rear upper pump mounting bolt 10 1.0
Rear upper pump pull rod locking nut 10 1.0
- 49 -
(Continued)
Torque
Fastener Remark
N·m kgf·m
Suspension system
Front axle mounting bolt 22 2.0
Front shock absorber mounting bolt (upper) 22 3.1 AL
Front shock absorber mounting bolt (lower) 22 2.2
Front shock absorber top plug 28 2.8
Front damper piston rod nut 45 4.5
Rear shock absorber bolt (upper) 45 4.5
Rear shock absorber bolt (lower) 45 4.5
Rear shock absorber nut (lower) 90 9.0
Rear swing arm shaft nut 90 9.0
Steering system
Steering rod compression nut 35 3.5 AL
Steering rod locking nut 24 2.4 AL
Upper connection plate fastening screw 50 5.0
Handle positioning double-end stud fixing nut 45 4.5 AL
Handle bolt 25 2.5 L
Left switch compression screw 3.5 0.35
Right switch compression screw 3.5 0.35
Left handle rear compression bolt 10 1.0
Left handle pivot axle bolt 6 0.6
Left handle pivot axle bolt locking nut 6 0.6
Balance block bolt 10 1.0
Frame
Front seat cushion bolt 10 1.0
Rear seat cushion bolt 10 1.0
Rear armrest bolt 22 2.2
Rear baffle bracket mounting seat mounting bolt 10 1.0
Rear baffle bracket mounting bolt 10 1.0
Front left pedal bracket bolt 45 4.5
Shift lever mounting seat bolt 10 1.0
Shift assembly bolt 10 1.0
Front right pedal bracket bolt 45 4.5
Rear left pedal bracket bolt 25 2.5
Rear right pedal bracket bolt 25 2.5
Muffler cylinder mounting bolt 22 2.2
Muffler cylinder rear bolt 22 2.2
Muffler cylinder rear mounting bolt 22 2.2
Single-supporting bolt 50 5.0
Single-supporting bolt locking nut 45 4.5
Single-supporting flameout switch bolt 6 0.6
Battery bracket bolt 10 1.0
- 50 -
(Continued)
Torque
Fastener Remark
N·m kgf·m
Electrical system
Alternator cover bolt 10 1.0
Alternator wire fixing plate bolt 10 1.0 L
Alternator Rotor Bolt 100 10.0 S
Camshaft position sensor bolt 9.8 1.0
Camshaft sensor bolt 5.9 0.60 L
Camshaft sensor cover bolt 9.8 1.0 L（1）
Engine grounding terminal bolt 10 1.0
Front brake light switch screw 1.2 0.12
Front steering light fixing nut 6 0.6
Fuel level sensor bolt 10 1.0 L
Lower bracket bolt of headlight 10 10
Lower mounting bolt of headlight 10 1.0
Left switch compression screw 3.5 0.35
License plate lampshade fixing screw 0.90 0.09
Oil pressure switch 15 1.5 SS
Oxygen sensor 25 2.5
Rear turning light fixing nut 6 0.6
Rectifier bolt 10 1.0
Right switch compression screw 3.5 0.36
Single-supporting flameout switch bolt 6 0.6 L
Speed sensor bolt 3.9 0.40 L
Starting relay bolt 10 0.6 L
Starter motor wire joint nut 6 0.6
Bond strap bolt 10 0.6
Starter motor mounting bolt 10 1.0
Starter motor terminal locking nut 6 0.6
- 51 -
Nut, Bolt, Screw Fastening Torque and Relative Parameters
The following table shows the basic torques of bolt and nut (different thread diameters correspond to
different tightening torques). This table is only applicable to the bolt and nut without the need for specific torque
value. All the values in the following table are applicable to the thread cleaned using anhydrous solvent.
Nut Fastening Torque and Relevant Parameters
Basic fastening torque and
Nut torque
N·m kgf·m
4 2.3 0.2
5 4.5 0.4
6 10 1.0
8 25 2.5
10 45 4.5
12 80 8.0
14 130 13.0
16 200 20.0
18 240 24.0
20 325 32.5
Bolt and Screw Fastening Torque and Relevant Parameters
Basic fastening torque
Bolt/screw Level 8.8 Level 10.9 Level 12.9
N•m Kg.f·m N•m Kg.f·m N•m Kg.f·m
M4×0.7 3 0.3 4.2 0.4 5.2 0.5
M5×0.8 6 0.6 7.5 0.8 9 0.9
M6×1 10 1.0 13 1.3 16 1.6
M8×1.25 22 2.2 30 3.0 40 4.0
M8×1（*） 25 2.5 36 3.6 45 4.5
M10×1.5 45 4.5 65 6.5 80 8.0
M10×1.25（*） 50 5.0 70 7.0 85 8.5
M12×1.75 80 8.0 110 11.0 135 13.5
M12×1.5（*） 85 8.5 120 12.0 145 14.5
M12×1.25（*） 90 9.0 130 13.0 150 15.0
M14×2 130 13.0 185 18.5 220 22.0
M14×1.5（*） 150 15.0 205 20.5 245 24.5
M16×2 200 20.0 280 28.0 335 33.5
M16×1.5（*） 225 22.5 310 31.0 360 36.0
M18×2.5 265 26.5 370 37.0 450 45.0
M18×1.5（*） 320 32.0 450 45.0 550 55.0
M20×2.5 390 39.0 550 55.0 650 65.0
M20×1.5（*） 440 44.0 630 63.0 750 75.0
M22×2.5 540 54.0 750 75.0 900 90.0
M22×1.5（*） 600 60.0 850 85.0 1000 100.0
M24×3 670 67.0 950 95.0 1130 113.0
M24×2（*） 750 75.0 1050 105.0 1250 125.0
*: it is fine thread
- 52 -
Technical Parameters
Item Standard Use limit
Fuel injection system (EFI)
Free clearance of throttle grip 3∼5mm –––
Idle speed 1500 ±100 r/min –––
Negative pressure value of 34.4 ±1.3 kPa (under idle speed) –––
throttle body
Air filter element Paper filter –––
Engine cylinder head and
cylinder head cover
Valve clearance:
Exhaust value 0.15 ∼ 0.17 mm –––
Inlet valve 0.13 ∼ 0.15 mm –––
Clutch
Free clearance of clutch control 10∼20mm –––
rod
Lubrication system of engine
Oil:
Type API SE, SF or SG –––
API SH, SJ or SL, JASO MA
Viscosity SAE 10W-40 –––
Capacity 1.0±0.05L (when replacement); –––
1.2±0.05L (complete disassembly of engine) –––
Fluid level Between the upper fluid level line and lower –––
level line (idle speed or standing for 2-3
minutes after running)
Wheels / tires
Tire tread depth
Front tire 3.8 mm 1.6mm
Rear tire 4.8 mm 2.0mm
Tire pressure (after tire cooling):
Front tire 190±10 kPa –––
Rear tire 210±10 kPa –––
Drive chain slacking 10∼15 mm –––
Drive chain wearing (length of 20 317.5 ∼ 318.2 mm 323 mm
chain rings)
Standard drive chain:
Model 428HG –––
Chain ring 116 –––
- 53 -
(Continued)
Item Standard Use Limit
Brake
Brake fluid:
Level DOT4 –––
Thickness of brake lining
Front brake lining 5.0 mm 3 mm
Rear brake lining 6.8 mm 3 mm
Brake light time setting:
Front brake light It will be on after pulling the rope –––
Rear brake light It will be on after pressing about –––
10mm pedal travel
Electrical system
Spark plug
Model A7RC/BOSCH –––
Clearance 0.6 - 0.7 mm –––
- 54 -
Special Tools
The following Special Tools are needed for complete and correct adjustment and assembly; use the correct
Special Tools to avoid the damages caused by improper tools or non-professional technology. In different
countries, the specific tools which need to be used may vary. During ordering tools, please refer to the following
information to prevent any errors.
Internal circlip plier Negative pressure meter
Steering lever nut wrench: four-jaw 300-QCLM4-001 Steering lever nut wrench: seven-jaw 300-QCLM7-001
Jack: Jack accessories:
Oil filter wrench Pilot screw adjuster adapter φ5：
Pilot screw adjuster adapter C： Throttle sensor adjuster adapter
- 55 -
Regular Maintenance Procedures
Electronic Fuel Injection System (EFI)
Checking Throttle Control System
●Check the free clearance of throttle grip [A].
Free Clearance of Throttle Grip
Standard: 3-5mm
★If the free clearance is not accurate, please adjust the
throttle cable.
● Check whether the throttle grip can move smoothly
from fully open to closed and whether the return spring
can enable the throttle to be turned off completely at
any steering position.
★If the throttle grip cannot be reset normally, check
whether the winding method of throttle cable, free
clearance of handle or cable is damaged. Then add the
lubricant to the throttle cable.
● Make the engine idle and turn the direction to the
right and left to ensure no change in idle speed.
★ If the idle speed is increased, check the free
clearance and winding method of throttle cable.
★If necessary, adjust the upper end of throttle cable [E]

in accordance with the following steps:
(1) Remove the dirt-proof boot of throttle cable [B].
(2) Loosen the lock nut [D].
(3) Rotate the adjusting nut [C] until the free
clearance of throttle grip ① is 3-5mm.
(4) Tighten the lock nut [D].
(5) After the free travel is adjusted, turn the direction
to the right and left to confirm that there is no change
in idle speed of engine.
- 56 -
★If the free clearance of throttle grip cannot be met
by adjusting the upper end of throttle cable, adjust
the lower end of throttle cable [B] and adjust the
throttle cable according to the following steps:
(1) Unscrew the lock nut [D].
(2) Rotate the adjusting nut [C] so that the free
clearance of throttle grip [A] is large enough until the
free clearance of throttle grip is 3-5mm.
(3) Tighten the lock nut [D].
(5) After the free travel is adjusted, turn the direction
to the right and left to confirm that there is no change
in idle speed of engine.
★If the free clearance cannot be adjusted by the
adjuster, change the wire.
Checking Idle Speed

●Start the engine and make it hot thoroughly.
● When the engine is idle, rotate the handlebar to both
sides [A].
★If the idle speed can be changed when rotating the
handlebar, it indicates that the throttle cable is not
adjusted well or the winding method is incorrect or
damaged. Before riding, make sure to correct the
above problems (see the sections of “Accessory”
chapter: “Checking Throttle Control System” and
“Winding Method of Cable, Wire and Hose”).
Warning
If you ride when the cables are not adjusted
well or damaged or the winding method is
incorrect, safety accident may be caused.
●Checking Idle Speed
Idle Speed
Standard:1500 ±100 r/min
- 57 -
Checking Fuel Hose (Fuel Leakage, Hose Break and Hose Installation Situations)
○If the motorcycle is not handled properly, the high
pressure inside the fuel pipe may lead to fuel leakage
[A] or fuel pipe break. Remove the fuel tank (see “Fuel
Tank Disassembly” in the “Fuel Injection System
(EFI)” chapter) and check the fuel pipe.
★If any wear, crack [B] or expansion [C] is found, the
fuel pipe must be replaced.
●Check whether the winding method of hose meets the

relevant specifications of the “Winding Method of
Cable, Wire and Hose” section of the “Accessory”
chapter.
★If the hose is bent or broken seriously, it needs to
be replaced.
Hose joint [A]
Fuel pipe [B]
●Check whether the connection of hose joint is firm.

○Push and pull the hose joint [A] for more than twice
to ensure that the hose joint is fixed firmly.
★If the connection is not firm, install the hose joint
again.
Warning
Slide the joint to ensure that the hose joint is
properly installed on the fuel supply pipe,
otherwise the fuel leakage may occur.
- 58 -
Checking Fuel Evaporation and Recovery System (Chinese, European and US Models)
●Remove the canister according to the following steps.
○Remove the seat cushion (see “Seat Cushion
Disassembly” in “Frame” chapter).
○Remove the left and right covers (see “Cover
○Remove the fuel tank cover (see “Cover
Disassembly” in “Frame” chapter)
○Remove the fuel tank (see “Fuel Tank Disassembly”
in “Fuel tank” chapter)
○Remove the air filter (see “Air Filter Disassembly”
in “Frame” chapter).
○Remove the bolt [A] used for fixing canister.
○Remove the canister [A] and take the hose used to

connect canister down.
○Check whether there are cracks or other damages on
the canister.
★If any, it shall be replaced with a new one.
Remark
○If the canister is used under normal situations, it
can be used normally within the service lift of the
motorcycle without maintenance.
●Remove the canister solenoid valve according to the

following steps.
○Remove the seat cushion (see “Seat Cushion
○Remove the left and right cover (see “Cover
○Remove the fuel tank cover (see “Cover
Disassembly” in “Frame” chapter)
○Remove the fuel tank (see “Fuel Tank Disassembly”
in “Fuel tank” chapter)
○Remove the air filter (see “Air Filter Disassembly”
in “Frame” chapter).
- 59 -
○Remove the bolt [A] and take the solenoid valve
bracket of canister.
○Remove the hose used to connect separator and

remove the canister solenoid valve [A] from the
motorcycle.
○Check whether there are cracks or other damages on
the canister solenoid valve.
★If any, it must be replaced.
★Check the canister solenoid valve (see “Canister
Solenoid Valve” in “Electronic Fuel Injection System
(EFI)”)
● Check the hose of fuel evaporation and recovery

system according to the following steps.
○Check whether the hose is connected firmly and
whether the clamps are in place.
○Replace the broken, corrosive or damaged hoses.
○Install the negative pressure hose according to the
“Winding Method of Cable, Wire and Hose” section in
the “Accessory” chapter. See Chapter “Electronic Fuel
Injection System (EFI)” for the drawing of fuel
evaporation and recovery system.
○When the hose is installed, avoid bending, tangling or
twisting the hose excessively and do not bend the hose
as much as possible so as to prevent the blocking
caused by evaporative emission.
- 60 -
Engine Cylinder Head and Cylinder Head Cover
Checking Valve Clearance
Remark
○Valve clearance can be checked and adjusted only
when the engine is cooled (to the indoor
temperature).
●Disassemble:
Remove the seat cushion (see “Disassembling Seat
Cushion” in “Frame” chapter),
Remove the fuel tank (see “Disassembling Fuel Tank”
in “Fuel Tank” chapter),
●Disassemble the fixing screw [A], remove the
cylinder cover [B] and cylinder head cover [C]
●Disassemble:
Left cover accessing screw [A]
Left rear cover [B]
- 61 -
●Rotate the output sprocket to rotate the flywheel Timing mark on the
assembly and align the timing mark on the flywheel observation hole
assembly with the timing mark on the left cover

observation hole.
Output sprocket t
Timing mark on
the flywheel
assembly
●After ensuring that the timing mark is aligned, put the

chain on the sprocket of camshaft, align the timing
mark on the sprocket of camshaft with that on the
cylinder cover and put them into the camshaft, and then
complete aligning the timing marks.
- 62 -
●Use the thickness gauge to measure the valve
clearance between rocker and valve lifter at the TDC
position
Note
Please keep the thickness gauge level to prevent
that the misjudgement gets stuck.
●Valve clearance
Standard:
Inlet valve: 0.08-0.1 mm
Exhaust valve: 0.08-0.1 mm
★If the valve clearance is not within the specified

scope, record the valve clearance and then carry out the
adjustment.
Adjusting Valve Clearance
● [A] Loosen the lock nut [A]
● [B] Insert thickness gauge [B]
●Rotate the adjustor [C] using adjusting tool [D], and
adjust it to the standard value.
Screw in→Valve clearance is reduced
Screw out →Valve clearance is increased
★To prevent the adjuster [C] from rotating together, fix

the lock nut [A] with the adjustment tool [D].
Torque value:
Lock nut 7 N•m
●Check the valve clearance again and carry out

adjustment again if necessary.
●Install it in reverse order of disassembly (see the
corresponding chapters).
- 63 -
Clutch
Checking Whether Clutch Control System is Normal
●Start the engine to ensure that the clutch cannot slip
and can be separated normally.
★If the clutch is abnormal, check the clutch system.
Warning
If the motorcycle needs to be run in the
checking process, ensure to run it at the place
where the traffic conditions are normal.
Checking Free Travel of Clutch Handle
Standard: 10-20mm.
★If the free travel is inaccurate, please adjust the clutch
wire.
●Check whether the clutch handle can move smoothly
from fully loosened to clenched and whether the return
spring can make the clutch close quickly and completely
at any steering position.
★If the clutch handle cannot be reset normally, check
whether the winding method of clutch wire, free
clearance of handle and cable are damaged. Then add
lubricant to the clutch wire.
●Turn the handle to the right and left to ensure that there
is no change in clutch operation and the gear can be put
smoothly.
★If the gear cannot be put smoothly, check the free
clearance and winding method of clutch wire.
★If necessary, adjust the throttle cable [A] according to

the following steps:
(1) Unscrew the fastening nut [C].
(2) Tighten or unscrew the adjustment device [B]
until the free travel of clutch handle meets the
specified value 10-20mm.
(3) Tighten the fastening nut [C] in the end.
★ If the requirements of free travel cannot be met after

the handle end of clutch cable is adjusted to the limiting
position, carry out adjustment through clutch cable [A]
and lock nut [B] and adjusting nut [C] at the engine end.
(1) Unscrew the fastening nut [B].
(2) Tighten or unscrew the adjustment nut [C] until
the free travel of clutch handle meets the specified
value 10-15mm.
(3) Finally tighten the fastening nut [B].
- 64 -
Wheel/Tire
Checking Tire Pressure
●Remove the valve cap.
●Measure the tire pressure with an air pressure gauge
[A] when the tire is cooled (i.e., the travelled mileage
of motorcycle within 3 hours before the measurement
does not exceed 2 km).
●Reinstall the valve cap back.
★If necessary, adjust the tire pressure according to the
relevant specifications.
Pressure (when the tire is cooled)
Front wheel: 190±10 kPa
Rear wheel: 210±10 kPa
Checking Whether Wheel/Tire is Broken

●Clear the stones [A] or other foreign matters
embedded on the thread.
●Visually check whether there are crack [B], notch [C]
and nail [D] on the tire and replace the tire if necessary.
If the tire expands or protrudes, the inside is damaged
and the tire needs to be replaced.
●Visually check whether there are crack, notch and
dent on the wheel.
★If any damage is found, replace the wheel according
to the situations.
- 65 -
Checking Wear Situations of Thread
As the tread wear is more and more serious, it is
more likely to cause tire blowout. It is estimated that
90% of tires will be damaged in the last 10% of service
life of tire (90% wear). If the tire is used until it is
grinded smoothly, the money cannot be saved and
safety issues may be caused.
●Measure the tread depth in the middle of the tread
with a depth meter [A]. As the tire is worn unevenly,
the measurement shall be carried out in different parts.
★If any value measured are below the use limit, the
tire must be replaced (see “Disassembling/ Installing
Tire” in the “Wheel/Tire” chapter).
Thread depth
Standard:
Front wheel: 3.8 mm
Rear wheel: 4.8 mm
Use limit:
Front wheel: 1.6 mm
Rear wheel: 2.0 mm
Warning
In order to ensure the safety and stability of
tire, it is necessary to replace the current tire
with the recommended standard tire and inflate
the tire according to the standard air pressure.
Remark
○The minimum thread depth is specified in most of
the countries: please make sure to comply with
that!
○Check the wheel and balance it after the tire is
replaced.
Checking Whether Wheel Bearing is Damaged
●Use the jack to lift the front wheel up from the floor
(see “Disassembling/ Installing Front Wheel” in the
“Wheel/Tire” chapter).
●Rotate the handle to the rightmost or leftmost side.
●Shake the wheel frame to both sides [A] with both
hands to check whether there is axial clearance in the
front wheel bearing.
●Rotate the front wheel [B] gently to see whether the
wheel can be rotated smoothly, whether it is difficult to
rotate or whether there is unusual resistance or noise.
★If it is found that the wheel is difficult to rotate and
there is resistance or noise, remove the front wheel and
- 66 -
check the wheel bearing (see “Disassembling Front
Wheel and Checking Hub Bearing” in the “Wheel/Tire”
chapter).
●Use the jack to lift the rear wheel up from the floor
(see “Disassembling Rear Wheel” in the “Wheel/Tire”
chapter)
●Shake the wheel frame to both sides [A] with both
hands to check whether there is axial clearance in the
rear wheel bearing.
●Rotate the rear wheel [B] gently to see whether the
wheel can be rotated smoothly, whether it is difficult to
rotate or whether there is unusual resistance or noise.
★If it is found that the wheel is difficult to rotate and
there is resistance or noise, remove the rear wheel and
check the wheel bearing (see “Disassembling Rear
Wheel and Checking Hub Bearing” in the “Wheel/Tire”
chapter) and axle sleeve (see “Checking Axle Sleeve
and Bearing” in “Final Drive Mechanism” chapter)..
- 67 -
Final Drive Mechanism
Checking Lubrication State of Drive Chain
●If there is no special lubricant, the priority can be
given to the heavy oil (e.g.: SAE 90), not light oil,
because the heavy oil can be attached to the drive chain
for longer time with better lubrication effect.
●If the drive chain looks dirty, it must be cleaned
before adding the lubricant.
●Apply the lubricant to both sides of chain roller to
make it penetrate into the chain roller and sleeve.
●Wipe off the redundant lubricant.
Part where lubricant is applied: [A]
Checking Whether Drive Chain is Loose

Remark
○Support the motorcycle with a side stand to check
whether the drive chain is loose.
○Support the motorcycle with a bracket to check
whether the drive chain is loose.
○If there are stains on the drive chain, clean the
drive chain and then add lubricant after it is dry.
●Checking the wheel alignment (see “Checking Wheel
Alignment”).
●Rotate the real wheel to find the position where the
drive chain is tightest.
●Measure the swing from up to down (slackness of
drive chain) [A] of chains between front and rear
sprockets.
★If the slackness of drive chain exceeds the standard,
please adjust it!
Slackness of Drive Chain
Standard: 15 ∼20 mm
- 68 -
Adjusting Slackness of Drive Chain
●Lift the rear wheel up from the ground with a bracket
(see “Disassembling Rear Wheel” in the “Wheel/Tire”
chapter).
●Unscrew the rear wheel axle nut [A].
●Screw the lock nuts [A] of two chain adjusters on the

left and right out.
●Evenly rotate the adjusting nuts [B] of two chain
adjusters on the left and right until the slackness of
drive chain is appropriate. To align the drive chain with
the wheel, the notch on the right wheel alignment
indicator shall correspond to the swing arm sign or
position which is aligned with the left wheel alignment
indicator notch.
★If the drive chain is too loose, adjust the chain
adjusters on the right and left counterclockwise from
the rear view of motorcycle and make them balanced
on the left and right sides.
★ If the drive chain is too tight, adjust the chain
adjusters on the right and left clockwise from the rear
view of motorcycle, make them balanced on the left
and right sides, and then kick the wheel forward.
Screw in Slackness is increased
Screw out Slackness is reduced
Warning
If the wheels are not aligned, the wheels will be
worn out abnormally and dangers may be caused
during riding.
●Make sure to tighten the lock nuts [A] of two chain
adjusters on the left and right.
●Tighten the wheel axle nut.
Tightening torque of rear wheel axle nut: 120N·m
●Rotate the wheel, measure the slackness of drive
chain at the tightest position of drive chain and adjust it
again if necessary.
Warning
If the rear wheel axle nut is not tightened,
dangers may be caused during riding.
- 69 -
Checking Wheel Alignment
●Check whether the position of the concave scale line
[B] on the right chain adjuster [A] on the rear swing
arm [C] is the same as that of concave scale line on the
left chain adjuster.
★If they are not aligned, adjust the slackness of drive
chain and align the wheel alignment (see “Adjusting
Slackness of Drive Chain”).
Remark
○Check whether the wheel alignment is accurate
with the ruler or rope.
Warning
If the wheels are not aligned, the wheels will
be worn out abnormally and dangers may be
caused during riding.
Checking Wear of Drive Chain

●Remove the chain guard (see “Disassembling Drive
Chain” in “Final Drive Mechanism” chapter).
●Rotate the rear wheel and check whether there are
damaged rollers, loose cotter pins and chain meshes.
★If any abnormal situation is found, replace the drive
chain.
★If the drive chain looks dry, add the lubricant.
●Hang a 6kg weight on the drive chain to tighten the
drive chain.
●Measure the length of the 20 links [B] (from the
center of the first cotter pin to the center of the 21st
cotter pin) of the drive chain of the straight part [C]. As
the drive chain is worn unevenly, the measurement
shall be carried out in several different parts.
★If any measured value exceeds the use limit, the
drive chain needs to be replaced. Replace the front and
rear sprockets simultaneously.
Length of 20 chain meshes of drive chain
Standard: 254 -254.7 mm
Use limit: 259.5 mm
Warning
If the wear of drive chain exceeds the use limit,
the drive chain must be replaced, otherwise
dangers may be caused during riding. If the drive
chain is broken or falls off from the sprocket, the
sprocket of engine will be tripped or the rear
wheel will be locked, which will cause serious
damage to the motorcycle and make it be out of
control.
To ensure safety, the standard drive chain
must be used. The standard drive chain is a chain
without meshes which cannot be cut off during
installation.
Standard Drive Chain
Model: 428HG
Number of chain meshes: 116
- 70 -
Checking Wear of Chain Guide
●Remove the swing arm (see “Disassembling Rear
Swing Arm” in “Suspension System”).
●Visually checking the chain guide [A].
★If there is abnormal wear or damage in the chain
guide, it must be replaced.
- 71 -
Brake
Check Whether Brake Hose and Brake Pipe are Damaged and Their Installation States
●Check whether the brake hose, brake pipe and
accessories are corroded and whether there are cracks
or leaks.
○If the brake hose and brake pipe are not properly
maintained, the high pressure inside the brake pipe will
cause the leakage of brake fluid [A] or rupture of brake
hose and brake forming pipe. When checking the
rubber hose, the pipe needs to be bent and twisted.
★If it is found that there is any crack [B], expansion
[C] or leakage on the brake hose or brake forming pipe,
it must be replaced.
●Tighten all the hollow bolts of brake hose.
Tightening torque of hollow bolt of brake hose: 30
N·m
Tightening torque of connecting nut of brake hose:
18 N·m
●Check the winding method of brake hose.
★If the winding methods of brake hose and brake pipe
are incorrect, arrange the brake hose and brake pipe
according to the section in the “Accessory” chapter:
“Winding Method of Cable, Wire and Hose”.
Free Travel of Front Brake

●Measure the free travel at the top end of front brake
handle
Free travel of front brake handle.
Free travel: 10-20mm
Free Travel of Rear Brake

●Measure the free travel of brake pedal.
Free travel: 20-30mm.
- 72 -
★If the measured result does not meet the specified
valve, adjustment shall be carried out.
○Adjust the free travel of brake pedal.
1. Loosen the nut [B] on joint [A].
2. Screw in or screw out the mandril [C] to adjust the
free travel of brake pedal.
If the mandril [C] is screwed in, the free
travel will be reduced;
If the mandril [C] is screw out, the free travel
will be increased
3. When the free travel meets the specified value,
tighten and fasten the nut [B].
4. After adjustment, the brake dragging phenomenon
shall be avoided.
Checking Brake
●Ride the motorcycle on the dry road and check
whether the front and rear brakes are normal.
★If the brake is abnormal, check the brake system.
Warning
If you need to test the motorcycle in the
checking process, make sure to ride it in the
place with safe traffic conditions.
Checking Brake Fluid Level

●Check front brake fluid, and ensure whether the level
of brake fluid in the pump [B] is above the lower limit
oil lens [A].
Remark
○When checking the brake fluid level, rotate the
handle to keep the reservoir level.
- 73 -
★If the level is lower than the lower limit, add the
brake fluid in the reservoir until the level reaches the
high fluid level line [A].
Remark
○Brake fluid may damage the painted surfaces or
plastic parts. Therefore, wrap the absorbent paper
around the pump and clear the spilled brake fluid
immediately.
●Check the brake fluid cylinder diaphragm on the

cover.
★If there is any damage/wear, please replace the brake
fluid cylinder diaphragm
●Check whether the level of the brake fluid in the rear

brake fluid reservoir [A] is between the upper limit [C]
and the lower limit [B].
★If the level is below the lower limit, add the brake
fluid to the reservoir until the level reaches the high
fluid level line [B].
●Check the brake fluid diaphragm on the reservoir.

fluid diaphragm.
- 74 -
●Install the cover of rear brake fluid reservoir correctly
according to the following procedures.
○Tighten the cover [B] of rear brake fluid reservoir
with hands clockwise [C] first until a slight resistance is
felt, which indicates that the cover has been fixed to the
reservoir, then hold the reservoir [A] and rotate another
1/6 turn [D].
●Check whether the level of the brake fluid in the rear

brake fluid reservoir [A] is between the upper limit [C]
and the lower limit [B].
★If the level is below the lower limit, add the brake
fluid to the reservoir until the level reaches the high
fluid level line [B].
●Check the brake fluid diaphragm on the reservoir. If
there is any damage/wear, please replace the brake fluid
diaphragm.
●Check the brake fluid diaphragm on the reservoir.

fluid diaphragm.
●Install the cover of rear brake fluid reservoir correctly

according to the following procedures.
○Tighten the cover [B] of rear brake fluid reservoir
with hands clockwise [C] first until a slight resistance is
felt, which indicates that the cover has been fixed to the
reservoir, then hold the reservoir [A] and rotate another
1/6 turn [D].
- 75 -
Warning
If the brake fluid needs to be added, but the type
and brand of brake fluid in the brake fluid
reservoir cannot be confirmed, all the brake
fluid in the brake fluid pipe must be replaced.
After replacing the brake fluid, only use the
brake fluid of the same type and brand.
When adding the brake fluid, be careful not to
allow water to enter the reservoir. Water will
significantly reduce the boiling point of the
brake fluid and the steam bubbles will produce
when heated, which will make the performance
of braking system reduce.
Recommended Disc Brake Fluid
Grade:DOT4
Checking Wear of Brake Pad
●Remove the brake pad (see “Disassembling Front
Wheel/Rear Wheel Brake Pad” in “Brake” Chapter).
●Check the friction plate thickness [A] of the brake pad
inside the calipers.
★If the friction plate thickness of any brake pad is
lower than the use limit [B], replace the two brake pads
inside the calipers simultaneously.
Thickness of Brake Pad
Standard:
Front wheel brake pad: 4.0 mm
Rear wheel brake pad: 6.8 mm
Use limit: 1 mm
Checking Brake Light Switch

●Open the electric door lock.
●After the brake handle is rotated for 20mm or the
brake pedal is pressed for about 25mm, the brake light
shall be on.
★If the brake light is not on, check or replace the

following parts:
Battery (see “Checking Charging Situation” in
“Electrical System”);
Brake light (see “Disassembling Taillight/Brake Light”
in “Electrical System” chapter);
30A main fuse and 10A Taillight fuse (see “Checking
Fuse” in “Electrical System” chapter);
Front brake light switch [A] (see “Checking Switch” in
“Electrical System” chapter);
Rear brake light switch (see “Checking Switch” in
Wire harness (see “Checking Circuit” in “Electrical
System” chapter)
- 76 -
Suspension System
Checking Front Fork/Rear Shock Absorber
●Shake the front fork up and down for four or five
times to check whether the travel of shock absorber is
smooth.
★If the front fork cannot be moved smoothly or there
is noise, check the oil level or fork clamp of front fork
shock absorber oil (see “Replacing Front Fork Shock
Absorber Oil” in “Suspension System” chapter).
●Shake the seat cushion up and down for four or five

times to check whether the travel of shock absorber is
smooth.
★If the travel of shock absorber is not smooth or there
is noise, check for the shock absorber oil leakage (see
“Checking for Rear Shock Absorber Oil Leakage”).
Check for Oil Leakage of Front Fork Shock Absorber

●Visually check for the front fork shock absorber [A]
oil leakage.
★ If necessary, replace or maintain any part with
defects.
- 77 -
Check for Oil Leakage of Rear Shock Absorber
●Visually check for rear shock absorber [A] oil
leakage.
★If oil leakage is found, replace the shock absorber.
- 78 -
Steering System
Checking Steering Clearance
●。Lift the front wheel up from the ground with a jack.
Special Tools—Jack:
●When the front wheel faces ahead straightly and the
front wheel is lifted from the ground, the whole handle
shall be able to slide freely to the left and right steering
upper limits by the gravity action after the left or right
handle is pushed slightly.
★If the whole handle cannot slide freely to the left and
right steering upper limits, it indicates that the steering
system is too tight.
●Push and pull the front fork to feel whether there is an
excessive clearance in the steering system.
★If you feel that the clearance is too loose, it indicates
that the steering system is too loose.
Remark
○The connection of cable and wire must be
considered, because they may also affect the
movement of front fork.
○Make sure that the winding method of lead and
cable is correct.
○The state of bearing must be good and the
lubricant shall have been added to the bearing,
otherwise the detection result is invalid.
Adjusting Tightness of Steering Seat

●Disassemble:
Handlebar (see “Disassembling Handlebar” in
“Steering Gear” chapter);
Disassemble the steering column head bolt [A] with a
socket head wrench;
- 79 -
Loosen the mounting bolt [A] of upper bracket [B]
(Loosen)
Remove the upper bracket [B]
●Remove the steering column lock nut [E].

Special Tools—steering column nut wrench: four
jaws
●Adjust the steering column gland nut [F].
★Tighten the steering column gland nut [F] to the
torque of 30-35N·m
Special Tools—steering column nut wrench: seven
jaws
★Rotate the steering column left and right for twice to
three times; it cannot be stuck and the bearing race
cannot be loose during rotating;
★Unscrew the gland nut [E] for 1/4 circle, then tighten
it and use the relevant wrench to fasten the gland nut
[F];
★Tighten the steering column gland nut [F] to the
torque of 20-24N·m
●Install the steering column lock nut [E].
Special Tools—steering column nut wrench: four
jaws
★Fasten the lock nut [E] to the torque below: 60N·m
Warning:
Do not fasten the lock nut [E] excessively
●Check the tightness of steering seat:
★Make sure that the support is not loose and rotate the
front fork left and right to the end of travel to ensure
that there is no block point. If there is any block point,
remove the lower bracket components and check the
upper and lower steering bearings.
●Install the upper bracket.
●Install the steering column head.
●Install the steering column head bolt.
●Install the handlebar.
●Tightening:
Tightening torque of steering column head nut: 78
N·m
Tightening torque of upper bracket mounting bolt
- 80 -
(C): 30 N·m
Tightening torque of handlebar mounting bolt (C):
20 N·m
●Check the steering gear again.
★If the steering gear is still too tight or loose, readjust
it.
●Install the handlebar (see “Installing Handlebar” in
the “Steering Gear” chapter).
Applying Lubricant to Steering Column Bearing

●Remove the steering column (see “Disassembling
Steering Column and Steering Column Bearing” in the
“Operating System” chapter).
●Clean the ball bearings in the upper and lower holders
with the solvent with a high flash point and wipe up the
upper and lower outer rings. The outer ring is pressed
into the first section of steering column. Clear the
grease and dust.
●Visually check the outer ring [A] and ball bearing [B].
★ If the bearing components have been worn or
damaged, they must be replaced.
●Wrap the upper and lower ball bearings [A] inside the
holder with grease and then apply a thin layer of grease
to the upper and lower outer rings.
●Install the steering column (see “Installing Steering
Column and Steering Column Bearing” in the
“Operating System” chapter).
●Adjust the steering gear (see “Adjusting Free Steering
Clearance”).
- 81 -
Electrical System
Checking Light and Switch
Step 1
●All motorcycle lights will be on according to the order
shown in the table below.
Position light (LED) [A] On
High beam light (LED) [B] On
Low beam light (LED) [C] On
Front left turn signal light (LED) [D] On
Front right turn signal light (LED) [E] On
Taillight (LED) [F] On
Rear left turn signal light (LED) [D] On
Rear right turn signal light (LED) [E] On
License plate light [I] On
- 82 -
●The indicator of meter will be on in the order shown
in the table below.
Tachometer light (LED) [J] On
Meter panel (LED) [K] On
Fault warning indicator (LED) [L] On
Indicator at neutral position (LED) [M] On
High beam light indicator (LED) [N] On
Turn signal light indicator (LED) [O] On
★ If the lights are not on, check or replace the

following parts:
Battery (see “Checking Charging Situation” in the
20A main fuse and 10 A taillight fuse (see “Checking
Fuse” in the “Electrical System” chapter);
Applicable bulb (see “Wiring Diagram” in the
Header parts of dashboard LCD (see “Checking Header
Parts” in the “Electrical System” chapter);
Header parts of neutral indicator (LED) (see “Checking
Header Parts” in the “Electrical System” chapter);
Header parts of alarm indicator (LED) (see “Checking
Header Parts” in the “Electrical System” chapter);
Header parts of fault alarm indicator (LED) (see
“Checking Header Parts” in the “Electrical System”
chapter);
Header parts of light (LED) (see “Checking Header
Parts” in the “Electrical System” chapter);
ECU (see “Checking ECU Power” in the “Fuel
Injection System (EFI)” chapter);
Electric door lock (see “Checking Switch” in the
Gear position switch (see “Checking Gear Position
Switch” in the “Electrical System” chapter);
Wire harness (see “Checking Circuit” in the “Electrical
System” chapter).
ABS indicator (LED) (models with ABS) [see
“Checking ABS Indicator (LED)” in the “Brake”
chapter”)
●Close the electric door lock.
●At this time, all lights shall be off.
★If any light is not off, replace the electric door lock.
- 83 -
Step 2
●Turn on the turn signal switch [A] (left or right).
●Left turn signal or right turn signal (LED) (position of

corresponding switch) (front and rear) will flash.
●Left/right turn signal light indicator (LED) [A] in the

dashboard will flash.
★If the left turn signal or right turn signal is not on,
check or replace the following parts:
Turn signal (LED) (see “Replacing Turn Signal” in the
Header parts of turn signal light indicator (LED) (see
“Checking Header Parts” in the “Electrical System”
chapter);
Turn signal switch (see “Checking Switch” in the
- 84 -
System” chapter).
●Push the turn signal switch back.
●The turn signal light and turn signal light indicator
(LED) shall dim.
★ If the lights do not dim, check or replace the
following parts:
Turn signal switch (see “Checking Switch” in the
Step 3
●Turn the dimmer switch [A] to the position of low
beam light.
●Start the engine.
●Low beam headlights [A] shall be on.

★If the low beam headlights is not on, check or replace
the following parts:
Headlights low beam bulb (see “Replacing Headlights
Bulb” in the “Electrical System” chapter);
20A fuse of headlights (low beam) (see “Checking
15A fuse of headlights relay (see “Checking Fuse” in
the “Electrical System” chapter);
Headlights circuit relay in the relay box (see “Checking
Relay Circuit” in the “Electrical System” chapter);
Headlights relay (low beam) (see “Checking Headlights
Relay” in the “Electrical System” chapter);
System” chapter).
●Press the overtaking lamp switch [D] (models with

overtaking lamp switches) or turn the dimmer switch to
the position of high beam light.
- 85 -
●The low beam headlights [A] and high beam headlight
[B] shall be on.
●远光灯指示灯（LED）[C]应变亮。The high beam

indicator (LED) [C] shall be on.
If the high beam headlights and/or high beam light

indicator (LED) are/is not on, check or replace the
following parts:
Headlights high beam bulb (see “Replacing Headlights
Bulb” in the “Electrical System” chapter);
20A fuse of headlights (high beam) (see “Checking
15A fuse of headlights relay (see “Checking Fuse” in
the “Electrical System” chapter);
Overtaking lamp switch button (models with
overtaking lamp switch button) (see “Checking Switch”
in the “Electrical System” chapter);
Dimmer switch (see “Checking Switch” in the
Relay Circuit” in the “Electrical System” chapter);
Headlights relay (high beam) (see “Checking
Headlights Relay” in the “Electrical System” chapter);
System” chapter).
●Turn off the emergency flameout switch.

●Low beam headlights and high beam headlights shall
be still on.
★If the headlights and high beam light indicator (LED)
are off, check or replace the following parts:
Relay Circuit” in the “Electrical System” chapter).
●Close the electric door lock.
●The headlights and high beam light indicator (LED)
shall be off.
- 86 -
Checking Accuracy of Headlight
●Check the accuracy of headlights beam.
★If the headlight beam lights up one side instead of
straight front, adjust the beam.
Adjust the beam of front headlights correctly according
to the following steps:
Park the motorcycle about 10 meters away from the
upright wall on the completely flat ground.
Ride the motorcycle and sit at the rider position.
Make sure that the highest point of beam is lower than
1/10 of horizontal axis of headlights if the wall is
lighted.
If the beam does not fall within these scopes, make
some adjustment to maintain it at the correct position.
Adjustment of Headlight Beam

●Turn the adjusting screws [A] in two headlights inward
or outward until the beam lights up the front straightly.
★If the lighting position of headlights beam is too low
or too high, adjust the vertical beam.
Rotating screw at the top left corner
If the screw is rotated counterclockwise, the beam
will be lowered
If the screw is rotated clockwise, the beam will be
risen
Rotating screw at the top left corner
If the screw is rotated counterclockwise, the beam
will light up the left side
If the screw is rotated clockwise, the beam will light
up the right side
Remark
○When the motorcycle is supported by its wheels and
someone rides on the motorcycle, the brightest point
shall be slightly lower than the horizontal line after
opening the high beam. Adjust the angle of headlights
in accordance with the local regulations
- 87 -
Checking Emergency Flameout Switch
Step 1
●Set the gear as neutral.
●Turn the emergency flameout switch to the stop
position [A].
●Press the starter button.
●At this time, the engine shall have not started.
★ If the engine has started, check or replace the
following parts:
Emergency flameout switch (see “Checking Switch” in
the “Electrical System” chapter).
Step 2
●Set the gear as neutral.
●Turn the emergency flameout switch to the power
supply position [A].
●Press the starter button to start the engine.
●Turn the emergency flameout switch to the power-off
position.
●The engine shall stop running immediately.
★If the engine does not stop, check or replace the
following parts:
Emergency flameout switch (see “Checking Switch” in
the “Electrical System” chapter).
- 88 -
Others
Applying Lubricant to Frame Parts
●The rust must be removed with rust remover before
any parts are lubricated and the grease, oil, stain or dirt
shall be removed.
●Lubricate the following positions with the specified
lubricant.
Remark
○If the motorcycles are used in humid environment
or on rainy days, especially when the motorcycles
are sprayed and washed with high-pressure water,
the relevant parts must be lubricated in
accordance with the following specifications.
Pivot shaft: lubricated with grease

Brake handle
Brake pedal
- 89 -
Clutch handle
Pump connecting pin on rear brake
Side stand
- 90 -
Shift pedal
Thread: apply grease

Throttle cable steel cable end [A]
Cable: apply antirust agent

Throttle cable upper end
●Inject the antirust agent between cable and jacket to
lubricate the cable.
○The sprinkling lubricant on the market can be bought
and used for throttle cable steel cable
- 91 -
●After the connection between two ends of throttle
cable steel cable, the steel cable shall be able to move
freely [A].
★If the steel cable cannot move smoothly after the
lubricant is applied, the cable has been worn [B] or the
throttle cable jacket is broken [C], the throttle cable
must be replaced.
Check Tightness of Bolt, Nut and Fastener

●Check the tightness of the bolts and nuts listed below.
In addition, check whether all the cotter pins are in
place and in good condition.
Remark
○The tightness of engine fasteners shall be
checked when the engine is cooled (indoor
temperature).
★If the fasteners are loose, tighten them according to
the specified tightening order and tightening torque.
For the specifications on torque, see the corresponding
chapters. Refer to the “Standard Torque Table” if the
tightening torque is not described in the relevant
chapters. When any fastener is tightened, tighten it for
1/2 circle and then continue to tighten it.
★If the cotter pin is broken, it must be replaced with a
new one.
- 92 -
Bolts, Nuts and Fasteners to Be Checked
Engine:
Bolt lock nut of clutch lever pivot,
Mounting bolts and nuts of engine,
Mounting bolts and nuts of hanging plate of engine,
Branch holder nut of exhaust pipe,
Clamp bolt of muffler,
Mounting bolt of muffler cylinder I,
Mounting bolt of muffler cylinder II;
Wheel:
Front wheel axle and nut,
Front wheel axle and nut,
Sprocket bolt and nut;
Brake:
Bolt lock nut of brake lever pivot,
Bolts of brake pedal,
Mounting bolts of calipers,
Clamp bolts of front upper pump,
Joint cotter pin of rear master cylinder,
Mounting bolt of rear master cylinder,
Reservoir mounting bolt of rear master cylinder,
Mounting bolt of CBS cylinder,
Reservoir mounting bolt of CBS cylinder,
Oil-passing bolt of brake pipe
Oil-passing bolt
Suspension system:
Clamp bolt of upper bracket,
Tightening bolt of front shock absorber of upper
bracket,
Tightening bolt of front shock absorber of lower
bracket,
Upper mounting of rear shock absorber,
Lower mounting of rear shock absorber,
Lock nut of swing arm pivot shaft;
Steering gear:
Handlebar fixer bolts,
Bolt at steering column head;
Others
Foot stool pedal bracket mounting bolts
Side stand bolts
- 93 -
Replacement Part
Replacing Air Filter Element
Remark
○If the motorcycle is used in a dusty environment,
the replacement interval of air filter element shall
be shorter than the recommended replacement
interval.
○After riding in rainy days or on muddy roads,
replace the air filter element immediately.
Warning
If any dirt or dust enters into the throttle
body assembly, the throttle may be blocked and
safety accidents may be caused.
Note
If the dirt enters into the engine, the excessive
wear of engine may be caused, or even the
engine may be damaged.
●Remove the front seat cushion [A] using key [B]
●Disassemble:
Remove the fixing screw [A]
Remove the air filter air inlet [B]
- 94 -
Take the air cleaner element [A].
★Checking:
Check whether the filter element is polluted or
damaged.
Please replace with a new one if it has been polluted or
damaged.
★Cleaning:
Rinse the filter element softly and thoroughly with
cleaner.
Then apply the oil to the filter element and then
squeeze out the redundant oil, so that the filter element
is moist without oil dripping.
Remark
○Do not use the gasoline so as not to cause fires.
○Do not distort or warp the filter element so as not
to damage the foam materials.
●Install a new filter element [5].
Note
The recommended air filter element (Benelli
part number: 49202N220002) must be used. If
other air filter elements are used, the engine will
be worn prematurely or the performance of
engine will be reduced.
●Carry out the installation and disassembly in a reverse

process.
●Tighten air filter air inlet screw
●Reinstall the removed parts.
- 95 -
Replacing Fuel Pipe
●Disassemble the fuel tank [see “Disassembling Fuel

Tank” in the “Electronic Fuel Injection System (EFI)”
chapter].
●Pull out rubber cover of oil filter [A] from the fuel
tank.
● Remove the fuel pipe from the fuel pump joint [A].
●Make sure to enclose the hose joint [C] with a piece
of cloth.
●Press the joint lock claw [B].
Warning
If any fuel spills, it must be cleaned
thoroughly immediately.
When the fuel pipe is disconnected, the fuel
will spill from the fuel pipe. Therefore, the hose
joint shall be covered with a piece of clean
workshop cloth to prevent fuel from spilling.
● Remove fuel pipe joint [A] from fuel supply pipe [B].
Warning
If any fuel spills, it must be cleaned
thoroughly immediately.
When the fuel pipe is disconnected, the fuel
will spill from the fuel pipe. Therefore, the hose
joint shall be covered with a piece of clean
workshop cloth to prevent fuel from spilling.
- 96 -
●When installing a new fuel pipe, fix the rubber cover
of oil filter [A] on the fuel tank, as shown below.
● Arrange the fuel pipe correctly (see the section in the
“Accessory” chapter: “Winding Method of Cable, Wire
and Hose”).
●Insert the fuel pipe joint directly into the fuel supply
pipe [A] until the hose joint clicks.
●Push and pull the fuel pipe joint [A] back and forth
for more than twice to ensure that it has been locked
and cannot fall off.
Warning
Make sure that the fuel pipe joint is
properly installed on the fuel supply pipe,
otherwise the fuel may leak.
★If the fuel pipe joint falls off, install it again.
●Install fuel tank. [See “Installing Fuel Tank” in the

“Electronic Fuel Injection System (EFI)” chapter].
●Start the engine and check whether the fuel pipe leaks.
- 97 -
Replacing oil
●After the engine becomes hot, place the motorcycle
vertically and make it be perpendicular to the ground.
●Remove the oil drain bolt [A] to discharge the oil.
○Place an appropriate container under the oil drain bolt

[A] to collect the oil.
●Drain: oil in the crankcase.
●Tighten the oil drain bolt.

Tightening torque of oil drain bolt: 22 N·m
●Open the oil filler cap [A]

●Pour the oil of the specified type according to the
specified quantity.
- 98 -
Note
Make sure that the oil level is between the oil lens
[A]
Recommended oil
Model: 10W/40SF
Viscosity: SAE 10W-40
Capacity: 1.0 L
1.1 L (Engine is disassembled completely)
Remark
○Do not add any chemical additives to the oil! The
oil which meets the above requirements has been
carefully prepared and can provide enough
lubrication action to the engine and clutch.
○Although the oil with the viscosity of 10W-40 is
recommended for most cases, the corresponding
change is also needed according to the atmospheric
conditions of the specific using areas.
- 99 -
Replacing Brake Hose and Brake Pipe
Note
The brake fluid may quickly corrode the
surfaces of painted parts, therefore, if the brake
fluid splashes on any plastic part, it must be
thoroughly rinsed immediately.
●Remove the hollow bolt [A] of brake hose.
●When the brake hose is removed, do not splash the
brake fluid on any painted parts.
●When the brake hose [B] is removed, temporarily fix
the end of brake hose to a higher position to minimize
the loss of brake fluid.
●If the brake fluid spills, clear it immediately.
- 100 -
●Attention should be paid to the followings for the
motorcycle model equipped with CBS:
●Remove the hollow bolt [A] of brake hose.
●When the brake hose is removed, do not splash the
brake fluid on any painted parts.
●When the brake hose [B] is removed, temporarily fix
the end of brake hose to a higher position to minimize
the loss of brake fluid.
●If the brake fluid spills, clear it immediately.
- 101 -
●All sides of brake pipe accessory are equipped with
gasket. The gasket shall be replaced with a new one
during installation.
●Tightening:
Locking torque of hollow bolt of brake hose: 30 N·m
Locking torque of joint nut of brake pipe: 18 N·m
(vehicle model equipped with CBS)
●When the brake hose is installed, avoid significant
bending, kinking, extrusion or twisting and arrange it
according to the section in the “Appendix” chapter:
“Winding Method of Cable, Wire and Hose”.
●Fill the brake hose with brake fluid after the brake
hose is installed. (See “Replacing Brake Fluid”).
- 102 -
Replacing brake fluid
Warning
Use only the prescribed brake fluid. Other types of
brake fluid may damage the rubber seal, thus
causing leakage and degrading the braking
performance. Use the same brand of brake fluid in
the process of adding brake fluid. Brake fluid must
not be the mixture of different brands, because it
may cause dangerous chemical reactions and also
degrade braking performance.
When adding brake fluid, be careful not to allow
any water to enter the container. Water will
significantly reduce the boiling point of liquid, and
it may cause the formation of vapor bubbles.
Replacing and filling front brake fluid
●Remove the master cylinder reservoir cap bolt [A],
and remove reservoir cap and reservoir gasket.
●Loosen the bleed screw of slave pump of front brake
[B], and vacuumize from the bleed screw using a
vacuum pump to pump the brake fluid completely.
●Add new brake fluid to master cylinder reservoir,
keep the brake fluid in the reservoir not less than 1/3 of
its volume, and pull the brake lever for several times
quickly, and lock the bleed screw of slave cylinder [B].
注意 Note
○Operate the brake lever and feel. If you feel that it
is softer than before, please repeat the above actions
to refill.
Remark
○Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir
frequently and add new brake fluid as needed. If the
brake fluid in the reservoir runs out during the
replacement of the brake fluid, the air in the brake
pipe must be exhausted.
○ Front brake: Please repeat the above steps to
remove the calipers.
- 103 -
Replacing and filling rear brake fluid
●Disassemble:
Reservoir cap [A], reservoir gasket.
●Loosen the bleed screw of slave pump of rear brake
Note
○Operate the brake rod and feel. If you feel that it is
softer than before, please repeat the above actions to
refill.
Remark
○Rear brake: Please repeat the above steps to
- 104 -
Replacing and filling CBS pump brake fluid
●Disassemble:
Reservoir [A]
●Disassemble:
Reservoir cap and reservoir gasket
Loosen the bleed screw of slave pump of front brake
Note
○Operate the brake lever and feel. If you feel that it
is softer than before, please repeat the above actions
to refill.
Remark
○CBS pump: Please repeat the above steps to
●Properly install the covers of rear brake reservoir and

CBS pump reservoir in the following steps.
○First, tighten the cover [B] of rear brake fluid
reservoir with your hands clockwise [C] until you feel a
little resistance, indicating that the cover has been fixed
on the cup, then hold the cup [A] and rotate it by 1/6
turn [D].
●Tightening:
Locking torque of front brake fluid reservoir cover
stopper screw: 1.2N·m
●Tighten the air drain screw and install the rubber
- 105 -
cover.
Locking torque of air drain screw: 7.8 N·m
●After the brake fluid is replaced, check whether the
braking performance of brake is good, braking is
blocked or brake fluid leaks.
★If necessary, blow out the air in the brake pipe.
Warning
The following precautions should be taken when
handling disc brakes:
1. Do not reuse the brake fluid!
2. If the container containing of the brake fluid is not
sealed or opened for a long time, do not use the
brake fluid inside the container!
3. Do not mix different types or brands of brake
fluid, or the boiling point of the brake fluid will be
reduced, resulting in brake failure or corrosion of
rubber brake parts.
4. Please do not open the lid of the oil reservoir for a
long time, so as not to damp brake fluid.
5. Do not replace the brake fluid in rain or strong
winds!
6. Except brake pads and brake discs, it is required to
use disc brake fluid, isopropyl alcohol or ethanol to
clean brake parts. Do not use other fluids to clean the
parts above, because gasoline, oil or any other
gasoline distillates may corrode rubber parts. If oil
spills onto any part, it will be difficult to completely
clean, and ultimately corrosion may be caused to the
rubber parts inside the disc brake.
7. When handling brake pads or brake discs, prevent
any brake fluid or other oils from splashing on them.
If any brake fluid or other oil is applied to the brake
pads or brake discs, please clean them with the fluid
with a high flash point! Do not use any solvent that
will leave oil residue! If it is unable to thoroughly
clean the on the brake fluid or oil on the brake
pads, please replace the new!
8. The brake fluid may quickly corrode the painted
surface, so if any brake fluid spill, you must
immediately wipe it!
9. No matter when you open the brake pipe joint or
exhaust valve, you must exhaust the air in the
brake pipe!
- 106 -
Replacing Rubber Parts of Master Cylinder
Disassembling Front Master Cylinder
●Remove the front master cylinder (see
“Disassembling Front Master cylinder” in the “Brake”
chapter).
●Remove the sealing cover [4], spring [11], dust boot
[12] and seal [8].
Special Tools—internal circlip plier:
●Screw out the lock nut [14]and pivot shaft bolt [5] and
then remove the brake handle.
●Remove the spring [11].
●Pull out the piston assembly [10].
●Replacing:
Seal cover: [4],
Spring: [11],
Dust boot: [12],
Seal: [8],
Piston assembly: [10].
Disassembling Rear Master Cylinder

●Remove the rear master cylinder (see “Disassembling
Rear Master cylinder” in the “Brake” chapter).
●Remove spring [A], connector [B] and O-ring seal
[C].
Special Tools—internal circlip plier:
●Slide out the dust cover [D], and remove the spring
[E].
● Pull out the push rod assembly [F].
●Take the piston assembly [G] and reset spring [H].
Note
Do not remove the secondary cup from the
piston, because they may be damaged when
removed.
●Replacing:
Snap spring: [A],
O-ring seal: [C],
Snap spring: [E],
Push rod assembly: [F],
Piston assembly [G],
Diaphragm: [I].
- 107 -
Assembling Master Cylinder
●Before assembly, use the brake fluid or alcohol to
clean all parts, including the master cylinder.
Note
Except for the brake pad and disc brake, other
brake parts can only be cleaned by disc brake
fluid, isopropyl alcohol or ethanol. Do not use any
other fluid to clean above parts. Gasoline, oil or
any other petroleum distillate can corrode the
rubber parts. If oil splashes onto any part, it will
be difficult to clean it thoroughly and the rubber
parts inside the disc brake will be corroded
eventually.
●Apply the brake fluid to the new parts and inner wall
of brake cylinder.
●Be careful not to scratch the piston or inner wall of
brake cylinder.
●Apply silicone grease to the brake handle pivot shaft
bolt.
●Tighten the brake handle pivot shaft bolt and lock nut.
Locking torque of front brake handle pivot shaft
bolt: 1.0 N·m;
Locking torque of front brake handle pivot shaft
bolt lock nut: 5.9 N·m
- 108 -
Replacing Rubber Parts of Calipers
Disassembling Front Calipers
●Before the front calipers are disassembled, drain the
front brake oil.
●Loosen the front calipers fixing screw [A] and hollow
bolt [B], and then gently unscrew them.
●Disassemble:
Front calipers [C] (see “Disassembling Front Calipers”
in the “Brake” chapter),
Front brake pad (see “Disassembling Front Brake Pad”
in the “Brake” chapter),
Front calipers assembling bolt
O-ring seal
CBS type
- 109 -
●Remove the piston by using the compressed air.
A piston removal method is shown below:
○Install a rubber gasket [A] and a wood board [B] with
thickness of more than 10 mm (0.4 in.) in the middle of
the calipers. Fix the rubber gasket and wood board
together with appropriate bolts and nuts as shown in the
figure. Open one of the oil ports [C].
○Slowly inject the compressed air [D] into the oil port
until the piston touches the rubber gasket. If the
calipers are in a half-open condition, the hose joint [E]
shall be blocked during operation.
Press the bolt [F] and nut: [G].
Warning
In order to avoid serious injury, do not put your
finger or palm in front of the piston! Otherwise,
the piston will crush the hand or finger when the
compressed air is injected into the calipers.
○Pull out the piston with hands.

●Remove the dust seal [A] and oil seal [B].
●Repeat the above steps and remove the piston from
the other side of calipers body.
Remark
○If the compressed air cannot be used, remove the
piston from the two calipers according to the
following method (the brake hose is connected with
the calipers).
○Prepare a container to hold the brake fluid.
○Remove the brake pad spring and brake pad (see
“Disassembling Front Brake Pad” in the “Brake”
chapter).
○Press the brake rod until the piston is pushed out of
the brake cylinder and then remove the calipers.
- 110 -
CBS type
- 111 -
Assembling Front Calipers
●Clean the calipers parts (except for the brake pad).
Note
The parts must be cleaned by using the disc
brake fluid, isopropyl alcohol or ethanol!
●Replacing the new oil seal [A].
○Apply the silicone grease to the oil seal, and then
install it into the brake cylinder with hands.
●If the dust seal [B] is broken, replace it with a new
one!
○Apply the silicone grease to the dust seal, and then
●Apply the brake fluid to the outside of piston and

press it into the brake cylinder with hands.
●Apply some thread fastening glue to the threads of
front calipers assembling bolts and then tighten the
bolts.
Locking torque of front calipers assembling bolt: 27
N·m
- 112 -
CBS type
●Install the brake pad (see “Installing Front Brake Pad”

in the “Brake” chapter).
●Wipe up the brake fluid which is splashed onto the
calipers with a wet cloth.
- 113 -
Disassembling Rear Calipers
●Remove the rear wheel (see “Disassembling Rear
Wheel” in “Wheel / Tire” chapter)
● Separate calipers [A] and the brake disc.
●Loosen the hollow bolt [C] at the bottom of the brake

hose.
●Remove the calipers mounting bolt [B], and remove
the rear brake pad.
Note
Do not remove the calipers mounting bolts. To
remove calipers, simply remove the calipers
mounting bolt, because brake fluid may leak after
removing calipers mounting bolt.
●Remove hollow bolt and brake hose at calipers [D]
Note
If brake fluid spills out, please rinse immediately!
●Remove the piston on the calipers according to the

following method.
●The method for removing the piston on the calipers it
the same as that for removing the front calipers.
●Hold the piston on the calipers with a piece of wood
and blow the compressed air into the brake hose joint to
squeeze the piston of calipers.
Warning
In order to avoid serious injury, do not put your
finger or palm in front of the piston! Otherwise,
the piston will crush the hand or finger when the
compressed air is injected into the calipers.
- 114 -
●Disassemble:
Dust seal [A],
Oil seal [B],
Remark
○If there is no compressed air, remove the piston
from the two calipers according to the following
method (the brake hose is connected with the
calipers).
○Prepare a container to hold the brake fluid.
○Remove the brake pad spring and brake pad (see
“Disassembling Rear Brake Pad” in the “Brake”
chapter).
○Press the brake pedal and remove the calipers
piston.
Assembling Rear Calipers
●Clean the calipers parts (except for the brake pad).
Note
The parts must be cleaned by using the disc brake
fluid, isopropyl alcohol or ethanol!
●Install the bleed valve and rubber cover.
Locking torque of bleed valve : 7.8 N·m
●Apply the brake fluid to the inner wall of brake
cylinder.
●Replace with a new oil seal [A].
○Apply the silicone grease to the oil seal, and then
●Replace with a new dust seal [B].
- 115 -
●Apply the brake fluid to the outside of piston and
press it into the brake cylinder with hands.
●Apply some thread fastening glue to the threads of
rear calipers assembling bolts and then tighten the
bolts.
Locking torque of rear calipers assembling bolt: 37
N·m
●Install the brake pad (see “Installing Rear Brake Pad”

in the “Brake” chapter).
●Wipe up the brake fluid which is splashed onto the
calipers with a wet cloth.
- 116 -
Replacing Spark Plug
●Remove the ignition coil (see “Disassembling
Ignition Coil” in the “Electrical System” chapter).
●Remove the spark plug [A] vertically with the
wrench for spark plug.
●Replace them with two new spark plugs.

Standard Spark Plug
Model: A7RC (BOSCH)
●Insert a new spark plug into the spark plug hole and
press the spark plug tightly with your finger.
●Use the wrench [A] for spark plug to tighten the
spark plug vertically.
Note
If the wrench is tilted when the spark plug is
tightened, the insulator of spark plug may be
broken.
Locking torque of spark plug: 13 N·m
●Fix the ignition coil firmly.
○Make sure that the fixed ignition coil is not easy to fall off.
- 117 -
Chapter III Electronic Fuel Injection System
(EFI)
Contents
Introduction to EFI .................................................................................................................................... - 122 -

EFI System ................................................................................................................................................ - 123 -
EFI Part Position ........................................................................................................................................ - 125 -
Fuel tank .................................................................................................................................................... - 133 -
Exploded View of Fuel Tank ............................................................................................................. - 133 -
Evaporative Emission Recovery System of Fuel ............................................................................... - 135 -
Disassembly of Fuel Tank.................................................................................................................. - 136 -
Check ................................................................................................................................................. - 138 -
Installatation of fuel tank ................................................................................................................... - 140 -
Notes for EFI Overhaul ............................................................................................................................. - 141 -
Notes for EFI Overhaul ..................................................................................................................... - 141 -
ECU ........................................................................................................................................................... - 143 -
Engine controller (MT05.2ECU) ....................................................................................................... - 143 -
ECU Appearance ............................................................................................................................... - 143 -
ECU Disassembly .............................................................................................................................. - 143 -
ECU Installation ................................................................................................................................ - 144 -
Notes for ECU ................................................................................................................................... - 144 -
ECU Power Supply Requirements ..................................................................................................... - 144 -
ECU Temperature Requirements ....................................................................................................... - 145 -
Fuel pump .................................................................................................................................................. - 146 -
Working of Fuel Pump ....................................................................................................................... - 146 -
Appearance of Fuel Pump.................................................................................................................. - 147 -
Composition of Fuel Pump ................................................................................................................ - 148 -
Label and Mark of Fuel Pump ........................................................................................................... - 148 -
Working Environment of Fuel Pump ................................................................................................. - 149 -
Fuel pump Maintenance Process ....................................................................................................... - 149 -
Safety Protection:....................................................................................................................... - 149 -
Fault Diagnosis of Fuel Pump Assembly: .................................................................................. - 150 -
Disassembly of Fuel Pump Assembly: ...................................................................................... - 150 -
Installation of Fuel Pump Assembly: ......................................................................................... - 151 -
Fuel Pressure Release Process: .................................................................................................. - 151 -
- 118 -
Fuel Leakage Check Process: .................................................................................................... - 152 -
Notes for Use: .................................................................................................................................... - 152 -
Throttle Body............................................................................................................................................. - 154 -
Working Principle of Throttle Body: ................................................................................................. - 154 -
Appearance of Throttle Body: ........................................................................................................... - 154 -
Throttle Body: ............................................................................................................................ - 154 -
Throttle Position Sensor: ........................................................................................................... - 155 -
Air Control Valve of Idle Speed: ............................................................................................... - 155 -
Working Environment of Throttle...................................................................................................... - 155 -
Disassembly of Throttle ..................................................................................................................... - 155 -
Cleaning Method of Throttle ............................................................................................................. - 155 -
Installation of Throttle ....................................................................................................................... - 155 -
Precautions for Installation of Throttle .............................................................................................. - 155 -
Notes for Use of Throttle ................................................................................................................... - 156 -
Idle speed stepper motor .................................................................................................................... - 156 -
Working Principle of Idle speed stepper motor.......................................................................... - 156 -
Appearance of Idle speed stepper motor .................................................................................... - 156 -
Definition of pin ........................................................................................................................ - 157 -
Characteristic parameter: ........................................................................................................... - 157 -
Fault determination of idle speed stepper motor:....................................................................... - 157 -
Circuit inspection of idle speed stepper motor: ......................................................................... - 158 -
Cleaning ..................................................................................................................................... - 158 -
Resetting of idle speed stepper motor ........................................................................................ - 158 -
Fuel injector ....................................................................................................................................... - 159 -
Working Principle of Fuel Injector .................................................................................................... - 159 -
Appearance of Fuel Injector .............................................................................................................. - 159 -
Sealing Ring of Fuel Injector ............................................................................................................. - 160 -
O-ring Seal Connected to Oil Rail or Oil Injection Cap ............................................................ - 160 -
O-ring Seal Connected to Intake Pipe End ................................................................................ - 160 -
Recommended Lubricant ........................................................................................................... - 160 -
Overvoltage Impact of Fuel Injector .................................................................................................. - 160 -
Temperature Range of Fuel Injector: ................................................................................................. - 161 -
Fuel Contaminants of Fuel Injector ................................................................................................... - 161 -
Fuel Injector Harness Arrangement ................................................................................................... - 161 -
Notes for Use of Fuel Injector ........................................................................................................... - 161 -
Requirements for Installation of Fuel Injector ................................................................................... - 162 -
Replacement Method of Fuel Injector ............................................................................................... - 163 -
Fuel Injector Replaceability ............................................................................................................... - 164 -
Blocking of Fuel Injector ................................................................................................................... - 164 -
General Failure Mode and Prevention and Solving Measures in Using Process ............................... - 165 -
Intake Pressure Sensor ............................................................................................................................... - 166 -
Working Principle of Intake Pressure Sensor .................................................................................... - 166 -
Appearance of Intake Pressure Sensor............................................................................................... - 166 -
Storage Environment ......................................................................................................................... - 166 -
Electric environment .......................................................................................................................... - 166 -
- 119 -
Pin definition ..................................................................................................................................... - 167 -
Position .............................................................................................................................................. - 167 -
Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................. - 167 -
Oxygen Sensor........................................................................................................................................... - 168 -
Working Principle of Oxygen Sensor ................................................................................................ - 168 -
Appearance of Oxygen Sensor .......................................................................................................... - 168 -
Oxygen Sensor Pin Definition: .......................................................................................................... - 169 -
Characteristic curve ........................................................................................................................... - 170 -
Requirements for Fuel Quality .......................................................................................................... - 170 -
Temperature Sensor of Engine Cylinder Head .......................................................................................... - 171 -
Working Principle of Temperature Sensor of Engine Cylinder Head ................................................ - 171 -
Appearance of Temperature Sensor of Engine Cylinder Head .......................................................... - 171 -
Electrical environment ....................................................................................................................... - 171 -
Fault Determination and Characteristic of Output Resistance ........................................................... - 172 -
Canister Solenoid Valve (ECP) .................................................................................................................. - 173 -
Overview of Working Principles........................................................................................................ - 173 -
Appearance ........................................................................................................................................ - 173 -
ECP Pin .............................................................................................................................................. - 173 -
Ignition Coil............................................................................................................................................... - 175 -
Appearance of Ignition Coil .............................................................................................................. - 175 -
Fault Description: .............................................................................................................................. - 175 -
Fault Maintenance Diagnosis Method of EFI System ............................................................................... - 176 -
Diagnosis Directly Using the Flashing Fault Lamp at Instrument ..................................................... - 176 -
Diagnosing Fault Using Diagnostic Apparatus .................................................................................. - 179 -
Checking Fault Using Diagnostic Software PCHUD ........................................................................ - 180 -
Common Troubleshooting Methods of Electronic Fuel Injection System ................................................. - 185 -
Maintenance Tool .............................................................................................................................. - 185 -
Engine Working Data Flow Displayed by Diagnostic Apparatus ...................................................... - 185 -
Step I .......................................................................................................................................... - 185 -
Step II......................................................................................................................................... - 185 -
Step III ....................................................................................................................................... - 186 -
Simple Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................... - 186 -
Daily Use and Maintenance ....................................................................................................... - 186 -
Fault phenomenon-Start fault .................................................................................................... - 187 -
Fault phenomenon—Start failure with tempering...................................................................... - 188 -
Fault phenomenon—Instable idle speed .................................................................................... - 188 -
Fault phenomenon—Too high or too low idle speed (idle speed is obviously inconsistent with
target idle speed) ........................................................................................................................ - 189 -
Fault phenomenon—Instable idle speed with deceleration and flameout.................................. - 189 -
Fault phenomenon—Insufficient power of deceleration............................................................ - 189 -
- 120 -
Fault phenomenon—Slight burning phenomenon ..................................................................... - 189 -
Fault phenomenon—Fault lamp is on, but fault code is inconsistent with fault ........................ - 189 -
Fault phenomenon—Extremely high fuel consumption ............................................................ - 190 -
Fault diagnosis instructions for Delphi .............................................................................................. - 191 -
- 121 -
Introduction to EFI
This motorcycle adopts the small engine EFI
(electronic fuel injection) system of Delphi
Corporation. This system achieves closed-loop control,
ECU fuel injection and ignition control through oxygen
sensor. Three-way catalytic converter is used to handle
the gas after the combustion of engine, to convert it into
harmless gas and discharge it to the atmosphere. This
system uses closed-loop control self-learning system,
which can effectively eliminate the manufacturing
differences of system and related mechanical parts,
improve the overall consistency of the motorcycle, and
eliminate the error of motorcycle caused due to wear
and other causes after actual use.
Throttle position Idle speed control

sensor valve
Crankshaft
position sensor Burglar alarm
Throttle
Optional
Crankshaft position Ignition coil

target wheel
Heating type
oxygen sensor
Engine temperature
sensor Engine control
module Nozzle
Intake temperature
Neutral switch
Tipping switch Fault diagnosis switch

Intake pressure Serial communication interface
sensor
Ignition switch
Fault indicating Engine rotation

Storage battery lamp speed signal
Metal carrier catalytic
converter
- 122 -
Storage battery
power 23X signal
high
Ignition power Main relay output
23X signal
Ignition / Flameout low
master switch
EFI System
switch
Ignition coil
Main relay drive A Ignition coil
Fuse: EFI output (Cylinder 1) (non-IGBT)
system Fuel pump control
should use Main relay signal
independent
fuse-15A
Fuel pump control
Spark
Storage signal circuit
Main relay output plug
battery
12V Power (system)
grounding
Fuel
injector
Analog signal Nozzle A
(Cylinder 1)
5V reference voltage
Throttle position signal
Throttle
position sensor Main relay
Signal grounding output
D Idle speed control
valve A high
5V reference voltage B Idle speed control
Idle speed valve B high
Intake pressure signal stepper C Idle speed control
valve A low Ignition power
motor
A Idle speed control
Intake valve B low
Signal grounding
temperature
pressure sensor Intake temperature signal
- 123 -
Tachometer
Cylinder cover 5V reference voltage
temperature signal
Cooling water 5V reference voltage grounding (signal grounding) Fault lamp
temperature
sensor Signal grounding
Main relay output KW2000 serial data

Oxygen sensor signal Power (system) grounding CAN line signal high
Oxygen sensor Power (system)
Signal CAN line signal low
grounding grounding Single point grounding
Oxygen sensor heating to engine module
Diagnostic switch
Oxygen sensor (heating type) Storage
battery
power
Ignition power
Diagnostic
Neutral switch
interface
Tipping sensor
signal
Switch signal input Black Black
Connector (harness end)

part No. (Tyco)
Number of ECU connector
Connector Function description

(Black) (Grey)
Idle speed control valve A
J1-1
(high)
J1-2 Canister solenoid valve
J1-3 Fault light
J1-4
J1-5
J1-6 Tachometer
J1-7 CAN line signal (low)
J1-8 CAN line signal (high)
J1-9 Power (system) grounding
J1-10
Idle speed control valve A
J1-11
(low)
Idle speed control valve B
J1-12
(high)
Idle speed control valve B
J1-13
(low)
Tipping sensor signal
J1-14
(optional)
J1-15
J1-16
Fuel pump control signal
J1-17
circuit
J1-18 Neutral switch
J2-1 A Ignition coil drive A
J2-2 Power (system) grounding
J2-3 K line communication pin
J2-4 23 gear signal (low)
J2-5 A Nozzle A
J2-6
J2-7 Oxygen sensor heating
J2-8 Intake temperature signal
J2-9 Fuel pump control signal
5V reference voltage
J2-10
grounding
J2-11 Intake pressure signal
J2-12 Throttle position sensor
J2-13 23 gear signal (high)
Cylinder cover temperature
J2-14
signal
J2-15 Ignition power
J2-16 5V reference voltage
J2-17 Oxygen sensor signal
J2-18 Storage battery power
- 124 -
EFI Part Position
- 125 -
Throttle [A]
Canister [B]
Ignition coil [C]
Battery [A]
Fuse box [B]
OBD joint
Rectifier [A]
- 126 -
ECU[A]
Inlet air temperature pressure sensor [A]
Oxygen sensor [A]
Gear position sensor [A]
- 127 -
Fuel injector [A]
Meter [A]
Power lock [B]
Speedometer gear housing [A]
- 128 -
Fuel level sensor [A]
Fuel pump [A]
Side stand Switch [A]
- 129 -
Alternator [A]
Trigger [B]
Cylinder head temperature sensor [A]
Idle speed stepper motor [A]

Throttle openness sensor [B]
- 130 -
Item Standard
EFI system
Idle speed 1500 ±100 r/min （rpm）
Throttle assembly:
Type Cylinder type
Diameter Φ28 mm
Negative value of throttle
Bypass screw –––
ECU: MT05.2
Manufacturer Delphi
Type Electronic memory type, equipped with IC ignitor, sealed using resin
Avaliable engine rotation speed 100 - 15000 r/min (rpm)
scope
Fuel pressure (high-pressure pipe): 250 kPa

Fuel pump:
Type Built-in friction fuel pump of fuel tank
Fuel pump capacity ≥67 mL per 3 seconds (2.3 US oz.)
Fuel injector:
Nozzle style Finely atomized type,
Resistance: 10-15Ω at the temperature of 20°C (68°F)
Main throttle sensor:

Input power voltage DC 4.75 - 5.25 V
Output power voltage DC 0.25 - 4.65 V (the opening of throttle is at idle speed to completely
open)
Resistance 3 - 12kΩ
Intake pressure sensor / atmosphere

sensor
Output power voltage DC 3.80 - 4.20 V [standard atmospheric pressure ]
Intake temperature sensor:

Output voltage of ECU
Resistance 2.0-2.69kΩ at the temperature of 20°C (68℉)
0.30-0.37 kΩ at the temperature of 80°C (176℉)
Water temperature sensor:
Output voltage of ECU ≈1.9～2.1KΩ at the temperature of 25°C
Output power voltage ≈ DC 0.05-0.09 V or DC 4.5-4.9V at the state of opening power lock
or idle state of motorcycle
- 131 -
(Continued)
Item Standard
Anti-theft device transceiver (model ≈0.6 ∼ 0.9 Ω
equipped with anti-theft device transceiver)
Resistance
Oxygen sensor (model equipped with 6.7-10.5Ωat the temperature of 20°C (°F)
oxygen sensor):
Output power voltage (peak value when the
air-fuel ratio is largest)
Output power voltage (peak value when the
air-fuel ratio is smallest)
Heating coil resistance
Throttle handle and throttle line
Free clearance of throttle handle 3∼5 mm
Air filter Wet type sponge filter
Filter element material
- 132 -
Fuel tank
Exploded View of Fuel Tank
- 133 -
Torque
No. Name Remark
N·m kgf·m
1 Large-headed screw M6×25 10 1.0
2 Front mounting plate of seat cushion
3 Protector bush
4 Rubber cushion of protector
5 Washer 6
6 Combination screw 6 0.6
7 Rubber cushion of fuel sensor R
8 Oil level sensor components
9 Fuel pump assembly
10 Bolt M5×20 4 0.4 S、L
11 Filter components
12 Protective cover of filter
13 Pipe components
14 Fuel tank components
15 Rubber cushion of protector
16 Dump valve components
17 Plate-type clamp 8 R
18 Oil pipe 4.5×8.5×600
Connecting pipe between fuel tank and dump
19
valve Ф4×Ф8
20 Plate-type clamp 12.5
21 Oil pipe at water outlet 8×12×950
22 Canister components
23 Bolt M6×16
24 Canister plate 10 10
25 Mounting bracket of solenoid valve
26 Bolt M6×12 10 10
27 Solenoid valve of canister
28 Plate-type clamp 10 R
29 Connecting pipe I of solenoid valve of canister
30 Connecting pipe II of solenoid valve of canister
AL: Tighten the clamp bolts alternately twice in accordance with the higher locking torque.
G: Apply grease.
L: Apply thread fastening adhesive.
R: Replacement parts.
S: Observe the specified tightening sequence.
- 134 -
Evaporative Emission Recovery System of Fuel
- 135 -
Disassembly of Fuel Tank
●Disassemble front seat cushion (refer to
“Frame”-“Disassembling Front Seat”)
● Disassemble fuel tank cover(refer to
“Frame”-“Disassembling Fuel Tank Cover”)
●Disassemble rear mounting bolt of fuel tank [A]
●Disassemble front mounting bolt of fuel tank [A]
●Remove the connecting pipe [A] between fuel tank

and check valve
●Disassemble the check valve [B]
- 136 -
●Lift fuel tank, and unplug fuel pipe connected with
throttle;
Note:
Note to prevent fuel oil from flowing out when
unplugging the fuel pipe connected with throttle
●Place the fuel oil in the fuel tank in the container

prepared.
Warning:
In the process of placing oil, keep away from open
flame, to avoid fire
●Disassemble
Bolt [A]
Fuel level sensor [B]
●Disassemble
Screw [A]
Fuel pump [B]
Note:
Do not drop the fuel pump, especially prevent it
from dropping onto a hard surface, otherwise the
fuel pump may be damaged.
- 137 -
Check
●Check
○Whether there is rust inside the fuel tank
★Replace fuel tank in case of serious rust
●Check
○Dump valve
★Breakage/rust→Replacement
●Check
○Fuel pump
★Block→Cleaning
★Crack/damage→Replace the fuel pump assembly
○Check the performance of fuel pump (refer to: )
- 138 -
●Check
○Fuel level sensor
★Crack/damage→replace fuel level sensor
○Check the performance of fuel level sensor (refer to:

“Electrical Devices” – “Oil Level Sensor”)
●Check
○Fuel hose
★If any wear, crack [B] or expansion [C] is found →
the fuel pipe must be replaced.
●Check
○Ventilation hose
★If any wear, crack, gap or expansion is found → the
ventilation hose must be replaced.
- 139 -
Installatation of fuel tank
●Conduct installation in the reverse order of
“disassembly”
Note
Do not damage the mounting surface of fuel tank
when installing the fuel pump;
Use new fuel pump seals;
Use new fuel level sensor seals.
Torque value:
Oil level sensor tightening nut tightening torque: 6
N•m
Fuel pump mounting bolt tightening torque: 4 N*m
Fuel tank mounting bolt tightening torque: 10 N*m
Conduct installation as shown in the figure

Install the connector of fuel pump in the direction of
arrow
Lock the fuel pump screw in the correct locking order

as shown in the figure
- 140 -
Notes for EFI Overhaul
Notes for EFI Overhaul
There are many precautions for overhaul of EFI
system.
○This EFI system must be powered by a 12V battery.
Do not use any other battery as a power source for EFI
system.
○Do not connect the wrong battery cable, or ECU may
be damaged.
○To avoid damage to EFI parts, do not disconnect the
battery cable or any other electrical connectors while
the door lock is open or the engine is running.
○Be careful not to cause short-circuit to the cable
directly connecting the positive (+) terminal of the
battery directly to the ground wire of frame.
○Disconnect the connecting wire between battery and
motorcycle, so as to prevent damaging ECU due to
high voltage.
○Close electric door lock before disconnecting EFI
electrical connection, and then disconnect battery (-).
Do not pull the lead, and only pull the connector.
Conversely, ensure that all EFI electrical connectors
have been connected before starting the engine.
○Plug-in adapters should be bridged with power and
connected in place.
○Do not open the door lock if any EFI electrical

connectors are not connected.
ECU will remember the fault code.
○Do not spill water on electrical parts, EFI parts,
connectors, leads and wires.
○If a motorcycle is equipped with a transceiver, make
sure that the radio wave sent from antenna will not
interfere with the operation of EFI system. Make the
engine in idling operation, and check the operation of
system. Keep the antenna as far away from ECU as
possible.
○Do not open electric door lock when disconnecting
any fuel pipe. Otherwise, the Fuel pump will run,
resulting in fuel discharged from the fuel pipe.
○Do not run after Fuel pump is completely dry, to
prevent Fuel pump from being stuck.
○Before disassembling parts of the fuel injection
system, blow out any dirt or dust outside the parts with
compressed air.
- 141 -
○When any fuel pipe is disconnected, the fuel will be
discharged due to the residual pressure in the pipe.
Therefore, it needs to cover the hose joint with a clean
cloth to, so as to avoid spilling fuel oil.
○When installing the hose, avoid bending, kinking,
squeezing or twisting the hose excessively. Do not
bend the hose as far as possible to avoid blocking the
fuel line
○Lay out the fuel pipe according to the section
“winding way of cable, wire and hose” in chapter
“appendix”.
○Do not add any fuel antifreeze chemicals to the fuel
oil so as not to corrode the fuel injection system or
cause deposits in the fuel injection system.
○If the operation method is incorrect, the high pressure
in the fuel pipe may cause a fuel oil leakage or fuel
pipe [A] to burst. Bending and kinking is required
when checking fuel pipe.
★Replace the fuel pipe if any damage or expansion is
found!
○In order to maintain a correct mix of fuel and air (F /

A), intake leakage shall not occur in EFI system.
Screw in oil filler plug [A] after adding oil.
The locking torque of oil filler plug: tighten it with

hands.
- 142 -
ECU
Engine controller (MT05.2ECU)
The engine controller can detect the running state
of engine in real time through various kinds of sensors.
Through reasonable calculation and self-learning
control output device, it can ensure original vehicle
emissions and fuel oil economy at the same time of
optimizing the driveability of vehicles under different
conditions. The engine controller can also perform
self-diagnostics when the system is faulty
ECU Appearance
The upper part of MT05.2 engine controller shell
is made of plastic, and the bottom is made of
aluminium alloy. Fig. 2 is the front and back photos of
MT05.2 controller.
ECU Disassembly
●Disassemble rear seat cushion (see “Disassembling
Rear Seat Cushion” in “Frame”).
●Disassemble:
ECU[A]
Bolt [B]
- 143 -
ECU Installation
●Assemble it in reverse order of disassembly
Tightening bolt torque of ECU: 3.9N·m
Warning
The installation surface must be flat, to prevent
causing external stress to controller, which may
result in bending of controller circuit board:
Notes for ECU

Notes Cause
High temperature may reduce the service life of ECU
Do not: place ECU near exhaust pipe or engine
and even directly damage ECU
Do not: place ECU near dripping water, oil or any ECU may be damaged due to liquid or other
liquid similar substances
Do not: cover ECU surface with mud or other The cooling of ECU may be affected after being
pollutants covered with mud or other pollutants
It may cause problem to ECU performance, and
Do not: load extra voltage into ECU
even result in the damage of ECU.
Do not: clean ECU using the liquid with dissolution or
It may casue damage to ECU housing
corrosion effects
Please: ensure that water or a large number of
Short-circuit may be caused to ECU connector and
water vapor may not drip or be attached to ECU
thus result in daamge to ECU
connector
Please: clean ECU using a wet cloth and dry it It may prevent ECU damage
ECU Power Supply Requirements
 Power supply: If the battery voltage is greater than
6.3V, ECU power supply module can start control
chip, and this is automatically controlled by ECU.
 Power supply range: The ECU is capable of
operating within the range of 9 to 16V for battery
and ignition voltage.
 Shutdown: ECU will be shut down when the
ignition voltage drops below 6.2V. ECU will enter
shutdown program, to save the important
information into ECU’s memory.
 Restart: all outputs are set to a pre-set state during
a restart. ECU will monitor itself in real time;
when any internal error is detected, it will
automatically enter the restart. ECU will be run
according to the normal procedures at the end of
restart.
 Overvoltage: permanent damage will not caused to
ECU after working for 1 minute at a DC voltage
of not exceeding 26 V.
- 144 -
 Reverse voltage: permanent damage will not
caused to ECU after working for 1 minute at a
reverse DC voltage of not exceeding 13 V.
ECU Temperature Requirements

Operating temperature: ECU can work normally at a
ambient temperature of minus 20 degrees Celsius to 85
degrees Celsius.
- 145 -
Fuel pump
Working of Fuel Pump
Fuel pump assembly provides the gas to engine
with 250Kpa gasoline pressure to meet system
requirements. It is installed at the bottom of tank to
provide the required fuel oil to engine through the
connecting pipes.
●Fuel pump:
The electrical principle of electric fuel pump is that:
when DC motor is driving the fuel pump with
turbine-type structure to run, the fuel oil in the
circumferential grooves of turbine rotor will move at a
high speed with the turbine motor. Due to the
centrifugal force generated by the high speed, the fuel
oil pressure at the outlet is increased, meanwhile, the
turbine in high speed rotation will generate a certain
vacuum at the inlet of fuel pump, and thus fuel oil is
sucked into the turbine blade space from the inlet. The
differential pressure between the inlet and outlet may
cause fuel oil to be sucked by the fuel pump to the
outlet side and delivered to the fuel pipe of system. The
fuel oil delivery pressure generated by the fuel pump
may be up to 250kPa.
●Pressure regulator:
It is mechanical diaphragm type, and can be used
to make pressure regulation to fuel pump device, so as
to achieve the constant fuel pressure required by the
system.
- 146 -
Appearance of Fuel Pump
- 147 -
Composition of Fuel Pump
1. Pump harness
2. Pressure regulator
3. Fuel pump
4. Sealing washer
5. Fuel pump bracket
6. Fuel pump body
Label and Mark of Fuel Pump
Fuel pump assembly: make it at fuel pump assembly

installing plate in the form of label.
Fuel pump: make engraved mark at fuel pump.
Oil pressure regulator: make engraved mark at external
housing.
- 148 -
Working Environment of Fuel Pump
 The fuel pump assembly needs to be installed at
the bottom of fuel tank according to the
requirements.
 Fuel pump assembly design is generally only for
gasoline fuel, ethanol and fuel with gasoline ratio
of 22%.
 Make sure that there is enough fuel in the fuel tank
in the first operation of fuel pump assembly, and
do not run it in the absence of oil.
Fuel pump Maintenance Process

Safety Protection:
When conducting maintenance operation for fuel
system, care should be taken to ensure personal safety.
 Disconnect the negative electrode of storage
battery of motorcycle.
 Smoking is prohibited and a “no smoking” sign
should be placed near the operating area.
 Ensure that there is a fire extinguishing device.
 The operating environment is well ventilated and
away from open flames.
 Wear safety goggles.
 To release fuel vapors in the fuel tank, open tank
cover and refit it.
 There is still a high pressure in the fuel line after
the engine stops running, then oil may be injected
after disassembling or releasing fuel line. Refer to
“Fuel Pressure Release Process” in this section.
 A small amount of fuel may flow out after
- 149 -
disassembling fuel line, in order to avoid the risk
of occurrence, the blocking device at the fuel pipe
should be used for blockage.
 After maintenance is completed, please ensure that
the fuel line and clamp are properly installed.
 After maintenance is completed, check system oil
leakage according to the provisions of “Fuel
Leakage Check Process”.
 After maintenance is completed, connect the
negative electrode of storage battery, please ensure
that there is sufficient fuel in the fuel tank when
the fuel pump is running.
Fault Diagnosis of Fuel Pump Assembly:
Step Operation Yes No
If you can hear that the If you cannot hear that
After ingnition key is started, fuel pump fuel pump is running, the fuel pump is
1
will run for 3 seconds. please go to Step 4 running, please
directly. conduct Step 2.
Disconnect the connector of fuel pump, and Check the power
2 check whether the supply voltage of fuel Conduct Step 3 supply circuit of fuel
pump is within the range of 10-14V pump
Supply 12V DC current to fuel pump. 1. Check the circuit
1. Check fuel pump
Ensure that there is sufficient oil in the tank, from fuel pump to ECU
3 harness
to prevent dry running of fuel pump 2. Check ECU
2. Check fuel pump
Is fuel pump running?
Check whether the front fuel supply
Fuel pump assembly is
4 pressure of nozzle is within the range of Conduct Step 5
running normally
220-270kpa when engine is in idle running.
1. Check whether there
1. Check whether the
is leakage at fuel pipe
fuel filter is blocked
joint
Detect whehter fuel pipe way pressure is 2. Check whether fuel
5 2. Check fuel pump
less than 220kpa using oil pressure gauge. pipe is bent and twisted
position
3. Check pressure
3. Check pressure
regulator
regulator
Disassembly of Fuel Pump Assembly:
 Refer to “Fuel Pressure Release Process” to
release the fuel pressure in the fuel line.
 Disconnect the negative electrode line of storage
battery.
 Disconnect fuel pump assembly harness
connector.
 Remove the remaining fuel from the fuel tank and
store it in a suitable container, to ensure safety and
reduce contamination.
 Remove the fuel tank from the motorcycle.
- 150 -
 Invert the fuel tank, be careful to avoid tank
scratches and bumps.
 Remove fuel pump assembly installing bolt.
 Remove fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank
carefully.
 Be careful to not damage fuel pump filter screen.
Installation of Fuel Pump Assembly:
 Replace the sealing washer of fuel pump assembly.
(Used washer may lead to fuel leakage)
 Gently hold the fuel pump filter screen and put
fuel pump assembly into the fuel tank. Avoid
damaging fuel pump filter screen.
Installation direction of fuel pump assembly:
the installing screw holes of fuel pump
assembly are not arranged asymmetrically,
and they can be installed in the specified
direction. The pressure regulator should face
the rear of fuel tank, and ensure that the
installing surface of fuel tank is clean and flat
 N•m. Install mounting bolts on the fuel pump
assembly cover and tighten them evenly in the
order indicated in the following figure.
Installing torque of screw: 3- 4 Nm
The fuel pump assembly should be secured
with special bolts. It should be tightened
according to specified tightening order and
torque during the installation. Over torque an
incorrect tightening order may cause washer
deformation and thus result in leakage.
 Install the fuel tank on the motorcycle.
 Connect fuel pipe and fix it with a suitable clamp.
 Connect the fuel pump harness connector.
 Check for leaks according to “Fuel Leakage Check
Process”.
Fuel Pressure Release Process:
Note: Do not operate when the engine is in warning-up
state.
After confirming that the engine is in cooling state,
conduct the following fuel pressure release operation:
 The motorcycle is in “neutral” state.
 Disconnect the connector between fuel pump
assembly harness and motorcycle harness.
 Turn on motor to start engine until the engine
is automatically extinguished. Then
continuously turn on and off the ignition key
for 2-3 times, with an internal of 3 seconds
- 151 -
each time.
 After completing the above operations,
connect the fuel pump assembly harness
connector.
Fuel Leakage Check Process:
After performing any fuel system maintenance, perform
fuel leakage check test.
 Fill the tank with sufficient fuel.
 Turn on ignition key for 3 seconds, and then
turn off it for 15 seconds, repeat the above
operations for 3-4 times, to establish the oil
pressure in the fuel line.
 Check whether there is leakage in the parts of
fuel system (fuel tank, connecting pipes, pipe
joint, etc.).
Notes for Use:
Notes Cause
Do not: throw or touch fuel pump It may cause damage to the internal of fuel pump
Do not: fuel pump is “running in dry state” (there is no
oil at fuel pump inlet and filter screen) It may cause damage to the internal of fuel pump
Please ensure that there is sufficient fuel in the tank
Impurities may go into the fuel pump from damaged
Do not: damage filter screen during the maintenance
filter screen and thus damage the fuel pump body
Do not: disassemble the internal parts of fuel pump and
pressure regulator “Three guarantees” will not be provided in the case of
Do not: regulate fuel pump and pressure regulator unauthorized disasembly
(except replacement)
Do not: lift fuel pump assembly through fuel pump
assembly harness Harness is damaged / the power supply of fuel pump is
Do not: lift fuel pump harness in the direction vertical disconnected
to fuel pump cover plate
Do not: use damaged pipe clamp Pressure leakage / fuel leakage
Do not: use seriously damaged fuel pump filter screen Impurities may go into the fuel pump from damaged
or cut fuel pump assembly filter screen and thus damage the fuel pump body
Do not: pump oil from fuel tank using fuel pump Fuel pump is not designed for this purpose
Do not: Install screws to fix other parts using fuel pump
assembly Affect fuel pump assembly installation
Do not: damage fuel pump harness during the Damaged terminal may cause poor contact / the power
maintenance of fuel pump assembly supply of fuel pump is disconnected
Do not: contact fuel pump assembly when fuel
pumping oil from the tank manually Avoid damaging fuel pump assembly
Please: ensure that the tank is not damaged during
maintenance Avoid oil leakage
Please: only use “original” fuel pump assembly sealing
washer Counterfeits may cause fuel leakage
- 152 -
Ensure that there is no fuel leakage and seepage at pipe
Please: use designated hose clamp joint
Please: fix fuel pump harness at motorcycle Reduce shock
The fuel with poor quality may damage the fuel pump
Please: use standard fuel too early
Please: replace fuel filter within the specified time Blocked filter may reduce fuel supply
Unqualified filter may damage nozzle, oil pressure
Please: use specified and qualified fuel filter regulator and fuel pump
Please:esnure to correctly arrange the ways of fuel
Incorrect ways and interference may damage fuel pipe
pipes and not interfere with other parts
Please: ensure that there is sufficient fuel in the tank
(submerge fuel pump filter) Avoid “running in dry state” of fuel pump
Please: during the presure regulator maintenance, Ensure the correct pressure regulation curve of pressure
replace two O rings simultaneously regulator
Please: take care to connect fuel pump assembly
harness connector Avoid damaging the terminal of connector
Please: return any collided , damaged and suspicious Ensure to quickly and correctly find the root cause of
parts and describe the problems problem
Warning:
 Because there is no gasoline in the fuel tank of
new motorcycle at the beginning, a lot of air is
generated at fuel pipe, so it needs to start it for
several times to empty the air in the fuel line, and
then the engine can work properly, which is
normal. Motorcycle will be started easily in the
future.
 Because gasoline can cool fuel pump, do not let
fuel pump work little oil or no gasoline, which
may burn fuel pump.
- 153 -
Throttle Body
Working Principle of Throttle Body:
Throttle body assembly mainly consists of the
following components: main casting valve,
bearing, shaft and valve plate, return spring,
throttle wire part, throttle position sensing system,
and bypass air volume control system. All of the
above subsystems work together to meet the
requirements for following functions:
 Intake flow control
 Control of air flow at idle speed
 Throttle position detection – provide
throttle opening feedback signal for engine
control system
Throttle body position sensor provides ECU
with throttle opening; the stepper motor at throttle
body maintains the idle speed of engine near the
target idel speed required by ECU;
Appearance of Throttle Body:
Throttle Body:
 34mm inner diameter: maximum flow:
≥50g/s@2.7kPa vacuum degree
 Breakaway torque of throttle body:
Idle speed state: 0.12±0.03 N•m
Full opening: 0.32±0.05N•m
- 154 -
Throttle Position Sensor:
 Reference voltage: 5±0.1VDC
 Resistance between T1 and T2: 3k-12kΩ
Air Control Valve of Idle Speed:

 Working voltage: 7.5-14.2VDC
 Winding resistance: 53Ω±10%
 Winding inductance: 33mH±20%
Working Environment of Throttle
Normal working temperature: -30-120°C
Disassembly of Throttle
 Turn off the power switch
 Disconnect the negative electrode connection of
storage battery
 Disconnect the connectors of throttle position
sensor, stepper motor, intake temperature /
pressure sensor (if it has been installed at throttle
assembly)
 Remove throttle wire
 Remove the hose connected with air filter and
intake manifol
Cleaning Method of Throttle
Clean throttle body using carburetor cleaner (3M
product is recommended). Spray cleaner at the inner
wall of throttle body, and gently remove dust and
carbon deposit and other items using a brush. Be
careful to prevent the bypass airway from being
blocked by dirt.
Installation of Throttle
Note the following items for the steps to install
throttle body:
 Adjust throttle wire
 Ensure that all moved parts have been
installed in place, such as stepper motor
assembly
 Install connection screw
Precautions for Installation of Throttle
 Do not immerse the throttle position sensor into
the liquid.
- 155 -
 Always open the valve plate using throttle wire.
 Do not put tools or other items inside the throttle
body to maintain the opening of valve plate. This
may result in deformation of valve plate or
scratching of inner wall of throttle body. Such
damage may cause the valve plate to be too easily
opened or difficultly.
Notes for Use of Throttle
Notes Cause
Please: be caureful to install the connectors of all throttle
body Avoid the damage to the terminal
Please: avoid any liquid from entering throttle body Make sure it works properly
Please: take one throttle body from the part tray and
install it Avoid damage to key components
Please: return the dropped, damaged or suspected parts
and label them to describe the existing problems (only for Quickly identify the cause of problem
three packs of components)
Do not: use any dropped or squeezed parts May cause damage to the internal of parts
Do not: store or transport it near salt water in unprotected
conditions Corrosion may affect normal use
Do not: expose it to the environment before the
completion of assembly (such as humid environment) Corrosion may affect normal use
Do not: test it using non-system operating voltage May cause damage
Do not: use extra clamps May cause damage
Do not: remove the packaging so that the parts can touch May affect minimum air leakage or cause other
each other damage
Do not: release the throttle completely from any position May cause damage
Do not: block bypass with dust or small particles This may affect idle speed stability
Do not: pick up, store or hold parts in a manner that might
May cause damage
come into contact with other parts.
Idle speed stepper motor
Working Principle of Idle speed stepper motor
The function of idle speed control valve is to control the flow area of
bypass air passage of throttle body, so as to adjust the air volume of engine
and control the idle speed of engine. Air
1. Valve plate; 2. Intake manifold; 4. Idle

speed stepper motor; 5. By-pass port
Appearance of Idle speed stepper motor

As shown below
- 156 -
Definition of pin
Dust cover
Adjusting head (when it is
at the maximum extension Pin
position, the adjusting head
corresponds to , and it
can move between 0.44 and
2.00 mm.
Joint
Complete retraction position
Working position
Characteristic parameter:
Rated voltage: 12Vdc
Maximum / minimum
7.5Vdc/14Vdc
working voltage
Resistance per coil (@27°C): 53Ω±5.3
Maximum
35Ω
resistance(@-40°C):
Inductance per coil (@25°C): 33.5mH±6(1kHz)
Stepped distance (stepped
0.04167mm
frequency):
Maximum travel: 8.5mm(204 steps)
-40°Cto125°C(peak
Operating temperature range: value: 150°C)
Minimum storage
-40°C
temperature:
Weight: 110g
Fault determination of idle speed stepper motor:

Before inspection, check whether the stepper
motor 4 PIN (black) connector and ECU plug-in
connector are loosened or improperly connected, and
then check the flashing of malfunction indicator light.
Inspection of stepper motor:
Measure the resistance between Pin A and Pin B and
that between Pin C and Pin D respectively with a
multimeter
- 157 -
Standard: Air temperature: 20-30℃, 53±20%Ω
Circuit inspection of idle speed stepper motor:

Stepper motor
On NG:A+Open circuit
A-J1-01
Stepper motor
On NG:A-Open circuit
B-J1-11
Stepper motor
On NG:B+Open circuit
C-J1-12
Stepper motor
On NG:B-Open circuit
D-J1-13
Cleaning
The stepper motor assembly is integrated at
throttle body. For cleaning, first disassemble stepper
motor and then clean it using a clean cloth.
Resetting of idle speed stepper motor
The resetting method of the idle speed stepper
motor is hereby explained: After the production and
debugging of new motorcycle are finished, the
debugger will take off the storage battery and wait for
packing the vehicle. This will cause a sudden power
down of the ECU and all self-learning of ECU
(including self-learning of the stepper motor), result in
the lost step of stepper motor and forget their current
locations; after the storage battery is installed and
powered on next time, the stepper motor will be in a
“chaotic” state, thus resulting in instable idle speed,
high or low idle speed. At this time, we need to reset
the stepper motor. Method: after starting the
motorcycle, turn off the key and wait for 15 seconds.
Then turn on the key and start the motorcycle to check
whether the stepper motor has returned to normal. If it
has not returned to normal, repeat the resetting
operation.
- 158 -
Fuel injector
Additional resistor
Various sensors
Crankshaft position
sensor
Air flow meter
Fuel injector
Water temperature Micro
sensor comp
Throttle position sensor uter
Ignition switch
Oxygen sensor
Vehicle speed sensor
Storage battery voltage
Working Principle of Fuel Injector

Injector is an actuator. It can inject appropriate fuel into
the intake of engine through ECU and then suck it into
combustion chamber and then mix it with the oxygen in
the fresh air filled for combustion.
Only replace it with the fuel injector with the same
part number.
Appearance of Fuel Injector
The following figure shows the appearance of fuel
Connect the
injector. O-ring seal of oil
rail or oil
injection cap
Connect the O-ring

seal at intake pipe
end
- 159 -
Sealing Ring of Fuel Injector
As shown above, O-ring seal can ensure that
leakage will not occur when fuel injector works within
the range of -40°C -150°C (-40 -302°F), and it can
resist various fuel additives (such as: ethyl alcohol).
The following data is the existing sealing ring design.
O-ring Seal Connected to Oil Rail or Oil Injection Cap
• Dimensions：
• Inner diameter: 6.35 mm
• Outer diameter: 14.85 mm
• Section thickness: 4.25 mm
• Material
•Viton GLT (blue): application at low temperature
•Viton A (black): except the application at low
temperature
O-ring Seal Connected to Intake Pipe End
• Dimensions:
• Inner diameter:9.61 mm
• Outer diameter: 14.49 mm
• Section thickness: 2.44 mm
• Material:
•Viton A (blue or brown)
Recommended Lubricant
To facilitate the installation of fuel injector,
lubricant should be applied at O-ring seal. The
following table shows the list of usable lubricants. Tests
show that the following lubricants do not have any
impact on the fuel injector.
List of recommended lubricants

Name of lubricant Manufacturer Viscosity (cSt) @ 40 °C
Spindura 10 Equilon 10
Spindura 22 Equilon 21
DTE-24 Mobil 32
DTE-25 Mobil 46
DTE-26 Mobil 68
Norpar 15 Exxon / Mobil <1
Drawsol 60 DA Stewart 1-2
NocoLube AW 46 NOCO Energy 46
NocoLube AW 32 NOCO Energy 32
Advantage Spindle Oil Advantage Lubrication Specialties 10
Overvoltage Impact of Fuel Injector
The fuel injector can run at the voltage of 26V and
the working conditions of 100ms (pulse) and 200ms
(one cycle time) for 1 minute at most (run with oil). It
- 160 -
will not affect the flow rate, cause permanent damage
to the solenoid coil or weaken the electromagnetic
performance.
Temperature Range of Fuel Injector:
The standard injector operating temperature range
is as follows. Within the qualified operating
temperature range, the fuel injector flow is within the
tolerance range and fault will not be caused. At the
same time, in a reasonable working environment,
leakage, degradation or reduction of service life will
not be caused to fuel injector.
 Operating temperature range: -30 -125°C
 Extreme operating range (may cause some
functional degradation): - 40-150°C
 Storage temperature: -60 -60°C
Fuel Contaminants of Fuel Injector

Although the injector has a self-cleaning function,
it is not a serviceable part, because it is designed to
remove only the impurities with small diameter
accumulated in the fuel line from the fuel filter to the
injector. The impurities with large diameter may cause
injector bonding, flow deviation and leakage and other
faults, so fuel filter system is very important.
Fuel Injector Harness Arrangement
 The injector harness should be located away
from heat sources and the harness should be
protected from external wear or damage.
 If not necessary, do not insert or remove the
injector connector.
 The electrical plug-ins of fuel injector do not
have positive and negative electrodes
Notes for Use of Fuel Injector
Notes Cause
Do not: resuse the seal; if it needs to reuse it in special
conditions, please carefully check whether the sealing Avoid leakage
ring is damaged before use.
Do not: immerse the end of nozzle in the lubricant. It may block spray hole.
Do not: run it without load in the case of no oil pressure It may damage internal mechanical components.
Do not: make water go into the fuel way during leakage It may damage fuel injector.
inspection.
During the installation on nylon intake pipe, allow to
Do not: apply force to the head of fuel injector during
apply force in the direction of 45 degrees
installation
Do not: Strike fuel injector when installing it at intake It may cause fuel injector and sealing ring.
pipe.
Do not: apply tensiion to connector. It may cause intermittent power supply.
Do not: use fuel injector that has fallen. It may be damaged.
- 161 -
Do not: store fuel injector, fuel rail or engine that has
External environment may damage the electronic and
been loaded into fuel injector in an unprotected
mechanical parts of fuel injector.
environment.
Do not: take fuel injector as a handle when lifting
assebly parts. It may damage fuel injector.
Do not: parts are in contact with each other during It may damage fuel injector.
storage.
Do not: parts are in contact with each other during Collision may be caused and thus fuel injector may be
transportation. damaged.
Do not: knock fuel injector for troubleshooting when an It may damage fuel injector.
fault occurs.
Do not: repalce the original fuel injector with one with
the part number not recommended. It may seriously affect the performance of nozzle.
Please: pay special attention to protect sealing ring from
being cut by the installing seal during the installation of
fuel injector Protect sealing ring.
Please: Use correct lubricant for installation, and
immediately it into the installing hole after applying Protect sealing ring, to reduce pollution.
lubricating oil.
Please: add tests for the fuel injector whose needle
valve is stuck or cannot be mounted. (Apply the pulse to
Confirm the fault form of fuel injector
fuel injector for less than 5 seconds using 9-15 V
voltage).
Please: before assembling fuel injector, make an oil-free It may prevent the needle valve of fuel injector froming
leak test to confirm that the needle valve of fuel injector returning to the original position during the
has been mounted. transporation and transfer process, thus resulting in fuel
leakage.
Please: prevent liquid from damaging fuel injector. It may casue short circuit of solenoid coil.
Please: be careful to disassemble harness. It may cause damage of terminal.
Please: use recommended lubricant when installing
connector. It may cause corrosion to terminal.
Please: do not use fthe components that are dropped,
damaged or whose materials have problem, and describe Ensure to quickly find the root cause of fault.
the problem using label.
Requirements for Installation of Fuel Injector
During the installation and removal process, please
strictly observe the following methods to avoid damage
to thefuel injector body and electronic components.
 Lubrication: Apply a small amount of lubricant
to the underside of the sealing ring. ISO 10
light mineral oil or equivalent product is
recommended.
 When conditions allow, apply lubricant to the
fuel injector seat, which is better than the effect
of being applied the seal ring. So that the fuel
injector contamination probability will be
reduced to minimum.
 Do not allow the spray plate to come into
contact with the lubricant, which may affect
the injection quantity. Do not dip the top of the
fuel injector to into the lubricant.
 All fuel injector sealing rings are factory
assembled. In principle, the sealing seals
- 162 -
should not be reused. In the case of being
resued in special conditions, please carefully
check the sealing rings for damage. Very small
damage may cause leakage. Carefully insert
the sealing ring into the installing seat during
installation.
 When installing the fuel injector connector,
take care not to damage the connector, and you
can hear a click, indicating that it is in place.
 Avoid unnecessary disassembly and assembly
of connector.
 Harness should not be clamped too tightly,
which may cause a short circuit.
 When installing the fuel injector connector, do
not rotate the fuel injector. This may cause fuel
injection target to shift.
Replacement Method of Fuel Injector

The following is the disassembly and replacement
method of fuel injector.
Note: The injector and the surrounding objects are very
hot.
 Turn off the motorcycle.
 Cut off the negative electrode of storage
battery, to avoid accidentally starting the
engine.
 Remove the fuel injector connector.
 Release the fuel pressure.
 Remove the fuel pipe from the fuel injector.
 Remove the fuel injector from the throttle
body.
 Remove the fuel injector retainer and carefully
remove the fuel injector from the seat ring.
 Carefully clean the impurities at the injector
contact surface, and be careful not to damage
the contact surface.
 Apply lubricant to the sealing rings on both
ends of the new fuel injector.
 Carefully put the head of fuel injector into the
intake pipe, and confirm that the installation
direction is consistent with the original one.
 Press it in the fuel injector seat ring and secure
the clamp.
 Install fuel injection pipe.
 Insert the fuel injector connector.
 Power on the key, do not start the engine and
- 163 -
check fuel injector for leakage.
 Start engine for running check.
Fuel Injector Replaceability
Only allow to replace the fuel injector with one
with the same part number.
Blocking of Fuel Injector
The accumulation of fuel impurities may cause
flow offset and shorten fuel injector life. When the
engine is standing, the heat of engine may produce fuel
precipitation through the head of fuel injector, and the
precipitation gathered in the injection hole may cause
flow offset.
 Blockage may cause many problems, such as
small flow, large friction and accumulation of
impurities, and ultimately affect emissions and
durability.
 Fuel and environmental factors may cause fuel
crystallisation or fuel injector corrosion, which
may also cause flow offset.
 Poor oxidation stability of fuel may cause
precipitation, so please use high-quality
gasoline.
 Add an appropriate amount of fuel cleaner to
avoid precipitation.
 If fuel injector is blocked, please clean injector
according to the following cleaning method.
- 164 -
Warning:
 The injector is internally designed with a filter, Bad Good Bad
but it is not a serviceable part because it is
designed to filter out only the accumulated
impurities between the fuel filter and the fuel
injector in the fuel line, and these impurities may
cause fuel injector bonding, flow offset and
leakage and other faults, so the fuel filter is very
important.
 It can be replaced with the fuel injector with the
same part number. Atomization of fuel injector
General Failure Mode and Prevention and Solving Measures in Using Process
Important note:
All the following decisions are based on normal
functions of motorcycle, wiring harness and other
system parts.
Block of fuel injector:
Please clean the fuel injector by using special
devices (such as ultrasonic wave) and special
cleaning agent.
Fuel leakage of fuel injector:
Replace the fuel injector with that with the same
part number or that specified by the motorcycle
factory.
Damage of electromagnetic coil:
Please measure the resistance of electromagnetic
coil of fuel injector with a multimeter. If the reading
is about 12 (±5) Ohms, the electromagnetic coil of
fuel injector is normal; if the coil resistance is
infinite, it means that an open circuit fault has
occurred to the coil.
- 165 -
Intake Pressure Sensor
Working Principle of Intake Pressure Sensor
This sensor is used to measure the absolute
pressure of air intake elbow, reflect the size of intake
pressure according to the difference of resistance, and
then calculate the intake volume in engine combustion
chamber through indirect conversion, and it is also a
non-serviceable part.
Appearance of Intake Pressure Sensor
As shown below
Working Environment
 Working pressure range: 20-115kPa
 Working temperature range: -40-105°C
 Relative humidity: 0 -100% RH.
 Extreme operating environment: work for 2
hours at the maximum temperature of 125°C
Storage Environment
 Storage temperature: -50°C-150°C
Electric environment
Typical voltage: DC reference voltage of operating
sensor circuit is 5±0.1V.
- 166 -
Pin definition
See the right figure
Position
Intake pressure sensor is integrated at throttle body
Cleaning
If necessary, the sensor can be cleaned with
isopropyl alcohol and then air dried. It should be
soaked in isopropyl alcohol for not more than 1 minute,
and sealing connector should be installed during
cleaning to prevent cleaner from intruding into the
inside of sensor.
Fault Determination
1. Check whether the plug-in is loose
2. Check the fault or current data with a diagnostic
instrument
3. View the breakover between the sensor and ECU
and check whether the abnormal operation of
sensor is caused by cables
4. Inspection of sensor: Connect with cable and
power on; measure the voltage between two pins
with a multimeter; the standard means that the
voltage is 4.25-4.75V under the air pressure of
100kPa when the sensor is not started. Otherwise,
the sensor fails.
- 167 -
Oxygen Sensor
Working Principle of Oxygen Sensor
Oxygen sensor can be used to detect the oxygen
content in the waste gas of engine exhaust pipe for
internal fuel closed loop control of ECU, thus
maintaining engine combustion at the most reasonable
state of air and fuel ratio (14.7).
Appearance of Oxygen Sensor
See the figure below
 Partially thick limit of air-fuel ratio: ＞750
mVDC
 Partially thin limit of air-fuel ratio: ＜120
mVDC
 Power of oxygen sensor heater: 7.0W
(The above parameters are measured at
engine bench, the working conditions: exhaust
gas temperature: 450°C; duty cycle: 70%;
10Hz; voltage: 13.5V).
 The resistance of heater is: 9.6±1.5Ω (measured at
21°C)
 Operating temperature range: 260-850°C
Installation Requirements
 Installation angle (angle with the horizontal
plane): ≥10 degrees
- 168 -
Oxygen Sensor Pin Definition:
Connector of oxygen
sensor
1. Heating control grounding of
oxygen sensor (OSH-)
2. Heating power supply of oxygen
sensor 12V+
3. Signal of oxygen sensor – (OS-)
4. Signal of oxygen sensor+ (OS+)
Fault Determination
1. Conduct fault diagnosis with a diagnostic instrument
and judge the fault type
2. Check whether pins fall off
3. Check the voltage between the sensor signal line and
signal earth with a multimeter: Standard
When the engine temperature is 80 degrees and the
idle speed or constant speed is 3000 revolutions,
4000 revolutions or 5000 revolutions, the duration
is more than 2 minutes. Measure whether the
voltage at both ends changes between 0-1V
constantly. Otherwise, the sensor fails.
- 169 -
Characteristic curve
Oxygen sensor is at exhaust manifold. Please first

pull up oxygen sensor plug-in, and then remove the
oxygen sensor with 13# open spanner, and pay attention
to not knot or clinch the harness.
Requirements for Fuel Quality
 Pb≤0.005g/L
 P≤0.0002g/L
 S≤0.04% (weight ratio)x
 MMT≤0.0085g/L
 Si≤4ppm
- 170 -
Temperature Sensor of Engine Cylinder Head
Working Principle of Temperature Sensor of Engine Cylinder Head
The engine cylinder head temperature sensor is
used in the air cooled engine to measure the
temperature of engine cylinder head. Within the sensor
temperature range, the resistance will change with the
temperature of engine and the temperature
characteristic is the negative temperature coefficient
resistance characteristic. It is an irreparable part.
Appearance of Temperature Sensor of Engine Cylinder Head
Right figure
Working Environment
 The sensor is mainly used for water-cooled engine
 Normal operating temperature range: -40 -160°C
(continuous work)
 Working environment relative humidity: 0 ~ 100%
 Typical operating pressure: at minimum
installation torque, the sensor is capable of sealing
the engine coolant at an actual pressure of 206.8
kPa (30 psi) and a temperature of 135°C.
 Extreme working conditions: only 1 hour at
maximum temperature of 160°C.
Electrical environment
 Typical operating voltage: the reference voltage is
5 ± 0.1VDC
 Maximum excitation current: During the
characteristic test and calibration of the sensor
under any temperature, the performance of the
sensor should not be affected by the current of less
- 171 -
than 1mA.
Fault Determination and Characteristic of Output Resistance
Fault performance:
This will have a large impact on start-up, because
the ECU cannot monitor the temperature of engine or
achieve accurate fuel injection.
General faults are caused by the looseness of
connection plug-in or the falling of the pin on the
plug-in. The sensor can only be replaced with that of
the same model.
Internal resistance measurement: Disconnect with
cable;
Measure the resistance between Pin 1 and Pin 2 with
a multimeter (as shown in the figure)
Standard: 25℃: 1.9-2.1KΩ
100℃: 0.179-0.187KΩ
Otherwise, the sensor fails
- 172 -
Canister Solenoid Valve (ECP)
Overview of Working Principles
Canister solenoid valve controls the fuel vapor in
the canister into engine intake system from canister,
and make it burn in the engine. Thus, reduce fuel
evaporation emission.
Appearance
The appearance of canister solenoid valve is
shown in the right figure:
ECP Pin
The pins do not have positive and negative electrodes, and the connection method is as shown below:
- 173 -
Charcoal canister port
Intake manifold port
Electrical port
Solenoid switch is normally

closed
 Normal operating voltage: 8-16V VDC
 Operating temperature: -40-120°C
 Operating frequency: 16 Hz
 Maximum flow: 25-35L/min
Flow curve is as shown below:
Flow (standard liter / minute)
Duty cycle (%)
Installation Requirements
 Canister solenoid valve should be horizontally
installed at motorcycle.
 Canister solenoid valve should be placed at
the position near the center rotation axis of
crankshaft, to reduce shock.
- 174 -
Ignition Coil
Appearance of Ignition Coil
See the right figure
Fault Description:
If spark plug do not ignite or intermittently ignites,
engine cannot work
If the ignition coil fails and thus the spark plug
does not ignite, the ECU will turn off the injection of
corresponding cylinder, ie, do no inject fuel.
If the high-voltage wire on the ignition coil is
damaged, electrical leakage or poor ignition may be
caused.
Please check: whether the signal grounding from
the ECUJ2-01 pin to ignition coil is conductive, and
whether the connection from the output terminal of
relay to the positive terminal of ignition coil is
conductive.
- 175 -
Fault Maintenance Diagnosis Method of EFI System
Diagnosis Directly Using the Flashing Fault Lamp at Instrument
Fault lamp [A] is located on the dashboard and has a
mark below it. Under normal circumstances, open the key,
the fault lamps will be on normally, indicating that the EFI
system is a state with power supply, and it can work; fault
lamp is off, indicating that there is no power supply in EFI
circuit, it will not work, and check should be conducted for
the connection of positive and negative electrodes of fuse
and storage battery. After starting the engine, fault lamp
goes off, indicating that there is no fault; on the contrary,
fault lamp is normally on after starting engine, indicating
that EFI system is abnormal and there is a fault for
troubleshooting.
In the case that a fault is confirmed, after opening and
closing the key for 3 times, namely the operation of
opening---closing--- opening---closing –opening key, the
fault lamp will flash the flash code of corresponding fault.
Then, corresponding fault can be identified through fault
code table.
Of them, when using the method to read fault using
fault lamp, the flash code rule is as follows: for example, the
fault is the open circuit of intake pressure sensor or short
circuit of signal terminal pin to the negative electrode of
storage battery, the fault lamp will flash for 10 times to
represent 0, flash for 1 time to represent 1 after 1.2 seconds,
flash for 10 times to represent 0 after 1.2 seconds, flash for
7 times to represent 7 after 1.2 seconds, namely P0107. It
can be seen that except that number 0 is represented by
flashing for 10 times, numbers 1-9 correspond to the times
of flashing. If there are other fault codes, such as fault
P0201, there is fault in the fuel injector of cylinder 1. After
flashing P0107, wait for 3.2 seconds, continue to flash
P0201 fault code; if there is no other fault, it will flash
P0107 and P0201 cyclically. Then, relevant faults can be
queried according to fault code table.
When using PCHUD software, the software will report
fault code using decimal numbers. In fault code table, there
is an one-to-one correspondence relationship between
decimal numbers and previous hexadecimal numbers, and
thus corresponding faults may be found according to the
correspondence relationship. For example, MULFCURR
(current fault) = 263 in the software, it corresponds to
P0107 in fault code table, namely intake pressure sensor
fault.
- 176 -
●MT05 Fault Code Table
Remark:
All fault display functions of Delphi are listed in
the fault code table. If this model does not have the
corresponding function, please ignore it)
System or DTC
DTC Description Related Calibration
Component Number
anifold Absolute P0107 MAP Circuit Low Voltage or Open KsDGDM_MAP_ShortLow
Pressure Sensor
P0108 MAP Circuit High Voltage KsDGDM_MAP_ShortHigh
(MAP)
Intake P0112 IAT Circuit Low Voltage KsDGDM_IAT_ShortLow
Temperature
P0113 IAT Circuit High Voltage or Open KsDGDM_IAT_ShortHigh
Sensor (IAT)
Coolant/Oil Temperature Sensor Circuit
P0117 KsDGDM_CoolantShortLow
Coolant/Oil Low Voltage
Sensor Coolant/Oil Temperature Sensor Circuit
P0118 KsDGDM_CoolantShortHigh
High Voltage or Open
Throttle Position P0122 TPS Circuit Low Voltage or Open KsDGDM_TPS_ShortLow
Sensor (TPS) P0123 TPS Circuit High Voltage KsDGDM_TPS_ShortHigh
P0131 O2S 1 Circuit Low Voltage KsDGDM_O2_1_ShortLow
Oxygen Sensor
P0132 O2S 1 Circuit High Voltage KsDGDM_O2_1_ShortHigh
Oxygen Sensor P0031 O2S Heater Circuit High Voltage KsDGDM_O2_HeaterShortHigh
Heater P0032 O2S Heater Circuit Low Voltage KsDGDM_O2_HeaterShortLow
Fuel Injector A P0201 Injector A Fault KsDGDM_INJ_CYL_A_FaultHigh
Fuel Injector B P0202 Injector B Fault KsDGDM_INJ_CYL_B_FaultHigh
Fuel Pump Relay P0230 FPR Coil Circuit Low Voltage or Open KsDGDM_FPP_CircuitShortLow
(FPR) P0232 FPR Coil Circuit High Voltage KsDGDM_FPP_CircuitShortHigh
Crankshaft P0336 CKP Sensor Noisy Signal KsDGDM_CrankNoisySignal
Position Sensor
P0337 CKP Sensor No Signal KsDGDM_CrankNoSignal
(CKP)
Ignition Coil A P0351 Cylinder A Ignition Coil fault KsDGDM_EST_A_Fault
Ignition Coil B P0352 Cylinder B Ignition Coil fault KsDGDM_EST_B_Fault
Idle Control
P0505 Idle Speed Control Error KsDGDM_IdleControl
System
P0562 System Voltage Low KsDGDM_SysVoltLow
System Voltage
P0563 System Voltage High KsDGDM_SysVoltHigh
MIL P0650 MIL Circuit Malfunction KsDGDM_MIL_Circuit
P1693 Tachometer Circuit Low Voltage KsDGDM_TAC_Circuit_Low
Tachometer
P1694 Tachometer Circuit High Voltage KsDGDM_TAC_Circuit_High
P0137 O2S 2 Circuit Low Voltage KsDGDM_O2_2_ShortLow
Oxygen Sensor 2
P0138 O2S 2 Circuit High Voltage KsDGDM_O2_2_ShortHigh
Oxygen Sensor P0038 O2S Heater 2 Circuit High Voltage KsDGDM_O2_HeaterShortHigh
- 177 -
Heater 2 P0037 O2S Heater 2 Circuit Low Voltage KsDGDM_O2_HeaterShortLow
Vehicle Speed
P0500 VSS No Signal KsDGDM_VSS_NoSignal
Sensor
Park Neutral
P0850 Park Neutral Switch Error KsDGDM_ParkNeutralSwitch
Switch Diag
P0445 CCP short to high KsDGDM_CCP_CircuitShortHigh
CCP
P0444 CCP short to low/open KsDGDM_CCP_CircuitShortLow
Rollover Sensor
P1500 Rollover Sensor malfunction/Triggered KsDGDM_RolloverSensor
Diagnostic
BLM_MaxAdapt P0171 Several BLM value hit maximum KsFDIAG_BLM_MaxAdapt
BLM_MinAdapt P0172 Several BLM value hit minimum KsFDIAG_BLM_MinAdapt
PESystLean P0174 PE mode burned AFR keeps lean KsFDIAG_PESystLean
- 178 -
Diagnosing Fault Using Diagnostic Apparatus
●Diagnostic Apparatus
●Operation Method:
a) Find the diagnose interface [A] at motorcycle;
b) Connect connecting wire and diagnostic apparatus
interface;
c) Open the key for diagnosis
Warning
 XCM-PT100X diagnostic apparatus is a
high-precision instrument, so it should be
protected from shock and vibration;
 If the instrument cannot work properly or
display stably after the first start-up, please
unplug the power cord and try again.
 Please ensure that the connector is always
tightened in the diagnostic connector;
 It is forbidden to test the electric signal
exceeding the limit value.
 The driver is forbidden to operate the
instrument during driving.
 Use and storage conditions:
Ambient temperature: 0- 50 degrees Celsius
Relative humidity: less than 90%
- 179 -
Checking Fault Using Diagnostic Software PCHUD
PCHUD software is used to detect and record
engine operating data, laptop should be connected to
6-hole diagnostic port of motorcycle through K line
before use, and diagnosis port should be below rear seat
cushion. Please note that PCHUD system only supports
16Bit Microsoft Windows operating system or a very
small number of 32bit Windows operating system, does
not support 64bit systems such as Win7, Win8 or iOS,
etc. It needs to install K-line driver software at the
laptop before use.
●Operating Instructions for PCHUD Software:
(1) Connect laptop and 6-hole diagnostic port of
motorcycle using K line and open the key;
(2) Click “HUD.EXE” icon and start PCHUD
software;
(3) Select “File” in the software interface, click “open”
to select “PCHUD.HAD”, and then click “OK” for
confirmation.
(4) Select “Parameter File” under “Setup”, click

MT05common.par file, select “Comm protocol
under “Setup”, select “Keyword2000” and then
click OK, at the same time select 17 as the Device
Code.
- 180 -
(5) If the software interface cannot display the
real-time communications data, it needs to conduct
the following work: check whether there is
problem in COM port connection setting under
“Setup”, generally set COM Port: 4. Baud
Rate:10400, and do not select DTR High at startup
- 181 -
And then conduct normal communications, display the
current fault code at MALFCURR, and display
historical fault code at MALFHIST.
And then query the corresponding fault according to fault code table.
●PCHUD Software Parameter Interpretation:
VRPM Engine speed engine speed
VTHROT Throttle opening throtle position
VBARO Atmospheric pressure BARO
VMAP Intake manifold pressure manifold air pressure
VMAPEXP Estimated value of intake manifold pressure expect manifold air pressure
VIGN Storage battery voltage ignition key voltage
cylinder temperature or coolant
VCLTS Temperature of cylinder temperature or coolant
temperature
VIAT Intake temperature intake temperature
STATUSBYT
Status flag 5 STATUSBYTE5
E5
VAFCMET Airflow learning conditions are met airflow correction met
VBAROCMET Atmospheric pressure updating conditions are met Baro update met
VCSINSYNSP
Sequential ignition flag sequential spark enable
RK
SATITRIG tip-in ignition angle correrction condtions are met tip-in Spark Advance retard trigger
CATLOENB Catalyst work logic is enabled catlyst light-off logic enable
IF
Normal working flag position of engine engine work in run state
ENGSTATE=3
NISTBLIDLE The idle speed conditions for warming up machine stable warm idle
- 182 -
are met
FCNO Long-term learning unit of intake efficiency block learn memory cell
FBLMCOR1 Long-term learning value of cylinder cylinder 1 block learn memory
FCLCINT1 Item I of closed loop learning intergral of close loop correction
FCLCMUL1 Correction of closed loop learning close loop correction
IARDRPM Rotating sped of desired idle speed desired idle rpm
IARPMERR Deviation of idle speed idle rpm error
FPWVC1 Fuel injection pulse width of cylinder base pulse width of cylinder 1
VO2 Oxygen sensor signal Oxygen sensor signal
STATUSBYT
E3
Concentraiton flag position of oxygen sensor of cylinder 1 oxygen sensor signal rich
FO2STAT1
cylinder lean state
Correction and resetting flag positon of closed loop
FCLREST1 cylinder 1 close loop correction reset
of cylinder
FOSHTREN Oxygen sensor heater is enabled Oxygen sensor heater enable
Heating completion flag position of oxygen sensor of
FO2REDY1 cylinder 1 Oxygen sensor ready
cylinder
IF IACV Closed loop learning of idle speed stepper motor is idle airflow control valve close loop
MODE=0 enabled correction enable
IAMTRLOST Lost step flag position of idle speed stepper motor IACV lost
Flag position where the movement of idle speed
IACMVIHB IACV move disable
stepper motor is disabled
VIGNS Ignition state flag position ignition state
FVE1 Charging efficiency of cylinder cylinder 1 Volumetric efficiency
VMAPRANG Intake pressure reading angle MAP read angle
AFFNLAFR Target air fuel ratio target air fuel ratio
SAESTA Angle of advance of cylinder ignition cylinder 1 Spark Advance
SAIDLDYN Dynamic ignition angle at idle speed idle dynamic Spark Advance
SPDWELL Magnetizing time dwell time
IAINTEGOFS
Airflow learning value of idle speed stepper motor airflow integral of idle air control valve
T
desired position of idld air control
IACVDSMP Number of desired steps of idle speed stepper motor
valve
STATUSBYT
E2
FCLCEN1 Closed loop correction of cylinder is enabled cylinder 1 close loop correction enable
PPDSEBL Flag position where pilot injection is disabled prime pulse disable
FPENABL Flag position where fuel pump is enabled fuel pump enable
FTRNSAES Acceleration and enriching are enabled acceleration enrich enter
FTRNSDES Deceleration and thinning are enabled deceleration enlean enter
FTRNSAEDC
Acceleration and enriching exit acceleration enrich exit
LOAD
FTRNSDEINL
Deceleration and thinning exit deceleration enlean exit
OAD
●Diagnosis Process:
1.Insert the key on vehicle and do not start the motorcycle, please check：
Parameter Check and Record Min Max Description Units
VIGN □Norm □Abnormal 11.5 14.6 battery voltage volt
VTHROT □Norm □Abnormal 0 1 fully closed throttle position percent
VTHROT □Norm □Abnormal 98 100 fully open throttle position percent
VTHROTRAW □Norm □Abnormal 4000 9000 Absolutely throttle body voltage AD None
VBARO □Norm □Abnormal 98 103 atmospheric pressure kpa
VIAT □Norm □Abnormal -15 40 intake temperature degC
VCLTS □Norm □Abnormal -15 40 cylinder temperature or coolant degC
- 183 -
temperature
2.Starting：
Start □Norm □Abnormal - - - -
TERRCNT □Norm □Abnormal 0 0 Fly wheel tooth error counter count
fuel cut-off enable, the normal flag is
FUELCOFF □Norm □Abnormal 0 0 None
white, if not blue
Rollover sensor enable, normal is white,
VRLVENBL □Norm □Abnormal 0 0 None
if not blue
3. Idle The parameters can be checked 1 min for idle speed after vehicle starting. And then check the
stability of EFI parameterafter 3 minutes of long idle.
VRPM □Norm □Abnormal 1300 1700 engine speed rpm
VTHROT □Norm □Abnormal 0 1 fully closed throttle position percent
MALFCURR □Norm □Abnormal 0 0 current MALF code None
VBARO □Norm □Abnormal 98 103 atmospheric pressure kpa
VMAP □Norm □Abnormal 47 53 intake pressure measured value kpa
VIGN □Norm □Abnormal 12 16 battery voltage volt
Neutral and Clutch switch enable flag,
PNSWTCH □Norm □Abnormal 0 0 None
blue is working
IACVDSMP □Norm □Abnormal 10 80 stepper motor target value step
vehicle speed □Norm □Abnormal 0 0 vehicle speed Km/h
FBLMCOR1 □Norm □Abnormal 0.75 1.15 cylinder 1 block learn memory factor
FCLCINT1 □Norm □Abnormal -15 15 cylinder 1 integral of lose loop correction count
FPWVC1 □Norm □Abnormal 1.5 2.8 base pulse width of cylinder 1 ms
VO2 □Norm □Abnormal 45 850 cylinder 1 oxygen sensor voltage mv
VO2B □Norm □Abnormal 45 850 cylinder 2 oxygen sensor voltage mv
4. Run with stable speed
MALFCURR □Norm □Abnormal 0 0 current MALF code None
VCLTS □Norm □Abnormal 40 105 degC
temperature
FCLCINT1 □Norm □Abnormal -15 15 cylinder 1 integral of lose loop correction count
5. Top speed with full throttle(PE mode, power enrich)
PE mode： 70% < VTHROT < 100%, in this situation，the value of oxygen sensor(VO2 VO2B) is
around 800mv.
VCLTS □Norm □Abnormal 80 105 degC
temperature
- 184 -
Common Troubleshooting Methods of Electronic Fuel Injection System
Maintenance Tool
a) Disassembly and assembly of electronic control
system components - common automotive
mechanical parts removal tool
b) Electronic control system circuit and system
electrical signal - digital multimeter (with
buzzer)
c) Electric control system fault diagnosis and
engine working condition detection
 Electronic control system fault
diagnostic apparatus (recommended)
 Fault diagnosis software (PCHUD)
and interface connection (conditional
use)
d) electronic control system fault code table
(emergency use)
e) fuel pressure gauge, range: 0-300kP
Engine Working Data Flow Displayed by Diagnostic Apparatus

Analyze and determine engine fault using the
engine working data flow displayed by the diagnostic
apparatus.
Step I
a) Engine harness and the vacuum pipeline—may affect
the system to control air flow and fuel supply
b) Whether oxygen sensor is assembled in place—may
affect the system to determine the air to fuel ratio
c) Engine fault indicator—may affect the system to
give an alarm for fault
d) Storage battery voltage—determine whether the
power of storage battery is sufficient
e) Determine whether coolant temperature sensor,
intake temperature sensor, intake manifold absolute
pressure sensor and oxygen sensor display value are
normal
f) Working range of throttle position sensor—it cannot
be fully opened or closed, which may affect engine
power performance and some system functions
Step II
Check whether ECU power is turned off—the
communications between diagnostic apparatus and
system is interrupted after turning off key switch.
- 185 -
Step III
a) Storage battery voltage (14V) —Indicate whether
the generator is working properly.
Too high: there may be fault in voltage regulator;
Too low: there may be improper connection of
generator or generator fault
b) Intake manifold pressure—it can predict whether
there is leakage in intake and valve clearance
problems
Valve clearance is too small: this value is too high,
so engine power performance may be affected; in
addition, due to too early opening of exhaust valve
and increase in exhaust temperature, oxygen
sensor and three-way catalytic converter service
life may be significantly shortened;
Valve clearance is too large: it may cause low
intake manifold pressure, and thus affect the
system to determine the working state of engine,
thus resulting in abnormal idle speed during
warm-up of motorcycle.
In addition, if the exhaust system is blocked, for
example: a foreign body exists in the exhaust
channel; the oil consumption is too high, thus
blocking three-way catalytic converter; three-way
catalytic converter is blocked due to internal
damage, which will cause slightly high value.
c) Number of cycles of oxygen sensor value—the
number of cycles is too small, indicating fault of
oxygen sensor
Simple Troubleshooting
Please follow the following steps to repair EFI
system. To repair fault in one step, the subsequent
steps may be stopped. And then use diagnostic
apparatus to conduct inspection and acceptance and
clear fault code according to section “Engine Working
Data Flow Displayed by Diagnostic Apparatus”.
When using diagnostic apparatus, the voltage of
storage battery should not be lower than 8.5 V.
Daily Use and Maintenance
 Gasoline should be high quality without lead.
 ECU has a moisture-proof function, but
high-pressure water gun should not be used to
rinse its shell.
 The petrol filter should be changed every 18,000
- 186 -
km.
 Under normal conditions of use, clean the throttle
body every 10,000 km or 1 year.
Fault phenomenon-Start fault
a) Rotate ignition switch to “On” position, and check
whether engine fault lamp is on.
If it is off:  Check fuse and grounding wire
 Check whether ECU plug is
connected firmly
 It is able to check whether this
lamp and line is normal using the
check function of diagnostic
apparatus actuator
 Check and repair bulb and its line
It is be  Connect diagnostic apparatus to
able to be system diagnosis interface
on:
b) Check whether diagnostic apparatus can be
connected to system for communications
If not:  Check fuse and grounding line
 Check whether ECU plug is
connected firmly
 Test whether diagnostic apparatus
is working normally at another
normal motorcycle
If yes:  Remove the fault indicated by
diagnostic apparatus
c) Check ignition system fault—whether normal
ignition can be made for spark plug
If not:  Check whether high-voltage line
and spark plug are plugged firmly
or damaged
 Use another ignition coil for
assembly judgment
 Use ECU for judgment
If yes:  Check whether high-voltage line
is connected to ignition coil and
spark plug properly
d) Check oil supply system fault
Check whether fuel pump is working—it is able to
hear the sound that the fuel pump is working near the
fuel tank when starting engine
Not  Check whether fuel pump relay is
- 187 -
work: working normally
 Check whether the connection and
working of crankshaft position sensor
is normal
 Use ECU for judgment
 Check fuel pump line
Be 1) Check whether fuel supply pressure is
able greater than 220Kpa 1)
to 2) Insufficient  Check whether there
work: pressure: is sufficient fuel in
the fuel tank
 Check whether fuel
filter needs to be
replaced (note:
replace the fuel filter
special for electronic
injection should be
replaced once every
18000km)
 Check whether fuel
supply pipe and
fuel return pipe are
damaged
3) Normal  Check whether there
pressure: is any abnormality in
nozzle control line
 Check whether
nozzle needs to be
cleaned
e) Confirm whether cylinder is submerged
If yes:  After completely opening the
throttle and turning on starting
motor, there should be working
sign in engine after several
seconds
f) Check whether crankshaft position sensor
clearance is too large
Fault phenomenon—Start failure with
tempering
a) Check whether ignition coil is loosened;
b) Check whether timing gear ring is loosened.
Fault phenomenon—Instable idle speed
Idle Check whether the idle speed bypass
control bolt is loosened
system:
- 188 -
Oil supply Check whether there is leakage in oil
system: pipeline
Fault phenomenon—Too high or too low idle
speed (idle speed is obviously inconsistent
with target idle speed)
Too high  When the water temperature is
idle speed: lower than 68 degrees, the system
will increase idle speed to
accelerate warming-up process,
which is normal phenomenon.
Check the items according to the
following items except that
 Check whether it needs to adjust
the negative pressure equilibrium
of cylinder
 Check whether valve clearance,
especially exhaust valve clearance
is too large
Too low  Check fuel quantity in fuel tank,
idle speed: fuel filter, fuel line pressure and
nozzle
 Checking Valve Clearance and
confirm whether it is too small
Fault phenomenon—Instable idle speed with deceleration and flameout

a) Checking valve clearance;
b) Check whether idle speed bypass hole and throttle
body are too dirt.
Fault phenomenon—Insufficient power of deceleration
a) Check whether the parameters are normal at idle
speed and high idle speed;
b) Check fuel quantity in the fuel tank and fuel filter;
c) Check whether exhaust system is blocked, for
example: whether three-way catalytic converter is
blocked by burning oil or damage;
d) Check fuel line pressure and nozzle;
e) Check whether fault lamp is on, and whether normal
ignition can be conducted for only one cylinder.
Fault phenomenon—Slight burning phenomenon
Check whether the spark plug clearance meets
specification of 0.7-0.8mm
Fault phenomenon—Fault lamp is on, but fault code is inconsistent with fault
It may be caused due to instable connection of
system grounding wire, reconnect the grounding wire,
- 189 -
disconnect the power wire of storage battery for 3
minutes and then connect it and start engine.
Fault phenomenon—Extremely high fuel consumption
a) Check whether the oxygen sensors of two
cylinders are assembled in place; if it is in the
loose state, the oxygen sensor may incorrectly
judge that the combustion in the cylinder is thin,
and then increase fuel, which may result in
unusually high fuel consumption.
b) After confirming that the engine mechanical parts
and oxygen sensor are in normal conditions, run
the engine to observe the oxygen sensor reading. If
the reading is always greater than 500 mV at
normal water temperature, check whether there is
leakage in fuel injector.
Notes
 The vast majority of EFI parts cannot be repaired;
after the confirmation of damaged parts, generally
replacement is taken.
 When starting the engine, do not operate any
mechanism (including the throttle, do not pull the
throttle for start) on the engine.
 If engine fault lamp becomes on during the engine
operation, cause must be checked and eliminated
as soon as possible.
 Do not use leaded gasoline, because lead may
damage the oxygen sensor and three-way catalytic
converter.
 If oil consumption is abnormal, the problem
should be resolved as soon as possible, because
some of the substances in the oil may damage the
oxygen sensor and three-way catalytic converter.
 Valve clearance should not be too small, if the
exhaust valve is not shut off tightly, exhaust
temperature may become too high and thus
shorten the life of three-way catalytic converter.
 At the temperature of below 10°C, if the vehicle
and engine run at low speed for a long time, the
exhaust pipe may have carbon deposition and
become black, which is a normal phenomenon. It
will be eliminated after a period of high-speed
operation, or appropriate means should be taken to
keep the engine coolant temperature within the
specified temperature range.
- 190 -
Fault diagnosis instructions for Delphi
Requirements of latest regulations of the foruth
phase of EU and China National IV Motorcycle: the
motorcycle with electronic fuel injection system must
be equipped with OBD2 fault diagnosis system,
namely:
1. When the motorcycle is started, the power fault
light must be on. If there is no fault after start, the
fault light will go out; if there is any fault, the fault
light will be on.
2. If the motorcycle has experienced a historical fault
(electric spray failed during assembly, debugging
or riding, but it has returned to normal), fault light
msut be on after start, but it can only go out after 4
working cycles; at this time, historical faults
cannot be detected using diagnostic apparatus, and
no fault code can be read.
The processing method is now described as
follows: If the fault light is on, but no fault code can be
read using diagnostic apparatus, it can be determined as
historical fault. The method to remove historical fault is
as follows:
Resetting method of Delphi system: start the
motorcycle and keep it at idle speed for 30 seconds,
wait for 15 seconds after closing the key, and then
quickly opening and closing the key for more than 5
times (the time interval should not exceed 1 second),
the last operation is to turn off the power, wait for 15
seconds and then start to see whether the fault light is
on. If the fault light is still on, repeat the resetting
operation.
- 191 -
Sample of Diagnosis Table
Name of rider: Registration number (license number): Year of first registration:
Model: Engine No.: Frame No.:
Date in the event of a fault:
Environment in the event of a fault:
Weather □Clear □ Cloudy □Rain □Snow □Normal □Others:
Temperature □Hot □Warm □Very Cold □Normal □Others:
Fault frequency □Usually □Often □Only once
□Streets □Highways □ Mountain roads (□Uphill, □Downhill) □Rough roads □Crushed
Road conditions stone roads
Altitude □Normal □High altitude (about 1000 m or above)
State of motorcycle in the event of a fault
□Last for about 3 seconds after opening electric door lock, and alternatively display FI alarm
Alarm information and FI warning sign at LCD (EFI system fault).
indicator □Display FI flashing burglar alarm system warning information and sign at LED display after
(LED) opening the electric door lock for 3 seconds (anti-theft control system fault).
□Alarm lamp is off after opening the electric door lock for 3 seconds.
□Starting motor does not run.
□Starting motor is running, but engine is not started.
□Starting motor and engine are not started.
Difficulty in □Be unable to supply fuel (□there is no fuel in fuel tank, □there is no the sound that fuel pump is
starting running).
□Submerge cylinder (do not open throttle valve when starting, to prevent submerging cylinder).
□Ignition cannot be made to spark plug.
□Others;
□Engine stalls after starting.
□Engine stalls after opening the throttle.
□Engine stalls after closing the throttle.
Stalling of
□Engine stalls when moving motorcycle.
engine
□Engine stalls when stopping motorcycle.
□Engine stalls when driving at constant speed.
□Others:
□Idle speed is very low, □Idle speed is very high, □Idle speed is instable.
□Battery voltage is low (test is after charging).
□Spark plug is loosened (tighten the spark plug).
□Spark plug is very dirty, damaged or the clearance is incorrect (correct it).
□Tempering.
Improper
□Blowout.
running at
□It is blocked when speeding up.
low speed
□Oil viscosity is too high.
□Brake drags.
□Engine is overheated.
□Clutch slips.
□Others
□Spark plug is loosened (tighten the spark plug).
□Spark plug is very dirty, damaged or the clearance is incorrect (correct it).
□Spark plug model is incorrect (replace it).
□Detonation (poor or incorrect oil, replace it with high octane gasoline).
Insufficient
□Brake drags.
power of
□Clutch slips.
acceleration
□Engine is overheated.
□Too much oil.
□Oil viscosity is too high.
□Others:
- 192 -
Chapter IV Engine
Contents
Main Parameters of Engine ....................................................................................................................... - 197 -

Lubrication System .................................................................................................................................... - 198 -
Diagram of Lubrication System......................................................................................................... - 198 -
Position of Fuel pump ........................................................................................................................ - 200 -
Torque Value .............................................................................................................................. - 203 -
Special Tools ...................................................................................................................................... - 204 -
Oil level is too low ..................................................................................................................... - 205 -
Oil pressure is low ..................................................................................................................... - 205 -
There is no oil pressure .............................................................................................................. - 205 -
Oil pressure is high .................................................................................................................... - 205 -
Oil is polluted ............................................................................................................................ - 205 -
Oil is emulsified ......................................................................................................................... - 205 -
Checking Fuel pump .......................................................................................................................... - 206 -
Cylinder Head / Distribution ..................................................................................................................... - 207 -
Exploded View of Cylinder Head / Distribution ................................................................................ - 207 -
Torque Value .............................................................................................................................. - 208 -
Fault Diagnosis .................................................................................................................................. - 209 -
The sound of cylinder head is abnormal .................................................................................... - 209 -
Compression pressure is too high .............................................................................................. - 209 -
Special Tools ...................................................................................................................................... - 210 -
Cylinder Head .................................................................................................................................... - 211 -
Disassembling Cylinder Head ................................................................................................... - 211 -
Checking Cylinder Head............................................................................................................ - 214 -
Replacing Valve Guide .............................................................................................................. - 216 -
Finishing Valve Seat Ring.......................................................................................................... - 218 -
Cylinder Block / Piston.............................................................................................................................. - 221 -
Exploded View of Cylinder Block / Piston ........................................................................................ - 221 -
Exploded View of Crankshaft ............................................................................................................ - 222 -
Torque Value .............................................................................................................................. - 224 -
- 193 -
Fault Diagnosis .................................................................................................................................. - 225 -
Compression pressure is high .................................................................................................... - 225 -
Exhaust pipe is emitting white smoke ....................................................................................... - 225 -
The sound of piston is abnormal ................................................................................................ - 225 -
Special Tools ...................................................................................................................................... - 226 -
Cylinder Block ................................................................................................................................... - 228 -
Disassembling ............................................................................................................................ - 228 -
Check ......................................................................................................................................... - 228 -
Piston ................................................................................................................................................. - 228 -
Disassembling ............................................................................................................................ - 228 -
Check ......................................................................................................................................... - 229 -
Installation ................................................................................................................................. - 231 -
Installation of Cylinder Block.................................................................................................... - 232 -
Crankshaft.......................................................................................................................................... - 232 -
Check ......................................................................................................................................... - 232 -
Sub-assembly of Crankcase ....................................................................................................................... - 234 -
Exploded View of Crankcase ............................................................................................................. - 234 -
Dismounting and Mounting Diagram of Crankcase Bearing............................................................. - 235 -
Overview.................................................................................................................................... - 236 -
Torque Value .............................................................................................................................. - 236 -
Crankcase........................................................................................................................................... - 237 -
Disassembling Crankcase .......................................................................................................... - 237 -
Checking Crankcase .................................................................................................................. - 237 -
Assembling Crankcase............................................................................................................... - 239 -
Clutch......................................................................................................................................................... - 241 -
Exploded View of Left Cover ............................................................................................................ - 241 -
Exploded View of Clutch ................................................................................................................... - 242 -
Torque Value .............................................................................................................................. - 244 -
Special Tools ...................................................................................................................................... - 245 -
Clutch lever is too hard to pull................................................................................................... - 246 -
Clutch is slipping when accelerating ......................................................................................... - 246 -
Clutch does not disengage or clutch disengages suddenly during the running of motorcycle ... - 246 -
Right Cover........................................................................................................................................ - 247 -
Disassembing Right Cover ........................................................................................................ - 247 -
Assembling Right Cover ............................................................................................................ - 247 -
Clutch................................................................................................................................................. - 248 -
Disassembling Clutch ................................................................................................................ - 248 -
Assembling Clutch..................................................................................................................... - 249 -
Check ......................................................................................................................................... - 250 -
- 194-
Subassembly of Cylinder Head Cover ....................................................................................................... - 252 -
Exploded View of Cylinder Head Cover ........................................................................................... - 252 -
Overview ........................................................................................................................................... - 253 -
Torque Valve .............................................................................................................................. - 253 -
Cylinder Head Cover ......................................................................................................................... - 253 -
Disassembling Cylinder Head Cover ......................................................................................... - 253 -
Checking Cylinder Head Cover ................................................................................................. - 254 -
Installing Cylinder Head Cover ................................................................................................. - 254 -
Kickstarter Component .............................................................................................................................. - 255 -
Exploded View of Kickstarter Component ........................................................................................ - 255 -
Overview.................................................................................................................................... - 256 -
Torque Value .............................................................................................................................. - 256 -
Kickstarter Mechnism ........................................................................................................................ - 256 -
Disassembling Kickstarter Mechanism...................................................................................... - 256 -
Installing Kickstarter Mechanism .............................................................................................. - 257 -
Gearshift Mechanism ................................................................................................................................. - 258 -
Exploded View of Gearshift Mechanism ........................................................................................... - 258 -
Torque Value .............................................................................................................................. - 259 -
It is difficult to shift gears .......................................................................................................... - 259 -
Shift pedal is not returned .......................................................................................................... - 259 -
Gearshift Mechanism ......................................................................................................................... - 260 -
Disassembling gearshift mechanism .......................................................................................... - 260 -
Checking Gearshift Mechanism................................................................................................. - 261 -
Installing Gearshift Mechanism ................................................................................................. - 261 -
Drive System ............................................................................................................................................. - 262 -
Exploded View of Drive System........................................................................................................ - 262 -
Drive system trips over stop or is out of gear ............................................................................ - 264 -
The noise of engine is too large ................................................................................................. - 264 -
Primary Shaft Component ................................................................................................................. - 265 -
Auxiliary Shaft Component ............................................................................................................... - 265 -
Check ................................................................................................................................................. - 266 -
Installing Drive System ..................................................................................................................... - 268 -
Assembling Primary Shaft Component and Aauxiliary Shaft Component ................................ - 268 -
Installng Drive System............................................................................................................... - 269 -
Starter Mechanism ..................................................................................................................................... - 271 -
Exploded View of Starter Mechanism ............................................................................................... - 271 -
Torque Value .............................................................................................................................. - 272 -
- 195 -
Engine cannot start .................................................................................................................... - 272 -
Starter Mechanism ............................................................................................................................. - 273 -
Disassembling Starter Mechanism ............................................................................................. - 273 -
Installing Starter Mechanism ..................................................................................................... - 275 -
- 196 -
Main Parameters of Engine
Main parameters of engine
China European Standard
Engine type Four stroke, single cylinder, four valves, double spark plugs
Cooling method Air-cooled
Cylinder diameter stroke 54×58.8mm 54×54.5mm
Displacement 134.6 ml 125ml
Compression ratio 9.8
Maximum net power / 9.3Kw/9000 r/min 8.2kw/9500rpm
corresponding speed
Maximum torque / 10.3 N•m /7000 r/min 10Nm/7000rpm
corresponding speed
Injection type Electronic fuel injection
Start method Electrical starting
Idle speed 1500r/min
Spark plug model A7RC
Maximum lift range of Maximum lift range 6.2mm
intake/exhaust valves, Intake valve Opening angle 259°
opening and closing Closing angle 574°
angle with respect to the Maximum lift range 6.1mm
dead point, and valve Exhaust valve Opening angle 146°
clearance Closing angle 364°
Lubrication method Splash lubrication
Amount of oil added 1.1L
- 197 -
Lubrication System
Diagram of Lubrication System
① Rocker
② Rocker shaft
③ Camshaft
④ Crankshaft
⑤ Oil filter
⑥ Fuel pump
⑦ Primary oil filter
- 198 -
①Camshaft
②Piston
③Oil jet
④Crankshaft
⑤Clutch
- 199 -
Position of Fuel pump
- 200 -
Expoloded drawing of fuel pump components
- 201 -
Preparation Information
Conventional Information
Note
If the used engine oil is stuck to the skin for a long time,
skin cancer may be caused. Although it is unlikely the waste
oil will be disposed of every day, wash the hands thoroughly
with soap as soon as possible after disposing waste oil.
●Function of lubricating system:
The function of the lubricating system of engine is to
provide lubricant to the friction surface of workpiece to
make the dry surface friction become into the liquid friction
between lubricant particles so as to reduce the wear of parts;
cool the parts with high heat loads; absorb the impacts of
bearing and other parts and reduce noise; increase the
sealability between the piston ring and cylinder wall; clean
and remove the impurities on the surfaces of parts.
●Fuel pump can be used only when it is installed in the case of
engine.
●The service contents in this section must be performed after
engine oil is drained.
●When removing and installing the fuel pump, prevent dust and
dirt from entering the engine.
●If the wear of any parts of fuel pump wear exceeds the use
range, the fuel pump needs to be replaced.
● After installing the fuel pump, check whether the fuel pump is
leaking and the oil pressure is correct.
- 202 -
When replacing oil 1L ＿
Oil capacity
When disassembling 1.1L ＿
Radial clearance between internal
0.005-0.095 0.15
and external rotors
Fuel pump rotor Clearance between external rotor
0.11-0.163 0.24
and pump body
Clearance of end face of rotor 0.07-0.12 0.15
Torque Value
Mounting screw of fuel pump 10N•m
Mounting screw of fuel pump base 5N•m Apply locking agent
- 203 -
Special Tools
Oil pressure gauge Connector of oil pressuer gauge
- 204 -
Troubleshooting
Oil level is too low
 Oil consumption
 External leakage
 Piston ring is worn
 Improper installation of piston ring
 Cylinder body is worn
 Valve seal is worn
 Valve guide is worn
Oil pressure is low
 Oil level is low
 Oil filter is blocked
 Fuel pump is leaking
 Waste oil is used
There is no oil pressure
 Oil level is low
 Fuel pump gear is damaged
 Fuel pump gear or gear wheel of clutch is
damaged
 Fuel pump is damaged
 Fuel pump is leaking
Oil pressure is high
 Oil filter is blocked
 Waste oil is used
Oil is polluted
 Oil filter is not changed often
 Piston ring is worn
Oil is emulsified
 Cylinder head gasket is leaking
 Coolant is leaking
 There is water in the engine
- 205 -
Checking Fuel pump
●Remove the fuel pump base and disassemble fuel
pump.
●Check the radial clearance of internal and external

rotors. Test gauge
○Allowable limit: 0.15mm。
●Check the clearance between external rotor and fuel

Test gauge
pump base.
●Check the end clearance of rotor.

○Allowable limit: 0.15mm。 Flat plate
Test gauge
- 206 -
Cylinder Head / Distribution
Exploded View of Cylinder Head / Distribution
- 207 -
●Function of Cylinder Head:
Cylinder head is used to seal the cylinder and it
forms a combustion chamber with the piston to
withstand the high temperature and high pressure gas.
And it can also complete the intake and exhaust
through the valve mechanism.
●Operation Precautions:
In order to ensure the sealing of cylinder head and
upper box, the cylinder head withstands great bolt
locking force. Pre-tightening force: 12 N·m, locking
force: 19-23 N·m.
Before the inspection and measurement, all parts
shall be cleaned and blown with high-pressure air.
Table of standard value and allowable limit of benchmark items Unit: mm
Planeness of cylinder head 0.05 0.05
Inlet 0.08-0.1 ＿
Valve clearance:
Outlet 0.08-0.1 ＿
Inlet 4.48-4.49 4.45
Outer diameter of valve stem:
Outlet 4.465-4.475 4.44
Valve Inlet 4.5-4.512 4.55
Inner diameter of valve guide:
valve guide Outlet 4.5-4.512 4.54
Clearance between valve stem Inlet 0.01-0.032 0.1
and valve guide Outlet 0.025-0.047 0.1
Inlet 1-1.2 1.5
Width of valve seat:
Outlet 1-1.2 1.5
Inlet 38.5 37.7
Valve spring Free length
Outlet 38.5 37.7
Inlet 29.5626 29.5426
Camshaft Height of camshaft
Outlet 29.5576 29.5376
Torque Value
Cylinder head screw 19-23N•m
Stud bolt of air inlet duct 10-12N•m
Stud bolt at exhaust side 10-12N•m
Bolt at sprocket cavity 10-12N•m
Spark plug 12-15N•m
Sprocket bolt 20-24N•m
- 208 -
Fault Diagnosis
Compression pressure is low
Valve clearance is not adjusted properly
Valve burns out or is bent
The airtightness of valve seat is not poor
The gasket of cylinder head is leaking
The spark plug is not installed properly
The sound of cylinder head is abnormal
Valve clearance is not adjusted properly
Valve spring is damaged
Compression pressure is too high
Excessive carbon deposition in the combustion chamber
- 209 -
Special Tools
Feeler gauge Callipers
Micrometer Run-out gauge
Valve spring compressor Valve reamer
Spark plug socket wrench
- 210 -
Cylinder Head
Disassembling Cylinder Head
●Measure valve clearance with feeler gauge
○Standard of valve clearance:
Intake valve clearance: 0.08-0.1mm
Exhaust valve clearance: 0.08-0.1mm
★If there is a difference between the measured actual
valve clearance and the standard valve clearance, the
actual measured data can be compared with the
standard clearance and the valve adjusting screw can be
adjusted to achieve the standard valve clearance
●Remove the retainer at the auxiliary spark plug using

a circlip pliers.
●Remove the auxiliary spark plug using a straight
screwdriver.
●Screw out the auxiliary spark plug using a spark plug

socket.
●Observe whether the spark plug gasket is clean.
★If the organic oil burns out, the airtightness is poor,
and O ring below the spark plug needs to be replaced.
- 211 -
●Loosen the clamp bolts and remove tensioner
components.
●Loosen the camshaft sprocket bolts. Remove the

camshaft sprocket, chain, shaft end stop, shaft sleeve.
●Loosen the cylinder bolts and bolts at sprocket cavity

side, and remove the oil deflector.
- 212 -
●Remove the cylinder head components.
●Remove the rocker shaft with M5 screws and remove

the rocker.
●Measure the diemensions of rocker shaft using a

micrometer.
○ Allowable limit of dimensions of rocker shaft: 7.94
●Remove the spring with circlip pliers and remove the

camshaft components.
- 213 -
●Measure the height of camshaft [a] with a micrometer.
○Allowable limit: Height of exhaust camshaft: 29.5376
mm
Height of intake camshaft: 29.5426 mm
●Compress the valve spring with valve spring

compression tool and remove valve cotter.
●Disassemble:
Valve upper spring seat [1]
Valve spring [2]
Valve[3]
Valve cottter [4]
Valve lower spring seat [5]
Checking Cylinder Head

●Clear the carbon deposits on the cylinder head.
●Measure the flatness of the cylinder head joint
surface.
★When the flatness of the cylinder head joint surface
exceeds the use limit, place a fine sandpaper on the flat
plate, make the cylinder head joint surface fit the
sandpaper and sand the surface in 8 shape.
- 214 -
●Measure the free length of intake / exhaust spring of
valve [a].
○Allowable limit: Intake spring: 37.7mm.
Exhaust spring: 37.7mm.
●Measure the gradient of intake / exhaust spring of

valve [a].
○Allowable limit: 1.6mm
●Measure the run-out of valve stem.

○Allowable limit: 0.04 mm
●Measure the outer diameter of valve stem.

○Allowable limit: Intake valve: 4.45mm
Exhaust valve: 4.44mm
- 215 -
●Check the valve guide and remove the carbon deposits
in the valve guide with a reamer before check.
Note Valve reamer
Rotate the reamer clockwise and do not rotate
the reamer counterclockwise.
●Allowable limit: Measure the inner diameter of valve

guide [a]. Allowable limit:
○Intake valve：4.55mm，
○Exhaust valve：4.54mm。
●Allowable limit of clearance between valve and valve
guide:
○Intake valve：0.1mm。
○Exhaust valve：0.1mm。
Replacing Valve Guide
Note:
If the clearance between valve and valve guide
exceeds the limit, replace the valve guide. After the
valve guide is replaced, the valve seat ring surface
must be finished.
●Put the valve guide in the freezing cavity of
refrigerator to cool it for an hour.
●Use the electric furnace or oven to heat the cylinder
head to 100-150℃.
- 216 -
●Fix the cylinder head and remove the valve guide
from the upper side of cylinder head with the valve
guide disassembly tool [1].
●Put a new O-ring on the new valve guide.

●Install the valve guide from the top of cylinder head.
○Install new valve guide using valve guide mounting
tool [2] and guide using valve guide remover [1].
Note:
Do not damage the cylinder head when installing the
valve guide.
- 217 -
●After the valve guide is embedded, carry out the
finishing by using the valve guide reamer.
Note
Add an appropriate amount of cutting oil during
cutting with a reamer. The reamer shall be rotated
clockwise.
●Clean the carbon deposits in the combustion chamber

and valve, and thoroughly rinse the intake and exhaust
valves.
● Check the width of valve seat contact surface (width
of valve seat ring).
○Allowable limit: intake: 1.5mm
Exhaust 1.4mm
Valve seat contact

surface
Finishing Valve Seat Ring

●Use a 45°cutter to remove the rough or uneven parts
on the surface of valve seat ring.
Rough position
Note
Apply a layer of transparent or Prussia blue coating
to the valve seat ring, so that it can be seen more
clearly.
- 218 -
●Remove 1/4 of outer end of valve seat ring with a 25°
cutter.
●Remove 1/4 of bottom of valve seat ring with a 60°

cutter. Take the cutter and check the positions which
have been disposed.
●Grind the valve seat ring with a 45° finishing cutter

to reach an appropriate width.
○Make sure to remove all dents and uneven parts.
○Standard valve seat ring width: intake: 1mm-1.2mm

Exhaust: 1mm-1.2mm
●If the contacted position is in the too high part of

valve, please lower the valve seat ring with a 25° flat
cutter. The contact
●If the contacted position is in the too low part of surface is high
valve, raise the valve seat ring with a 60° internal
cutter.
●Use the 45° finishing cutter to finish the valve seat The contact
surface is low
ring again to make it meet the required specification.
●After the valve seat ring is grinded, apply polish to
the valve surface and gently polish the valve.
Installation
- 219 -
●Installation shall be carried out in the order contrary
to the disassembly order.
Precautions for Installation of Valve:
●When the valve is installed, apply appropriate amount New
of engine oil to the surface of the valve stem and then product
install the valve stem into the valve guide.
Valve spring retainer①
Valve oil seal②
Valve③
Valve spring④
Spring plate⑤
Note:
Before installation, check whether there are burrs at
the end of the valve. If there are burrs at the end of
the valve, polish the end of the valve stem with an
oilstone.
●When installing the valve spring, install the end of
spring with smaller pitch toward the combustion
chamber.
●Use the valve spring compression tool ② when

installing the valve lock clip ①.
●Knock the valve lock plate gently with a soft hammer

to fix it on the valve stem.
Note:
Do not knock the valve lock plate overly to avoid
damaging the valve.
- 220 -
Cylinder Block / Piston
Exploded View of Cylinder Block / Piston
- 221 -
Exploded View of Crankshaft
- 222 -
●Operation Precaution:
All parts shall be cleaned and blown with
high-pressure air before inspection and measurement.
- 223 -
Table of standard value and allowable limit of benchmark items Unit: mm
Item Standard value Use limit
Inner diameter 54~54.01 54.11
Cylindricity 0.005 0.05
Cylinder
Roundness 0.004 0.05
Planeness 0.02 0.05
53.975~53.985
Outer diameter of piston (measurement
(7mm at the bottom of piston 53.9
point)
skirt)
Inner diameter of piston pin hole 14.002-14.008 14.04
Outer diameter of piston pin 13.994-13.997 13.96
Clearance between piston and piston pin 0.005-0.014 0.07
Piston and
Clearance First ring 0.02-0.06 0.09
piston ring
between piston
ring and ring Second ring 0.02-0.06 0.09
groove:
First ring 0.10-0.25 0.5
Piston ring joint
Second ring 0.3-0.45 0.8
clearance
Oil ring 0.20-0.60 ＿
Inner diameter of connecting rod small
Connecting 14.010-14.018 14.05
end
rod small
Clearance between connecting rod and
end 0.013-0.024 0.10
piston pin
Lateral clearance of big end of
0.1-0.35 0.55
connecting rod
Crankshaft
Radial clearance of big end of
components 0.006-0.018 0.05
connecting rod
Run-out 0.03 0.1
Torque Value
Mounting bolt of secondary 6~8N•m
inlet duct of cylinder block
Crankshaft nut 70~80N•m
- 224 -
Fault Diagnosis
Compression pressure is low
●Wear, burning loss or damage of piston
●Wear or damage of cylinder and piston
●Damage of gasket and leakage between crankcase and gas
Compression pressure is high
●Too many carbon deposition in the combustion chamber
Exhaust pipe is emitting white smoke
●Wear and damage of piston ring
●Wear or damage of piston and cylinder
The sound of piston is abnormal
●Damage of cylinder, piston and piston ring
●Wear of piston pin hole and piston pin
- 225 -
Special Tools
Feeler gauge Callipers
Micrometer Run-out gauge
Piston ring opening pliers Piston pin pulling-off device
① Opening pliers ②
Piston
- 226 -
Cylinder diameter tester
- 227 -
Cylinder Block
Disassembling
●Remove the cylinder block
Cylinder block
Check
●Check the wear situation of inner wall of cylinder.
★If the wear is serious, please replace it.
●Remove gasket and dowel pin.
Gasket
Dowel pin
Piston
Disassembling
●Remove the piston pin retainer.
Note
During disassembly, do not drop the retainer into the
crankcase.
●Take out the piston pin and remove piston.
Pston pin retainer, piston pin
- 228 -
●Remove the piston ring.
○Check the piston, piston pin and piston ring.
Note:
Do not break or damage the piston ring.
○Clear the carbon deposits inside the piston ring
groove.
Check
●Install the piston ring. Piston
○Measure the clearance between piston ring and piston
ring groove. Test gauge
○Allowable limit: top ring: 0.09mm.

Second ring: 0.09mm. Push
Piston ring
●Remove the piston ring and install the piston rings at

the bottom of cylinder.
Note:
Press the piston ring in the cylinder by using the
piston head.
Test gauge
○Measure the piston ring joint clearance
○Allowable limit: First ring: 0.5mm Piston ring
Second ring: 0.8mm.
●Measure the inner diameter of piston pin hole.

○Allowable limit: 14.04mm.
Test gauge
- 229 -
●Measure the outer diameter of piston pin.
○Allowable limit: 13.96mm 。 Allowable limit:
13.96mm.
●Clearance between piston pin hole and piston pin.
●Measure the outer diameter of piston.

Note
The measurement position forms an angle of 90
degrees with the piston pin and it is 7mm below the
piston skirt part.
●Check the damage and wear on the inner wall of

cylinder.
Inside micrometer
Note:
Measure the inner diameter of cylinder in the
upper, middle and lower positions in the direction
which forms a right angle (90 degrees) with the
piston pin.
○Allowable limit: 54.11mm 。 Allowable limit:
54.11mm .
●Measure the clearance between cylinder and piston

and be subject, whichever is the greater
- 230 -
●Measure the roundness of inner wall of cylinder (inner
diameter difference between X and Y directions).
○ Allowable limit: 0.05mm.
Upper
●Measure the cylindricity of inner wall of cylinder
(inner diameter difference between X and Y directions
Middle
in upper, middle and lower positions).
Lower
●Check the planeness of cylinder surface.

Ruler
Feeler gauge
Cylinder
●Measure the inner diameter [A] of connecting rod Inner diameter of small end of
small end. connecting rod
Installation
●Install piston ring.
○Apply oil to the piston ring and piston evenly, make
Top ring
the piston ring mark side up and install it properly.
Note Second ring
Do not scratch the piston and do not break the piston
ring.
Oil ring
After the piston ring is installed, it can rotate freely
in the piston ring groove.
- 231 -
○Scale the washers attached to the crankcase. “IN” mark
Note
Foreign matters shall not fall into the crankcase.
●Install the piston, piston pin and piston pin retainer.
Note
Install the piston into the intake valve according to
the “IN” mark at the top.
Installation of Cylinder Block

●Install the gasket and dowel pin on the crankcase.
Dowel pin
●Apply oil to the cylinder inwall, piston and piston

ring.
●Install the piston ring into the cylinder carefully.
Note:
Do not damage the piston ring.
Gasket
Crankshaft
Check
●Measure the lateral clearance of big end of
connecting rod. Feeler gauge
●Measure the clearance of big end of connecting rod

in X-Y direction.
- 232 -
●Measure the run-out of crankshaft.
Measuring point
●Check whether the crankshaft bearing rotates with

abnormal noise or whether it is loose.
★If there is abnormal noise or it is loose, replace the
crankshaft assembly.
Crankshaft bearing
- 233 -
Sub-assembly of Crankcase
Exploded View of Crankcase
- 234 -
Dismounting and Mounting Diagram of Crankcase Bearing
Torque
No. Chinese name and specifications Remark
N·m kgf·m
1 Oil seal Apply oil
2 Needle bearing HK1010 Apply lubricating grease
3 Rolling bearing 6203 Apply oil
4 Needle bearing Apply lubricating grease
5 Needle bearing HK1212B Apply lubricating grease
6 Rolling bearing 6203 Apply oil
7 Needle bearing Apply lubricating grease
Torque value
Retainer screw 7N•m Apply locking agent
Note
1. The bearing disassembled cannot be reused and
should be replaced with a new one;
2. Bearings and oil seals should be disassembled by
using special tools, to prevent damaging the
crankcase body;
3. When installing new bearing and oil seal, apply oil
or lubricating grease with the specifications shown
in the figure.
- 235 -
Overview
The crankcase is a thin-wall casting and shall be
protected against impact during operation to avoid
deformation or damage.
All parts should be rinsed and cleaned by using
high-pressure air before inspection and measurement.
The lubricant in the crankcase should be discharged
before operation.
This section mainly introduces the disassembly
and installation of parts of crankcase, torque value of
bolt specifications, notes for disassembly and
installation and other services;
Torque Value
Assembling bolt 10 N•m Apply oil
Main chain guide screw 10 N•m Apply locking agent
Gear position sensor 10 N•m Apply oil
Oil filter screw plug 20 N•m Apply oil
Retainer screw 7 N•m Apply oil
- 236 -
Crankcase
Disassembling Crankcase
●Steps for opening crankcase:
○Components of right crankcase①
a. Remove assembling bolt of crankcase
Note:
For the crankcase assembling bolt marked as
shown in the figure, first loosen 1/4 of the
engagement length and then completely loosen
assembling bolt later in the staggered mode;
○Components of left crankcase②

b. Open the components of right crankcase
Note:
Insert a screwdriver to the disassembling point
in the box, and then carefully open the upper and
lower boxes;
Tap the side of box using a soft hammer, only
tap the reinforced part of box but not the processing
surface of box, tap it carefully and slowly, to ensure
that the upper and lower boxes are evenly separated;
c．Remove the dowel pin;

Checking Crankcase
Note:
1. Clean the disassembled crankcase parts with
detergent;
2. Clean the disassembling surface of crankcase and
the joint surface of left and right covers;
3. The crankcase is a thin-walled casting. Heavy
impact should be avoided during the operation to
prevent deformation or breakage.
4. Before operation, the lubricant in the crankcase
should be released.
Inspection item
- 237 -
●Check the crankshaft for defects such as cracks.
★If there is any defect, replace crankshaft components.
●Check the oil fitler for clogging and damage.

★If there is any defect, replace oil filter.
●Timing chain inspection

○Visually inspect the chain for wear, and feel whether
the chain cannot rotate flexibly with two hands.
★If there is any defect, replace the timing chain, and
meanwhile readjust the initial position of tensioner of
main chain guide.
- 238 -
●Crankcase bearing inspection
○Rotate the inner ring of bearing with your fingers to
check whether the bearing cannot rotate flexibly and is
blocked.
★If necessary, replace the new bearing with special
tools.
●Oil seal inspection

○ Check the seal lip for damage or deformation, and
whether there is any edge cut deformation in the outer
ring.
★ If necessary, replace the oil seal with special tools.
Assembling Crankcase
Note
●Clean the parts, apply oil or grease with the specified
specifications evenly on the seal of bearing to be
replaced for future use.
Crankcase assembly
Precautions
● Clean the parts, replace the bearing, and grease the
oil or grease according to the specifications.
● Bearing, bearing plate:
Note:
The bearing side of the bearing plate is toward the
bearing pressure surface and the tightening torque of
the platen bolt (7N•m) is guaranteed.
The
● Clean the box surface and the remaining surfaces
●Bearing, retainer of bearing:

Note:
The round edge side of retainer of bearing
faces the pressing surface of bearing, and the
tightening torque of retainer bolt should be ensured
- 239 -
(7N•m).
●Clean the assembling surface and other joint surfaces.
●Apply sealant at the assembling surface:

Note:
Apply sealant around the bolt hole evenly, and
prevent sealant going into the lubricating oil
passage of crankcase.
●After the internal parts of left crankcase are

assembled, assemble the right crankcase to left
crankcase, and slightly knock the crankcase with a soft
hammer;
●Bolts for assembling crankcase

Note:
Tighten the assembling bolt on the left
crankcase, the tightening torque of which should
meet the requirements (10N•m);
Then tighten the assembling bolt on the
right crankcase, the tightening torque of which
should meet the requirements (10N•m);
- 240 -
Clutch
Exploded View of Left Cover
- 241 -
Exploded View of Clutch
- 242 -
Conventional Information
Install the engine on the frame, and disassemble
right cover and clutch.
Engine oil viscosity and oil level may affect clutch
separation. When the clutch is not separated or unclear,
check the engine oil level before repairing the clutch
system.
- 243 -
Item Standard Operating limit
Free corner of clutch operating lever 10°-20° —
Free length of clutch spring 35.5 34.2
Thickness of clutch friction 2.9-3.0 2.6
Wraping of clutch metal plate — 0.3
Inner diameter of clutch bushing 17-17.018 17.028
Outer diameter of clutch bushing 22.967-22.98 22.957
Torque Value
Clutch lock nut 50N•m Apply oil to threads
Clutch spring bolt 10N•m
Right cover mounting bolt 12N•m
Oil filter mounting bolt 12N•m
Mounting bolt at 9N•m
shock-insulation rubber retainer
of right cover
- 244 -
Special Tools
Central pivot universal fixer of clutch
- 245 -
Troubleshooting
Clutch lever is too hard to pull
·The detaching mechanism of clutch is damaged
·The detaching bearing of clutch fails
·The push rod of clutch is not installed properly
Clutch is slipping when accelerating
·The friction plate of clutch is worn
·The clutch spring is not elastic enough
·Engine oil is mixed with molybdenum or graphite additives
Clutch does not disengage or clutch disengages suddenly during the running of motorcycle
·Clutch plate is wrapping
·Clutch lock nut is loosened
·The oil level is too high
·Oil viscosity is poor
·The detaching mechanism of clutch is damaged
·The push rod of clutch is not installed properly
- 246 -
Right Cover
Disassembing Right Cover
●Loosen the clamp bolt of foot lever and remove foot
Foot lever
lever.
●Loosen the clamp bolt and remove the right cover.
Right cover
Clamp bolt
● Remove the clutch push rod head and release bearing. Clutch cable
● Remove the clutch release lever component, clutch holder
cable holder and other parts from the right cover.
Release lever
component
Right
cover
Assembling Right Cover

●Assemble the right cover in the reverse order of
disassembly.
- 247 -
Clutch
Disassembling Clutch
●Fix the clutch central pivot using a dedicated clutch
Clutch spring mounting
central pivot universal fixer, and loosen the clutch lock bolt
nut. Clutch lock nut
● Remove the clutch lock nut and butterfly washer.
Clutch
●Loosen the clutch spring mounting bolts and remove
the clutch spring cover plate and clutch spring.
●Remove the central pivot of clutch.
Clutch central pivot

plate
Clutch spring cover

plate
●Remove the clutch friction plate and clutch metal

Clutch friction
plate. plate
●Remove the clutch central pivot retainer and washer.
Washer
Clutch central pivot

retainer
- 248 -
●Remove the clutch external plate component.
Clutch external plate
component
●Remove clutch bushing and washer. Clutch bushing
Washer
Assembling Clutch
●Assemble the clutch in the reverse order of
disassembly.
- 249 -
Check
●Check the outer groove of clutch for any burrs or
broken marks.
★If necessary, finish it using a file, and replace it if the
amount of finishing is too large.
● Check the tooth forms of clutch central pivot plate

and retainer for damage.
★ If there is damage, replaced it.
● Measure the free length of pressure spring.

○Allowable limit: Replace it if its length is less than
34.2mm.
Free length
● Measure the thickness of friction plate with a vernier

calipers. Thickness
○ Allowable limit: Replace it if its thickness is less than
2.6mm.
- 250 -
●Check the flatness of clutch metal plate with a feeler
gauge.
○Allowable limit: Replace it if its flatness is more than
0.3mm.
- 251 -
Subassembly of Cylinder Head Cover
Exploded View of Cylinder Head Cover
- 252 -
Overview
This section includes the services of cylinder head
cover component, cylinder head cover gasket and bolts.
When removing and storing parts, mark them to
make sure they are reinstalled in their original
positions.
The disassembled parts need to be cleaned.
When removing the cylinder head cover, be
careful not to damage the matching cylinder head joint
surface.
Cylinder cover fixing bolt 12N•m
Cylinder head cover
Remove cylinder head cover
● Remove the four bolts securing the cylinder
head cover in turn and remove the cylinder head cover
assembly from the engine
Torque Valve
Mounting bolt of cylinder 12N•m
head cover
Cylinder Head Cover
Disassembling Cylinder Head Cover
●Remove the four bolts used for fixing cylinder head
cover in turn, and remove the cylinder head cover
component from the engine.
- 253 -
●Remove the gasket of cylinder head cover.
Checking Cylinder Head Cover

●Check cylinder head cover
★If it is seriously worn, replace it.
Installing Cylinder Head Cover

●Install the cylinder head cover in the reverse order of
disassembly.
○When cylinder head cover is removed and reinstalled
every time, the gasket of cylinder head cover must be
replaced with a new one.
○When installing, ensure that the gasket is installed in
the gasket groove, and that the gasket groove and the
cylinder head mounting surface should be cleaned and
free of debris.
- 254 -
Kickstarter Component
Exploded View of Kickstarter Component
- 255 -
Overview
This section includes the services of kickstarter
lever component and kickstarter component.
When removing and storing parts, mark them to
make sure they are reinstalled in their original
positions.
The disassembled parts need to be cleaned.
When disassembling the kickstarter component, be
careful not to damage the matching 1st Gear of
auxiliary shaft.
Torque Value
Mounting bolt of kickstarter lever 22N•m
and kickstarter component
Kickstarter Mechnism
Disassembling Kickstarter Mechanism
●Loosen M8 bolt using tools to remove kickstarter
lever component.
●Remove kickstarter component from the engine.
- 256 -
●Remove the thrust washer, retainer 16, kickstarter
spring, kickstarter ratchet, washer, retainer 13 and
kickstarter gear component one by one.
Installing Kickstarter Mechanism

●Install kickstarter mechanism in the reverse order of
diassembly.
○Before assembly, all parts need to be cleaned, and oil
should be added to gears and shafts.
- 257 -
Gearshift Mechanism
Exploded View of Gearshift Mechanism
- 258 -
Torque Value
Start wheel bolt 12N•m Apply locking agent
Positioning roller rocker bolt 12N•m
Troubleshooting
It is difficult to shift gears
·Clutch operation is incorrect
· Oil viscosity is incorrect
·Shaft fork is bent
·Shaft fork shaft is bent
·Shaft fork jaw is bent
· Gearshift positioning star wheel is damaged
·Positioning roller rocker bolt is loosened
· Positioning roller rocker is damaged
· The shift shaft and shift arm are damaged
Shift pedal is not returned
·The return spring of gearshift shaft is damaged or its elasticity is weakened
·Gearshift shaft is bent
- 259 -
Gearshift Mechanism
Disassembling gearshift mechanism
●Disassemble the following parts in order:
○ Positioning roller rocker bolt Positioning roller rocker bolt
○ Positioning roller rocker Positioning roller rocker
○ Rocker spring
Rocker
spring
●Disassemble
Gearshift pin I
○Star wheel bolt
○Gearshift start wheel
○Gearshift pin I
Star wheel bolt

Gearshift start
wheel
●Pull out the gearshift arm component
Gearshift arm
- 260 -
Checking Gearshift Mechanism
●Check the gear lever for bending, wear and damage
●Check if there is any damage to the spring of the shift
lever and the elasticity is weakened. Replace if
necessary.
Gearshift spring
Gearshift
Installing Gearshift Mechanism

●Tighten the start wheel bolt after assembling
Gearshift pin I
gearshift start wheel.
○Tightening torque: 12N•m; apply locking agent at the
threads.
Star wheel bolt
Gearshift start
wheel
●Align the rocker spring head with the notch on the

positioning roller rocker and tighten the positioning Positioning roller rocker
bolt
roller rocker bolt.
Positioning roller rocker
○ Tightening torque: 10N•m.
Rocker
spring
- 261 -
Drive System
Exploded View of Drive System
- 262 -
Specifications Unit: mm
Item Standard value Limit value
Inner diameter 10～10.022 10.03
Shift fork
Thickness of claw 4.9～5 4.87
Shift fork shaft Outer diameter 9.965～9.980 9.96
M4、M5 17.016～17.034 17.05
C1 16～16.018 16.03
Inner diameter of gear
C2 20～20.021 20.04
C3 17.016～17.034 17.05
Outer diameter of gear C1 15.973～15.984 15.96
bushing C2 19.967～19.980 19.95
Tolerance clearance C1 0.016～0.045 0.07
between gear and bushing C2 0.02～0.054 0.09
Inner diameter of gear C1 13～13.018 13.03
bushing C2 17～17.018 17.03
Installation
16.979～16.990 16.96
Outer diameter of principal position of M4
Drive system shaft Installation
16.979～16.990 16.96
position of M5
Installation
12.973～12.984 12.96
position of C1
Outer diameter of auxiliary Installation
16.983～16.994 16.95
shaft position of C2
Installation
16.983～16.994 16.95
position of C3
Tolerance clearance C1 0.016～0.045 0.07
between bushing and shaft C2 0.006～0.035 0.08
M4 0.026～0.055 0.09
Tolerance clearance
M5 0.026～0.055 0.09
between gear and shaft
C3 0.022～0.051 0.10
Torque Value
Sprocket mounting bolt 12N•m Apply locking agent
- 263 -
Troubleshooting
Drive system trips over stop or is out of gear
·Positioning roller rocker is damaged
·Positioning roller rocker spring is damaged or its elasticity is weakened
·Positioning roller rocker bolt is loosened
·Shift fork shaft or shift fork is bent or damaged
·Gearshift star wheel is bent or damaged
·Shift fork is bent or damaged
The noise of engine is too large
· The gear of drive system is damaged
· The bearing of drive system is damaged
- 264 -
Primary Shaft Component
Primary shaft /M1(12T)
Auxiliary Shaft Component
- 265 -
Check
●Check the shift fork (applicable to all shift forks)
○Shift fork head ①
○Shift fork claw ②
★Bending, damage, wear → Replace shift fork
●Check shift fork shaft

○Put the shift fork at a plane and roll it back and forth
★Bending → Replace
Warning
Do not try to straighten the bent shift fork shaft
● Check the sliding of shift fork (along the shift fork

shaft)
★The shift fork cannot slide flexibly → Replace the
complete set of shift fork and shift fork shaft
●Check the shift drum

○Travel slot of shift drum
★Damage, scratches and wear → Replace shift drum
component
○Shift drum shaft section
★Bending, wear → Replace shift drum component
- 266 -
●Measure the runout of primary shaft (centering device
and dial indicator are used)
★Exceeded limit dimensions → Replace primary shaft
Limit dimensions of runout of primary shaft:
0.03mm
●Measure the runout of auxiliary shaft (centering

device and dial indicator are used)
★ Exceeded limit dimensions → Replace auxiliary
shaft
Limit dimensions of runout of auxiliary shaft:
0.03mm
●Check
○Gear
★Blueing, pitting corrosion, wear → Replace defective
gears
○Gear pawl
★Cracks, damage, round edges → Replace defective
gears
●Check
○Gear engagement (gear teeth of each gear)
★Incorrect → Reassemble the drive shaft component
●Check
○Gear rotation
★Inflexible rotation → Replace defective parts
●Check
○Retainer
★Bending, damage, looseness → Replace
- 267 -
Installing Drive System
Assembling Primary Shaft Component and Aauxiliary Shaft Component
●Install
○Spline washer ②
○Retainer ①
Note:
Make sure that the sharp edge of retainer ○

A is E A
located on the opposite side from spline washer and
b is located on the spline

the opening of retainer ○ A E A
slot of shaft ○
A c E
●Install
○2nd Gear of primary shaft ①
Note:
Install the 2nd Gear of primary shaft on the primary
shaft ②, and then measure after compaction, as
Aa 77.6～77.8mm
shown in the figure: ○ E A
- 268 -
Installng Drive System
●Install
○Auxiliary shaft component
○Primary shaft component
○Shift drum component
○Shift fork of primary shaft ①
○Shift fork of auxiliary shaft ②
○Shift fork shaft ③
○O ring seal Φ14×Φ1.8 ④
○Oil seal bushing ⑤
○Roller sprocket
○Mounting plate of drive sprocket ⑥
○Sprocket cover plate ⑦
○Auxiliary shaft cover plate ⑧
○Locking washer ⑨
○Bolt 12N•m Apply locking agent
Note
When installing the shift forks of primary shaft and
auxiliary shaft, ensure that the ribbed side of shift
fork is opposite to the right crankcase of engine;
bend the flange ○ a on the locking washer ⑨ to the
A E A
surface of hexagon head of bolt after ensuring that

the bolt of shift fork in the travel slot of shift drum is
tightened.
- 269 -
●Check after installation
○Drive system
★It cannot rotate flexibly → repair
Note:
·Fully apply oil to gears, shafts, bearings and other
parts
·Make sure that the drive system is in a neutral state
when assembling and that all gears can rotate
flexibly
- 270 -
Starter Mechanism
Exploded View of Starter Mechanism
- 271 -
Specifications
Item Stanard value Limit value
Starter gear wheel Outer diameter of shaft section 49.175～49.2 49.1
Torque Value
Left cover monting bolt 12N•m
Left cover plate monting bolt 10N•m
Flywheel lock nut 90N•m
Stator component mounting bolt 10N•m
Trigger head mounting bolt 7N•m
Starter motor mounting bolt 12N•m
Troubleshooting
Engine cannot start
·Overrunning clutch is damaged
· Starter gear wheel or idle gear is damaged
· Starter motor is damaged
- 272 -
Starter Mechanism
Disassembling Starter Mechanism
●Loosen left cover bolt Left cover
Note: Loosen the bolt in a criss-cross form, and loosen mounting bolt
the bolt by 1/4 each time and then remove the left cover
●Remove starter gear wheel and idle gear components, Starter gear Idle gear
wheel
and loosen flywheel lock nut using electric tools,
lock nut
- 273 -
●Pull out the flywheel clutch using three-jaw chuck
components
Flywheel clutch component
●Loosen stator component mounting bolt and trigger

Trigger head mounting
head mounting bolt, and remove the stator component bolt
Stator component
Stator component mounting

bolt
- 274 -
●Loosen the starter motor mounting bolt and take off
Starter motor Starter motor
the starter motor mounting bolt
Installing Starter Mechanism

●Install starter mechanism in the reverse order of
disassembly.
- 275 -
Chapter V Finished Motorcycle
Contents
Wheel / Tire ............................................................................................................................................... - 281 -
Exploded View of Front Wheel / Tire ................................................................................................ - 281 -
Special Tools ...................................................................................................................................... - 285 -
Wheel (Rim) ...................................................................................................................................... - 286 -
Disassembling Front Wheel ....................................................................................................... - 286 -
Installing Front Wheel ............................................................................................................... - 287 -
Disassembling Rear Wheel ........................................................................................................ - 288 -
Installing Rear Wheel ................................................................................................................ - 290 -
Checking Wheels ....................................................................................................................... - 291 -
Checking Wheel Axle ................................................................................................................ - 291 -
Checking Dynamic Balance....................................................................................................... - 292 -
Adjusting Dynamic Balance ...................................................................................................... - 292 -
Disassembling Grip End ............................................................................................................ - 292 -
Installing Grip End .................................................................................................................... - 293 -
Checking / Adjusting Tire Pressure............................................................................................ - 294 -
Checking Tire............................................................................................................................. - 294 -
Disassembling Tire .................................................................................................................... - 295 -
Installing Tire ............................................................................................................................. - 296 -
Hub Bearing ....................................................................................................................................... - 298 -
Disassembling Hub Bearing ...................................................................................................... - 298 -
Installing Hub Bearing ............................................................................................................... - 298 -
Checking Hub Bearing............................................................................................................... - 299 -
Hub Bearing Lubrication ........................................................................................................... - 299 -
Drive Mechanism....................................................................................................................................... - 300 -
Exploded View of Drive Mechanism ................................................................................................ - 300 -
Special Tools ...................................................................................................................................... - 303 -
Drive Chain........................................................................................................................................ - 304 -
Checking / Adjusting Wheel Alignment .................................................................................... - 304 -
Checking the Wear of Drive Chain ............................................................................................ - 304 -
Lubrication of Drive Chain ........................................................................................................ - 304 -
Disassembling Drive Chain ....................................................................................................... - 304 -
Installing Drive Chain................................................................................................................ - 305 -
Sprocket, Shaft Sleeve, Shaft Sleeve Bearing ................................................................................... - 306 -
Disassembling Rear Sprocket .................................................................................................... - 306 -
Installing Rear Sprocket............................................................................................................. - 306 -
Disassembling Shaft Sleeve Bearing ......................................................................................... - 307 -
- 276 -
Checking the Damper of Shaft Sleeve ....................................................................................... - 308 -
Checking the Wear of Sprocket ................................................................................................. - 308 -
Checking the Deformation of Rear Sprocket ............................................................................. - 308 -
Brake.......................................................................................................................................................... - 309 -
Exploded View of Front Brake .......................................................................................................... - 309 -
Exploded View of Rear Brake ........................................................................................................... - 311 -
CBS of Hydraulic Brake .................................................................................................................... - 313 -
Special Tools ...................................................................................................................................... - 317 -
Brake Lever, Brake Pedal .................................................................................................................. - 318 -
Checking the position of brake pedal......................................................................................... - 318 -
Adjusting the Position of Brake Pedal ....................................................................................... - 318 -
Removing the Brake Pedal ........................................................................................................ - 319 -
Installing the Brake Pedal .......................................................................................................... - 319 -
Calipers .............................................................................................................................................. - 321 -
Installing Calipers ...................................................................................................................... - 323 -
Assembling Front Calipers ........................................................................................................ - 323 -
Assembling Rear Calipers ......................................................................................................... - 323 -
Checking the Liquid Seal of Calipers for Damage .................................................................... - 323 -
Checking Dust Seal of the Calipers for Damage ....................................................................... - 324 -
Checking the Calipers Piston and Brake Cylinder for Damage ................................................. - 326 -
Brake pad ........................................................................................................................................... - 327 -
Disassembling Front Brake pad ................................................................................................. - 327 -
Installing Front Brake pad ......................................................................................................... - 328 -
Disassembling RearBrake pad ................................................................................................... - 328 -
Installing Rear Brake Pad .......................................................................................................... - 329 -
Checking the Wear of Brake Pad ............................................................................................... - 329 -
Master Cylinder ................................................................................................................................. - 329 -
Installing Front Master Cylinder................................................................................................ - 330 -
Installing Rear Master Cylinder ................................................................................................. - 331 -
Assembling Master Cylinder ..................................................................................................... - 332 -
Checking Master Cylinder (Visual Check) ................................................................................ - 332 -
Brake Discs ........................................................................................................................................ - 333 -
Disassembling Brake Discs ....................................................................................................... - 333 -
Installing Brake Disc ................................................................................................................. - 333 -
Checking the Wear of Brake Disc .............................................................................................. - 333 -
Checking the Deformation of Brake Disc .................................................................................. - 334 -
Brake Fluid ........................................................................................................................................ - 335 -
Checking the Level of Brake Fluid ............................................................................................ - 335 -
- 277 -
Replacing Brake Fluid ............................................................................................................... - 335 -
Exhausting Air from Brake Pipe ................................................................................................ - 335 -
Brake Hose ........................................................................................................................................ - 337 -
Disassembling / Installing Brake Hose and Brake Pipe ............................................................. - 337 -
Checking Brake Hose and Brake Pipe ....................................................................................... - 337 -
Suspension System .................................................................................................................................... - 338 -
Exploded View of Front Suspension System ..................................................................................... - 338 -
Exploded View of Rear Suspension System ...................................................................................... - 340 -
Special Tools ...................................................................................................................................... - 342 -
Front Shock Absorber ........................................................................................................................ - 343 -
Installing Front Shock Absorber ................................................................................................ - 344 -
Replacing Front Shock Absorber Oil......................................................................................... - 344 -
Checking Inner Pipe and Outer Pipe.......................................................................................... - 350 -
Checking Dust Seal.................................................................................................................... - 350 -
Checking Spring Tension ........................................................................................................... - 350 -
Rear Shock Absorber ......................................................................................................................... - 351 -
Adjusting Spring Pre-tightening Force ...................................................................................... - 351 -
Disassembling Rear Shock Absorber ......................................................................................... - 352 -
Installing Rear Shock Absorber ................................................................................................. - 353 -
Checking Rear Shock Absorber ................................................................................................. - 353 -
Rear Swing Arm ................................................................................................................................ - 354 -
Disassembling Swing Arm......................................................................................................... - 354 -
Installing Swing Arm ................................................................................................................. - 354 -
Disassembling Swing Arm Bushing .......................................................................................... - 355 -
Checking Damper ...................................................................................................................... - 355 -
Control System .......................................................................................................................................... - 356 -
Exploded View of Control System ............................................................................................ - 356 -
Special Tools .............................................................................................................................. - 358 -
Control System .................................................................................................................................. - 359 -
Checking Control System .......................................................................................................... - 359 -
Adjusting Control System.......................................................................................................... - 359 -
Steering Lever .................................................................................................................................... - 360 -
Disassembling Steering Lever and Steering Lever Bearing....................................................... - 360 -
Installing Steering Lever and Steering Lever Bearing ............................................................... - 361 -
Steering Lever Bearing Lubrication........................................................................................... - 364 -
Checking Deformation of Steering Lever .................................................................................. - 364 -
Handlebar........................................................................................................................................... - 365 -
Disassembling Handlebar .......................................................................................................... - 365 -
Installing Handlebar................................................................................................................... - 366 -
Frame ......................................................................................................................................................... - 368 -
Exploded View of Frame ................................................................................................................... - 368 -
Exploded View of Left Pedal ............................................................................................................. - 370 -
Exploded View of Right Pedal........................................................................................................... - 372 -
Exploded View of Muffler ................................................................................................................. - 374 -
- 278 -
Exploded View of Front Fender ......................................................................................................... - 376 -
Exploded View of Rear Fender .......................................................................................................... - 378 -
Exploded View of Cowling................................................................................................................ - 380 -
Exploded View of Fuel Tank Guard .................................................................................................. - 382 -
Exploded View of Seat Cushion and Guard....................................................................................... - 384 -
Exploded View of Engine .................................................................................................................. - 386 -
Seat Cushion ...................................................................................................................................... - 388 -
Disassembling Seat Cushion ...................................................................................................... - 388 -
Installing Seat Cushion .............................................................................................................. - 388 -
Cowling ............................................................................................................................................. - 389 -
Disassembling Cowling ............................................................................................................. - 389 -
Installing Cowling ..................................................................................................................... - 390 -
Guard ................................................................................................................................................. - 391 -
Disassembling Left Guard ......................................................................................................... - 391 -
Installing Left Guard.................................................................................................................. - 391 -
Disassembling Right Guard ....................................................................................................... - 392 -
Installing Right Guard ............................................................................................................... - 392 -
Rear Tail Cover .................................................................................................................................. - 393 -
Disassembling Tail Cover .......................................................................................................... - 393 -
Installing Tail Cover .................................................................................................................. - 393 -
Rear Fender........................................................................................................................................ - 394 -
Disassembling Rear Fender ....................................................................................................... - 394 -
Installing Rear Fender ................................................................................................................ - 394 -
Front Fender....................................................................................................................................... - 395 -
Disassembling Front Fender ...................................................................................................... - 395 -
Installing Front Fender............................................................................................................... - 395 -
Fuel Tank Guard and Fairing ............................................................................................................. - 396 -
Disassembling Fuel Tank Guard ................................................................................................ - 396 -
Installing Fuel Tank Guard ........................................................................................................ - 396 -
Frame ................................................................................................................................................. - 397 -
Disassembling Frame ................................................................................................................. - 397 -
Installing Frame ......................................................................................................................... - 397 -
Checking Frame ......................................................................................................................... - 397 -
Side Stand .......................................................................................................................................... - 398 -
Disassembling Side Stand .......................................................................................................... - 398 -
Installing Side Stand .................................................................................................................. - 398 -
Left Front Pedal ................................................................................................................................. - 399 -
Disassembling Left Front Pedal ................................................................................................. - 399 -
Installing Left Front Pedal ......................................................................................................... - 400 -
Left Rear Pedal .................................................................................................................................. - 401 -
Disassembling Left Rear Pedal .................................................................................................. - 401 -
Installing Left Rear Pedal .......................................................................................................... - 401 -
Front Right Pedal ............................................................................................................................... - 402 -
Disassembling Front Right Pedal .............................................................................................. - 402 -
Installing Front Right Pedal ....................................................................................................... - 402 -
Rear Right Pedal ................................................................................................................................ - 403 -
Disassembling Rear Right Pedal................................................................................................ - 403 -
- 279 -
Installing Rear Right Pedal ........................................................................................................ - 403 -
Muffler ............................................................................................................................................... - 404 -
Disassembling Muffler .............................................................................................................. - 404 -
Installing Muffler ....................................................................................................................... - 406 -
Disassembling/Installing Engine ....................................................................................................... - 407 -
Exploded View of Engine Disassembly and Installation ........................................................... - 407 -
Disassembling Engine................................................................................................................ - 409 -
Installing Engine ........................................................................................................................ - 415 -
- 280 -
Wheel / Tire
Exploded View of Front Wheel / Tire
Torque
N·m kgf·m
1 Engine mounting shaft 80 8.0 Si
2 Gear housing component Si
3 Rolling bearing 6301-2RS Si
4 Front rim
5 Vacuum tire 120/70-12
6 Intermediate sleeve of front wheel Si
7 Oil seal component R
8 Right shaft sleeve of front wheel Si
9 Front brake disc
10 Hydraulic brake pad mounting bolt 22 2.2 L
11 Self-locking nut M12×1.25 80 8.0
12 Valve R
L: apply thread fastening glue.
R: replace parts.
Si: apply silicone grease.
- 281 -
Exploded View of Rear Wheel / Tire
- 282 -
Torque
N·m kgf·m
1 Rear wheel axle 90 9.0 Si
2 Rear shock absorber mounting washer
3 Rear wheel left shaft sleeve Si
5 Sprocket
6 Chain 428HG-1×116
7 Dust ring component Si R
8 Rolling bearing 6204-2RS
9 Chain drive axle sleeve Si
10 Sprocket hub mounting washer
11 Sprocket hub
12 Sprocket mounting bolt 45 4.5
13 Rear wheel damper
15 Rear wheel middle axle sleeve Si
17 Front wheel right oil seal component Si R
18 Valve R
19 Rear rim Si
20 Vacuum tire 130/70-12
21 Rear wheel right bushing Si
22 Rear hydraulic brake disc
23 Bolt M8×24 22 2.2 L
R: replace parts.
- 283 -
Wheel (rim)
Rim oscillation:
Axial ≤TIR 0.5 mm TIR 1.0 mm
Radial ≤TIR 0.8 mm TIR 1.0 mm
Wheel axle oscillation /100 mm ≤TIR 0.03 mm TIR 0.2 mm
Wheel balancing ≤10 g –––
Balance weight 10 g, 20 g, 30 g –––
Rim dimensions:
Front wheel 3.0×12 –––
Rear wheel 3.5×12 –––
Tire
Tire pressure (when the tire is being
cooled):
Front wheel 190±10kPa –––
Rear wheel 220±10kPa –––
Tread depth:
Front wheel 5 mm 1 mm
Rear wheel 5 mm 1 mm
Standard tire: Manufacturer, model Specifications
Cheng Shin / Pattern CM-502-1/3C
Front wheel 120/70-12
Mark /DOT/7FG7
Cheng Shin /Pattern
Rear wheel 130/70-12
CM-502-1/3CMark /DOT/7FRQ
Warning
Front and rear wheels must be the products of the
same manufacturer!
- 284 -
Special Tools
Complete set of tools for installing bearing Bearing remover shaft
Bearing remover head
- 285 -
Wheel (Rim)
Disassembling Front Wheel
●Disassemble:
Front calipers mounting bolt [A]
Front calipers [B]
●Loosen:
Shaft tightening nut [A] (right side),
Front shaft [A],
● Disassemble the fairing at the lower part (see

“Frame”—“Disassembling Lower Fairing”).
● Lift the front wheel from the ground using a jack.
Special Tools—jack and jack accessories:
● Disassemble shaft, pull out shaft to the right, and
separate front wheel from front fork.
Notes
Please do not place the motorcycle in the side
direction or press wheel against brake disc,
otherwise, brake disc may be damaged or
deformed. Please place wood blocks below wheel,
to prevent brake disc from contacting the ground.
- 286 -
Installing Front Wheel
Remark
○Rotating direction of wheel [A].
●Check the rotation of front wheel, and then install
front wheel.
●Press bearing [C] into the front rim.

Remark
○First press the side of hydraulic brake disc.
●Apply high-temperature lubricating grease to the edge
of the oil seal [D].
●Put the left shaft sleeve of front wheel [B] over the left
side of the hub.
●Put the right shaft sleeve of front wheel [E] over the
right side of the hub.
●Insert the wheel axle [A] from the left.
●Tighten the nut [F]
View from the head of motorcycle to the rear [G]
Locking torque of front wheel axle nut: 107 N·m
●Before locking the front wheel axle nut, rock the front
fork up and down for 4-5 times, to make the bottom of
front fork and front wheel axle fit perfectly with each
other
Remark
○Place one stop block in front of front wheel, to
prevent motorcycle from shifting.
●Install it in reverse order of disassembly. (see the
●Check whether the front brake is normal (see “Regular
Maintenance”—“Checking Whether the Brake is
Normal”)
Warning
Grasp the brake lever, until brake pad is against
the brake disc, so that the brake lever can
function as normal. Do not ride the motorcycle
before you complete the above steps! Because if
you do not complete the above operation, brake
may not work normally when being used for the
first time and thus danger is caused.
- 287 -
Disassembling Rear Wheel
●Lift rear wheel from the ground using bracket.
●Disassemble:
Rear calipers mounting bolt [A],
rear calipers [B]
●Loosen:
Right chain adjuster [A],
Chain adjuster locking nut [B],
- 288 -
●Loosen:
Left chain adjuster [A],
Chain adjuster locking nut [B],
●Disassemble:
Rear wheel axle nut [A],
●Disassemble:
Rear wheel axle [A],
●Remove the drive chain of rear sprocket to the left
●Rotate rear wheel backwards to remove it.
Note
Do not place the wheel on the ground horizontally
and make the brake disc towards, otherwise,
brake disc may be damaged or deformed. Please
place wood blocks below wheel, to prevent brake
disc from contacting the ground.
- 289 -
Installing Rear Wheel
●Apply high temperature grease to the edge of oil seal.
●Put shaft sleeve at two sides of hub.
Shaft sleeve at right side [A]
Shaft sleeve at left side [B]
●Install drive chain at the rear sprocket.

●Install calipers bracket [A] to the swing arm stop
block [B].
●Insert the rear shaft from the left side of wheel, and
then tighten rear shaft nut.
Locking torque of rear wheel axle nut: 150N·m
●Adjust the slackness of drive chain after installing the
rear wheel (see “Regular Maintenance”—“Check the
Slackness of Drive Chain”).
● Install the rear calipers (see “Brake” —“Installing
Calipers”).
●Mount the rear wheel speed sensor.
● Check whether the rear brake is normal (see “Regular
Maintenance”—“Check Whether the Brake is
Normal”).
Warning
Tread on brake pedal, until the brake pad is
against the brake disc, so that the brake pedal
can function as normal. Do not ride the
motorcycle before you complete the above steps!
Because if you do not complete the above
operation, brake may not work normally when
being used for the first time and thus danger is
caused.
- 290 -
Checking Wheels
●Lift the front wheel / rear wheel from the ground.
Special Tools: jack and jack accessories
●Gently rotate the wheel to check whether the wheels
are able to rotate smoothly.
★If the wheels do not rotate smoothly, replace the hub
bearings (see “Removing / Installing Wheel Bearings”).
●Inspect the wheels for small cracks, dents, bends or
deformations.
★ If the wheel is broken, replace it!
●Remove the wheels and support the wheels and tires
using wheel axle.
●Use the micrometer to measure the axial oscillation
[A] and the radial oscillation [B] of the rim.
★If the oscillation of rim exceeds the limit, check the
hub bearing (see “Checking Hub Bearing”) .
Rim oscillation (in the case of installing tires)
Standards:
Axial oscillation ≤TIR 0.5 mm
Radial oscillation ≤TIR 0.8 mm
Use limit:
Axial oscillation TIR 1.0 mm
Radial oscillation TIR 1.0 mm
Warning
Do not repair the damaged wheels! The damaged
wheel (except that wheel bearing is damaged)
must be replaced, to ensure the safe riding of
motorcycle.
Checking Wheel Axle
●Disassemble the front and rear wheel axles (see
“Disassembling Front Wheel / Rear Wheel”).
●Visually inspect the front and rear wheel axles for
damage.
★If the wheel axle is damaged or bent, please replace
it!
●Place the wheel axle on two V-shaped blocks with a
spacing of 100 mm [A] between them. In the middle of
the two V-shaped blocks, put a dial indicator [B]. Turn
the [C] wheel axle to measure the oscillation. The
difference between the maximum and minimum
readings of the dial indicator is the oscillation of the
wheel axle.
★If the wheel axle oscillation exceeds the use limit,
please replace the wheel axle!
Shaft oscillation / 100 mm
Standard: ≤TIR 0.03 mm
Use limit: TIR 0.2 mm
- 291 -
Checking Dynamic Balance
●Disassemble front and rear wheels (see
“Disassembling Front / Rear Wheel”).
●Support the wheel so that the wheel can rotate
smoothly.
● Rotate the wheel gently and make a mark [A] at the
highest point when the wheel stops.
○ Repeat the above steps for several times. If the
wheels stop rotating at different positions
automatically, it shows that the balance is good.
★ If the wheels always stop at the same position,
adjust the balance of wheels (see “Adjusting Balance”
for details).
Adjusting Dynamic Balance

●If the wheels always stop in the same position,
temporarily paste the grip end [A] at the marked edge
using a tape.
● Rotate the wheel by 1/4 turn [B] to check whether the
wheel stops at this position. If the wheel stops at this
position, it means that the grip end used is just proper.
★If the grip end moves upwards as the wheel rotates,
replace it with a heavier grip end. If the counterweight
moves downwards as the wheel rotates, replace it with
a lighter grip end. Repeat the above steps until the
wheel remains stationary after rotating by 1/4 turn.
●Rotate the wheels by 1/4 turn each time to check
whether the balance of wheels has been adjusted.
●Repeat the adjustment process as many times as
necessary until the balance of the wheels becomes
normal.
●Permanently install the grip end.
Disassembling Grip End

●As shown in the figure, insert two ordinary straight
screwdrivers [A] and [B] between the rim [C] and grip
end [D].
●Pull out the grip end using these two screwdrivers.
●Discard the old grip end.
Note
Do not hit the screwdriver, otherwise the rim
may be damaged.
- 292 -
Installing Grip End
●Check for clearance between the grip end [A] and slot
[B].
★ If there is a gap, please remove the grip end!
Warning
There is a gap between the grip end and the rim
edge, indicating that the grip end and/or slot
hasexpanded. Therefore, loose grip end needs to
be repalced.
Do not reuse the grip end!
If the wheels are not balanced, dangers may be
caused when riding.
Grip End
Grip end
10 g （0.35 oz.）
20 g （0.71 oz.）
30 g （1.06 oz.）
Remark
○Benelli dealers sell the balance weights of 10, 20
and 30 g (0.35, 0.71 and 1.06 oz) respectively. The
imbalance within 10g will not affect the driving
stability of the motorcycle.
○Please do not use more than 4 weights (including 4,
total weight of more than 90 g/3.2 oz). If you need to

control the balance with the wheel of more than 4
weights, please disassemble the wheel to find the
cause of the problem.
- 293 -
●Push or knock [C] slot [D] and insert the grip end [A]
onto the rib [B].
○Mount the grip end to the left side of motorcycle.
Left side [E]
Right side [F]
●Check whether the balancer weight [A] and slot [B]

are securely fixed on the rim [C] and slot is hung on the
mounting base [D].
Left side [E]
Right side [F]
Checking / Adjusting Tire Pressure

●See “Regular Maintenance”—“Checking Tire Pressure”.
Checking Tire
●See “Regular Maintenance”—“Checking Whether Wheel / Tire Is Damaged”.
- 294 -
Disassembling Tire
●Disassemble:
Tire (see “Disassembling Front Wheel / Rear Wheel),
Air inlet valve (bleed)
●To keep tires balanced, make a mark at the place of
air inlet valve stem using a chalk, so as to install the
tires at the original places later
Chalk mark or yellow mark [A],
Air inlet valve [B],
Aligning [C]
●Apply soap or rubber lubricant at tire beads and two

rim edges, so that tire beads may slip out from rim
edge easily.
Note
Do not use oil or gasoline distillate as lubricant,
because oil or gasoline distillate may rot the tires.
●Use tire changer to remove tires from rims.
Remark
○Because tires are embedded firmly at rims, so they
cannot be removed using manual tools.
- 295 -
Installing Tire
Warning
Front and rear wheels must be the products
of the same manufacturer!
●Check rims and tires and replace them if necessary.
●Clean the sealing surfaces of rims and tires, and make
the sealing surface of rim smooth using a fine abrasive
cloth if necessary.
●Remove and discard the air inlet valve.
Note
Air inlet valve must be replaced when changing
tire! Please do not use it repeatedly!
●Install a new air inlet valve at rim.
○Remove air inlet valve cap, apply soap or rubber
lubricant at seal of valve stem [A], pull out [B] air
outlet valve stem from the inside of rim, and adjust the
place of valve stem.
Note
Do not use oil or gasoline distillate as lubricant of
valve stem, because oil or gasoline distillate may
rot rubber.
○The structure of valve is shown in the figure.

Air inlet valve cap [A],
Air inlet valve [B],
Valve stem seal [C],
Valve stem [D]
Air inlet valve seat [E],
Opening air inlet valve [F]
●Check the tire rotation marks on the front wheel tire

and the rear wheel tire, and then install the tires on the
corresponding rim.
Tire rotation mark [A]
Rotation direction [B]
- 296 -
●Put tire on the rim, and align the air inlet valve [A]
with the balance mark [B] on the tire (mark made with a
chalk when the tire is removed or a yellow paint mark
on the new tire).
●Install tire bead at the edge of rim using a tire changer.
●Lubricate tire bead and rim edges using soap or a
rubber lubricant when inflating the tire, so as to install
the tire bead at the sealing surface of rim.
●Align the tire bead at the rim, inject compressed air
into the tire until the bead engages with the inner
sealing surface of the rim.
Warning
When inflating the tires, be sure to install air
inlet valve, and the pressure inside the tire does
not exceed 400 kPa (4.0 kgf/cm2). Excessive
inflation may lead to puncture of tire, thus
causing casualties:
●Check whether the rim line [A] on both sides of the
tire’s sidewall is parallel to the edge of the rim.
★ If the edge of the rim is not parallel to the rim line
of the tire sidewall, remove the air inlet valve.
●Lubricate the edges of the rim and bead.
●Install the air inlet valve and re-inflate the tire.
●After installing the bead into the edge of the rim,
check the tire for leaks.
○The air inflated to the tire should be slightly higher
than the standard inflating volume.
○Apply soap to tire or soak the tire in the water. If there
is any air bubble, the tire may leak.
●Adjust the tire pressure according to the specified tire
pressure standard (see “Regular
Maintenance”—“Checking Tire Pressure”).
● Install air inlet valve.
● Adjust the dynamic balance of wheel (see “Adjusting
Dynamic Balance”).
Repairing Tires
There are two methods commonly used to repair vacuum tires. One is called “temporary (external) repair”: it
does not need to remove the tires from the rim to repair; the other is called “permanent (internal) maintenance”: it
needs to remove the tire to repair. It is generally believed that compared to a temporary (external) repair,
permanent (internal) maintenance ensures a more durable and stable tire. In addition, permanent (internal)
maintenance has another benefit: associated damage that cannot be found in external examination can be
identified in a thorough examination. In view of this, Benelli does not recommend the use of temporary (external)
maintenance, only recommend the use of reasonable permanent (internal) maintenance. The repair methods
recommended by manufacturers may differ slightly. In order to ensure safe ride, please follow the manufacturer’s
recommended repair tools and maintenance materials for repairs.
- 297 -
Hub Bearing
Disassembling Hub Bearing
●Remove the wheel (see “Disassembling Front Wheel /
Rear Wheel”), and remove the following parts:
shaft shaft sleeve,
shaft sleeve (removed from rear hub),
oil seal
●Remove the hub bearing [A] with the bearing puller.
Note
Do not place the wheels horizontally on the
floor and make the brake disc face down, or
the brake disc may be damaged or deformed.
Please put a stop block under the wheel to
prevent the brake disc from contacting the
ground.
Special Tools—Bearing remover head
Bearing remover shaft
Installing Hub Bearing
●Before installing the hub bearing, blow out the dust or
foreign matters inside the hub with compressed air to
avoid contamination of the bearing.
●Replace the bearings with new ones.
●Install the bearing with the full set of tools for
installing bearings (without contact with the inner ring
of bearing).
●Press the bearing [A] until it reaches the bottom.
Special Tools—Complete Set of Tools for Installing
Bearings [B]
●Replace the oil seal.

●Press the oil seal [A], so that the oil seal surface is
flush with the end of the hole [B].
○Apply high temperature grease to the edge of the oil
seal.
Bearings [C]
- 298 -
Checking Hub Bearing
Because the error of hub bearing is very small,
generally it is unable to measure the clearance
Remark
○Do not remove any bearing for check, because the
bearing must be replaced with one after removal.
●If it needs to check whether there is an axial clearance
in the bearing, it is jammed or blocked during the
rotation, please rotate each bearing in the hub back and
forth [A]!
★If the bearing cannot rotate smoothly, please replace
the bearing!
●Inspect the bearing seal [B] for damage or leaks.
★If there is damage or leak in bearing seal, please
replace the bearing!
Hub Bearing Lubrication

Remark
○Because there is lubricant in hub bearing and it is
sealed, it does not need to add lubricating oil to hub
bearing.
- 299 -
Drive Mechanism
Exploded View of Drive Mechanism
- 300 -
Torque
N·m kgf·m
1 Rear wheel axle 120 12 Si
2 Rear shock absorber mounting washer
3 Left bushing of rear wheel Si
5 Sprocket
6 Chain 428HG-1×116
7 Dust seal component Si R
8 Rooling bearing 6204-2RS
9 Chain drive axle sleeve Si
10 Sprocket hub mounting washer
11 Sprocket hub
12 Sprocket mounting bolt 45 4.5
13 Rear wheel damper
G: apply grease.
R: replace parts.
R: replace parts.
- 301 -
Item Standard Lower use limit
Drive chain
Slackness of drive chain 32 ∼ 38 mm –––
Wearing capacity of drive chain 254 ∼ 264.4 mm 264.4 mm
(with a length of 20 sections)
Standard drive chain:
Manufacturer –––
Model 428HG –––
Quantity of chains 116 sections –––
Sprocket
Deformation of rear sprocket ≤TIR 0.4 mm TIR 0.5 mm
- 302 -
Special Tools
Tools for disassembling and assembling chain: Complete set of tools for installing bearing:
- 303 -
Drive Chain
Checking the Slackness of Drive Chain
●See “Regular Maintenance”—“Checking the Slackness of Drive Chain”.
Checking the Slackness of Drive Chain
●See “Regular Maintenance”—“Adjusting the Slackness of Drive Chain”.
Checking / Adjusting Wheel Alignment
●See “Regular Maintenance”—“Checking Wheel Alignment”.
Checking the Wear of Drive Chain
●See “Regular Maintenance”—“Checking the Lubrication of Drive Chain”.
Lubrication of Drive Chain
●See “Regular Maintenance”—“Checking the Lubrication of Drive Chain”.
Disassembling Drive Chain
Disassemble drive chain cover screw [A] and drive
chain cover [B].
○Disassemble drive chain cover from the swing arm.
●Disassemble:
Drive sprocket locking nut [B]
Engine drive sprocket [C] (see “Disassembling Engine
Drive Sprocket”),
●Disassemble:
Drive chain [A]
●The drive chain used for this chain is equipped with

the master link of safety side plate.
●Depending on the chain manufacturer’s specifications
and the type required.
●Use Special Tools. There are three tools to remove the
main chain plate [A], assemble side plate [B], and
fasten it to the pin at side plate [C]
- 304 -
●Drive Chain:
Main chain plate [A],
Side plate of chain plate [C],
Remark
○Insert the main chain plate from the inside of drive
chain, and then assemble side plate, make ID sign
towards the outside.
Warning
。Do not use old chain, main chain plate, side plate of
main chain plate or rubber O-ring
Installing Drive Chain
●Install:
Drive sprocket of engine (see “Disassembling Drive
Sprocket of Engine”),
rear wheel (see “Wheel / Tire”—“Disassembling Rear
Wheel”)
●Install chain:
○Use the tool to assemble the side plate of main chain
plate [B], and press the side plate of main chain plate to
the main chain plate.
○Use Special Tools to fix the pin at the main chain

plate [C],
Note
There must be no opening at the surface under the
impact of fixed main chain plate. If there is any
opening, replace main chain plate, sealing ring and
side plate.
Remark
○Do not use the drive chain of main chain plate with
clamp.
●Install:
Drive chain cover
●Adjust the slackness of drive chain after installing
drive chain (see “Regular Maintenance”—“Adjusting
the Slackness of Drive Chain”)
- 305 -
Sprocket, Shaft Sleeve, Shaft Sleeve Bearing
Disassembling Rear Sprocket
●Disassembling rear wheel (see “Wheel /
Tire”—“Disassembling Rear Wheel”).
Note
Do not place the wheel on the ground
horizontally and make the brake disc towards,
otherwise, brake disc may be damaged or
deformed. Please place wood blocks below wheel,
to prevent brake disc from contacting the ground.
●Disassemble:
Rear sprocket nut [A],
Rear sprocket [B]
Installing Rear Sprocket

●When installing the sprocket, the side with the sign of
number of teeth [A] should be towards the outside.
●Lock rear sprocket nut.
Locking Torque of Rear Sprocket Nut: 45N·m
●Install rear wheel (see “Wheel / Tire”—“Installing
Rear Wheel”).
* Note
Fasten the nut in order.
- 306 -
Disassembling Shaft Sleeve Bearing
●Knock out the bearing [A] from one side of wheel.
Bearing:
Installing Shaft Sleeve Bearing

●Replace one new bearing.
●Press bearing [A] towards the inside, until it reaches
the top.
Bearing [B]:
●Apply high-temperature grease to the bearing.
●Replace one new oil seal.
●When pressing it into the new oil seal, the sealing
surface should be aligned at the end of hole.
○Apply high-temperature grease to the edge of oil seal.
Bearing:
Checking Shaft Sleeve Bearing

●As the shaft sleeve bearing error is very small,
generally it is unable to measure the clearance.
Remark
○Do not remove any bearing for check, because the
bearing must be replaced with one after removal.
●If it needs to check whether there is an axial clearance
in the bearing, it is jammed or blocked during the
rotation, please rotate each bearing in the hub back and
forth [A]!
★If the bearing cannot rotate smoothly, please replace
the bearing!
Lubrication of Shaft Sleeve Bearing

●Add high-quality bearing grease to bearing. Rotate
the bearing for several times by hands to ensure that
the grease distribution in the bearing is uniform.
- 307 -
Checking the Damper of Shaft Sleeve
●Remove the shaft sleeve of rear wheel and check the
rubber damper [A].
●If the damper is damaged or corroded, please replace
it!
Checking the Wear of Sprocket

●Visually check the wear of engine and rear sprocket.
★If the wear of sprocket teeth is as shown in the
figure, please replace the sprocket and check the wear
of drive chain (see “Regular Maintenance”—“Checking
the Wear of Drive Chain”).
Worn sprocket tooth (drive chain of engine) [A],
Worn sprocket tooth (rear sprocket) [B]
Rotation direction [C]
Remark
○If it needs to replace sprocket, drive chain may
need to be replaced. Therefore, it is required to check
drive chain when replacing sprocket.
Checking the Deformation of Rear Sprocket
●Lift the rear wheel from the grounding using a
bracket, so that it can rotate smoothly.
●As shown in the figure, place a dial indicator [A]
near the gear teeth of the rear sprocket. Turn the rear
wheel and measure the oscillation (deformation) of
sprocket. The difference between the maximum and
minimum readings of the dial indicator is the
oscillation (deformation) of the sprocket.
★If the wheel axle oscillation exceeds the lower use
limit, please replace the rear sprocket!
Deformation of Rear Sprocket
Standard: ≤TIR 0.4mm
Upper use limit: TIR 0.5 mm
- 308 -
Brake
Exploded View of Front Brake
- 309 -
Torque
N·m kgf·m
1 Screw M6×23 10 1.0
2 Mounting cap
3 Front brake switch component
4 Washer φ4
5 Washer φ4
6 Screw M4×12
7 Bolt 2 0.2 G
8 Lever
9 Nut M6 6 0.6
10 Fuel pump component
11 Hexagon flange bolts 30 3.0 B
12 Seal R
13 Brake hose assembly
14 Brake caliper (red)
15 Friction plate component
16 Inner hexagon screw M8×1.25×25 22 2.2 L
17 Front hydraulic brake component
B: apply brake fluid.
G: apply grease.
R: replace parts.
- 310 -
Exploded View of Rear Brake
- 311 -
Torque
N·m kgf·m
1 Rear hydraulic brake component
3 Seal R
4 Hexagon bolt with flange 30 3.0 B
5 Brake hose assembly
6 Nut M6 10 1.0
7 Brake cylinder component (red)
8 Plunger screw of foot pump
9 Screw M8×20 22 2.2 L
10 Rear brake pressure switch 30 3.0 B
11 Rear fuel pump component
12 Bolt M6×12 8 0.8
G: apply grease.
R: replace parts.
- 312 -
CBS of Hydraulic Brake
- 313 -
Torque
N·m kgf·m
1 Screw M6×23 10 1.0
2 Mounting cover
3 Front brake switch component
4 Washer φ4
5 Washerφ4
6 Screw M4×12
7 Bolt 2 0.2 G
8 Lever
9 Nut M6 6 0.6
10 Fuel pump component
11 Hexagon bolt with flange 30 3.0 L, B
12 Seal R
13 Front brake hose component
14 Front right brake caliper component
15 Friction plate component (front)
16 Soket head cap screw M8×1.25×25 22 2.2 L
17 CBS linkage brake assembly
18 Rear linkage brake hose assembly II
19 Rear linkage brake hose assembly III
20 Rear linkage brake hose assembly I
21 Rear fuel pump component
22 CBS fuel pump component
23 Pipe mounting bolt (tee) 30 3.0 L, B
24 Sealing washer R
25 Pipe mounting bolt 30 3.0 L, B
26 Bleed screw 7.8 0.8
27 Plunger dust cover
29 Brake caliper component (red)
30 Rear brake pressure switch 30 3.0 L, B
31 Nut M6 8 0.8
32 Bolt M6×12
33 Bolt M6×20 10 1.0 L
34 Plunger screw of foot pump
G: apply grease.
R: replace parts.
- 314 -
CBS System (for motorcycle equipped with CBS)
- 315 -
Item Standard Lower use limit
Brake lever, brake pedal
Brake lever position Not adjustable –––
Brake lever free clearance Not adjustable –––
Pedal free clearance Adjustable –––
Pedal position About 45 mm below the top of pedal –––
Brake pad
Thickness of brake pad
Front brake pad 6.0 mm 1 mm
Rear brake pad 6.8 mm 1 mm
Brake disc
Thickness:
Front brake disc 3.9 ∼ 4.1mm 3.0 mm
Rear brake disc 3.8 ∼ 4.0 mm 3.0 mm
Runout ≤TIR 0.15 mm TIR 0.3 mm
Brake fluid
Grade DOT4 –––
- 316 -
Special Tools
Internal circlip plier: Multimeter:
- 317 -
Brake Lever, Brake Pedal
Checking the position of brake pedal
●Check whether the position of brake pedal [A] is
correct.
Footpeg [B]
Pedal position
Standard: About 45 mm below the top of footpeg
★ If the position of pedal is incorrect, adjust the
position of brake pedal
Adjusting the Position of Brake Pedal
Remark
○It is not necessary to adjust the position of pedal
normally, but if the lever locking nut is removed,
the position of pedal must be adjusted.
●Loosen the locking nut [A], turn the push rod [B],
make the position of pedal correct.
●Locking torque:
Locking Torque of Push Rod Locking Nut of Upper
Rear Pump: 10 N•m
●Check whether the brake lamp switch is normal (see
“Regular Maintenance”—“Checking Whether the
Brake Lamp Switch is Normal”).
- 318 -
Removing the Brake Pedal
●Disassemble:
Right Front Pedal Bracket Bolt [B]
Section Locking Screw [A]
●Disassemble:
Brake pedal return spring [D]
Eccentric push rod [B],
Lower spring pin [C],
•Disassemble the rear brake pedal installing screw [E],
and remove the brake pedal [A].
Installing the Brake Pedal

●Install:
Self-lubricating sleeve [C].
Eccentric push rod [E],
Lower spring pin [F],
Locking Torque of Lower Spring Pin: 3N•m
●Apply grease to the rear brake pedal installing screw
[B]
●Install:
Brake pedal [A],
Gasket [D],
Rear brake pedal installing screw [B]
Locking Torque of Brake Pedal Bolt: 22 N•m
●Attach the lower end of the brake pedal return spring
[D] to the lower spring pin.
●Attach the upper end of the brake pedal return spring
[D] to the hook of the pedal.
- 319 -
●Install the right front pedal bracket.
Locking Torque of Front Pedal Bracket Screw [A]:
40N•m
•Install master cylinder fixing screw [B].

Locking Torque of Upper Rear Pump Fixing Screw
[A]: 10N•m
•Press the brake pedal [A], align the joint hole of the
master cylinder, and install the fixing screw [B] and
nut.
Locking Torque of Upper Rear Pump Joint Fixing
Screw: 10N•m
•Check the position of brake pedal (see “Position of
Brake Pedal”).
- 320 -
Calipers
hose, and then tighten it slightly.
●Remove the calipers mounting bolt [B], and separate
calipers [A] and the brake disc.
Note
Note
Remark
○ If it needs to dismantle after removing the calipers
and there is no compressed air available, dismantle
the calipers before removing the brake hose (see
“Disassembling Front Calipers”).
●The front calipers of motorcycle with CBS is as

shown at right, and the disassembly is the same as that
of non-CBS.
- 321 -
●Disassemble rear wheel (see “Disassembling Rear
Wheel” in “Wheel / Tire”)
●Separate calipers [A] and the brake disc.

hose.
●Remove the calipers mounting bolt [B], and remove
the rear brake pad
Note
Note
Remark
○ If it needs to dismantle after removing the calipers
and there is no compressed air available, dismantle
the calipers before removing the brake hose (see
“Disassembling Rear Calipers”).
- 322 -
Installing Calipers
●Install the caliper and the lower end of brake hose.
○Replace the gaskets on both sides of the hose joint with new ones
●Locking torque:
Locking Torque of Calipers Mounting bolt:
Front calipers: 22 N•m
Rear calipers: 22N•m
Brake hose hollow bolt: 30N•m
●Check the fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir.
●Exhaust air from the brake pipe (see “Exhausting Air in the Brake Pipe”).
●Check whether the braking performance of the brakes is normal and the brake fluid leaks.
Warning
Grasp the brake lever, until brake pad is against the
brake disc, so that the brake lever can function as
normal. Do not ride the motorcycle before you
complete the above steps! Because if you do not
complete the above operation, brake may not work
normally when being used for the first time and thus
danger is caused.
●See “Regular Maintenance” —“Replacing Rubber Parts of Calipers”.
Assembling Front Calipers
Assembling Rear Calipers
Checking the Liquid Seal of Calipers for Damage
In order to maintain a gap between the brake
pad and the brake disc, an oil seal (piston oil seal) is
provided around the piston [A]. If the oil seal is
damaged, excessive wear will be cause to brake pad,
thus leading to brake failure, so that the brake disc or
brake fluid temperature may rise.
●If any of the following conditions occur in oil seal,
replace it!
○The brake fluid around the brake pad leaks.
○Brake temperature is too high.
○The difference between the inner and outer surfaces of
the brake pad is very large.
○Oil seal and piston are stuck together.
★If you replace the oil seal, please replace the dust
seal [B] at the same time. In addition, replace all oil
seals when replacing the brake pads.
- 323 -
Checking Dust Seal of the Calipers for Damage
●Check dust seal [B] for cracks, abrasion, expansion or
other damages.
★If the dust seal is damaged, please replace it with a
new one!
Piston [C],
Oil seal [A]
- 324 -
- 325 -
Checking the Calipers Piston and Brake Cylinder for Damage
●Visually inspect the piston [A] and the brake cylinder
surface [B].
★ If the brake cylinder and piston are seriously worn
or rusted, please replace the calipers!
- 326 -
Brake pad
Disassembling Front Brake pad
●Disassemble front calipers
●Disassemble the fixed pin of brake pad[A].
●Disassemble:
Fixing pin of brake pad [A],
ote
When pulling out pin [A], please press safety spring
●Disassemble:
Front brake pad [A]
- 327 -
Installing Front Brake pad
●Push the calipers inward as far as possible.
●Install:
The operations should be conducted in reverse order of
disassembly.
●Check: brake fluid level [B], if it is lower than the
minimum score, add sufficient brake fluid
recommended until it reaches the correct level.
●Check: brake handle operation, if the brake handle
feels loose and soft, or light and soft, empty the air
from the brake circuit.
Warning
Disassembling RearBrake pad

●Separate rear calipers [A] from rear hydraulic brake
bracket [B].
●Scew out the mounting pin of rear brake pad [A].
- 328 -
●Disassemble:
Brake pad [A]
Installing Rear Brake Pad

●Push the calipers inward as far as possible.
●Install:
The operations should be conducted in reverse order of
disassembly.
●Install calipers (see “Installing Calipers”)
●Check: brake fluid level [A], if it is lower than the
minimum score, add sufficient brake fluid
recommended until it reaches the correct level.
●Check: brake handle operation, if the brake handle
feels loose and soft, or light and soft, empty the air
from the brake circuit.
Warning
Checking the Wear of Brake Pad
●See “Regular Maintenance”—“Checking the Wear of Brake pad”.
Master Cylinder
●Disassemble the mounting bolt of front master
cylinder [A].
●Disconnect the connector of front brake lamp switch.
Note
- 329 -
●Disassemble the mounting bolt [A] between front
brake hose and master cylinder.
●Disassemble:
Brake handle pivot shaft bolt [B] and locking nut [C]
Brake handle [A],
front brake lamp switch fixing screw [B], flat washer
[F] and spring washer [G]
Front brake lamp switch [D]
Front master cylinder [H]
●Disassemble front master pump
Installing Front Master Cylinder

●Install:
The operations should be conducted in reverse order of disassembly.
●First tighten the upper tightening bolts and then the lower tightening bolts.
Locking Torque of Front Main Cylinder Tightening Bolt: 11 N•m
●Replace the gaskets on both sides of the hose joint with new ones.
●Locking torque:
Locking Torque of Hollow Bolt of Brake Hose: 25 N•m
- 330 -
●Disassemble:
Rear master cylinder tightening bolts [A]
Bolt [B]
Rear brake lamp switch sensor [C],
Rear master cylinder [D]
•Slide out the clamp [A].

•Pull out the lower end of the oil reservoir hose [B] and
drain the brake fluid into a container.
●Disasseble rear master pump
Installing Rear Master Cylinder

•Replace the gaskets on both sides of the hose joint with new ones.
•Install:
The operations should be conducted in reverse order of disassembly.
•Locking torque:
- 331 -
Locking Torque of Rear Master cylinder Mounting bolt: 25 N•m
Locking Torque of Rear Brake Lamp Switch Sensor: 25 N•m
●See “Regular Maintenance” —“Replacing Rubber Parts of Master cylinder”.
Assembling Master Cylinder
Checking Master Cylinder (Visual Check)
●Disassemble the master cylinder (see “Disassembling
Front / Rear Master cylinder”).
●Disassemble the front and rear master cylinder (see
“Regular Maintenance” —“Replacing Rubber Parts of
Master cylinder”).
●Check for scratches, rust or sag on the inner wall of each
master cylinder and the outer surface of each piston.
★ If there is any damage in pump or piston, please replace!
●Check main and secondary reservoirs.
★ If the reservoir is worn, broken, softened (corroded) or
swollen, replace the entire piston with the reservoir.
★ If you find the brake lever is leaking brake fluid,
replace the entire piston with the reservoir!
●Check the dust cover for damage.
●If the dust cover is damaged, replace it!
●Check whether the piston return spring is damaged.
★ If the return spring is damaged, replace it!
●Check whether the oil outlet hole and the oil inlet hole
are blocked.
★If the oil outlet hole is blocked, the brake pad will
produce resistance to the brake disc. Clean the outlet hole
with compressed air.
- 332 -
Brake Discs
Disassembling Brake Discs
●Disassemble the wheels (see “Wheels /
Tires”—“Removing Front Wheels / Rear Wheels”).
●Disassemble mounting bolts and remove the brake disc.
Installing Brake Disc

●Install the brake disc onto the wheels with the marked
side facing out.
●Apply thread tightening glue to the threads of front brake
disc and rear brake disc mounting bolts.
●Tighten the bolts onto the brake disc step by step in a
crossed pattern.
●Locking torque:
Locking Torque of Brake Disc Mounting bolt: 22 N•m
Checking the Wear of Brake Disc

●Measure the thickness of the brake disc in the most If the brake disc wear exceeds the lower USE limit,
severe wear of each brake disc. please replace
★If the brake disc wear exceeds the lower USE limit,
please replace!
Thickness of brake disc
Standards:
Front brake disc 3.9 ∼ 4.1 mm
Rear brake disc 3.8 ∼ 4.0 mm
Lower use limit:
Front brake disc 3.0 mm
Rear brake disc 3.0 mm
- 333 -
Checking the Deformation of Brake Disc
●Lift the front wheel / rear wheel from the ground.
○In order to facilitate the inspection of the front brake disc,
the handlebar can be completely inverted to one side.
●Turn the [B] wheel by hands and place the dial indicator
on the brake disc [A] (see figure below)
), to measure the oscillation of brake disc.
★If the oscillation of brake disc exceeds the upper use
limit, please replace the brake disc!
Oscillation of brake disc

Standard: ≤TIR 0.15 mm
Upper use limit: TIR 0.3 mm
- 334 -
Brake Fluid
Checking the Level of Brake Fluid
●See “Regular Maintenance”—“Checking the Level of Brake Fluid”.
Replacing Brake Fluid
●See “Regular Maintenance”—“Replacing Brake Fluid”.
Exhausting Air from Brake Pipe
Brake fluid compression coefficient is very small,
so almost all the work of the brake lever or brake pedal
will be transmitted directly to the calipers, thus
generating braking effect. But the air is easily
compressed. If the air enters the brake pipe, part of the
work of brake lever or brake pedal will be used to
compress the air, thus making brake rod or brake pedal
soft and reducing braking performance.
Warning
After the brake fluid is changed or the brake pipe
joint is released, operators feel the brake lever or the
brake pedal soft, the air inside the brake pipe must be
exhausted.
Remark
○The procedures for removing air from the rear
brake pipe are as follows. The procedures for
exhausting the air from the front brake pipe are the
same as that of the rear brake pipe.
Order for Releasing Air

1. Remove the brake fluid cylinder cover.
2. Remove the brake fluid cylinder diaphragm.
3. Install the pipe at the front of the drain screw and
prepare the oil pan at the front end of the pipe.
4. First brake several times, in the state of grasping
the brake handle, loosen the oil drain screw by
about 1/2 turn, and then re-tighten it again fast.
5. Repeat the above procedures until the drain screw
drains completely bubbles.
6. Reinstall the brake fluid cylinder diaphragm
7. Reinstall the brake fluid cylinder cover
Remark
○Check the level of the brake fluid frequently during
air discharge, and supplement it as necessary. If the
brake fluid in oil reservoir completely uses up in the
process of exhausting air, exhaust operations should
be conducted again, because air may have entered
the brake pipe.
○To discharge air more thoroughly, please tap the
brake hose between the calipers and the oil reservoir.
- 335 -
Warning
The following precautions should be taken when
handling disc brakes:
1. Do not reuse the brake fluid!
2. If the container containing of the brake fluid is not
sealed or opened for a long time, do not use the brake
fluid inside the container!
3. Do not mix different types or brands of brake fluid,
or the boiling point of the brake fluid will be reduced,
resulting in brake failure or corrosion of rubber brake
parts.
4. Please do not open the lid of the oil reservoir for a
long time, so as not to damp brake fluid.
5. Do not replace the brake fluid in rain or strong
winds!
6. Except brake pads and brake discs, it is required to
use disc brake fluid, isopropyl alcohol or ethanol to
clean brake parts. Do not use other fluids to clean the
parts above, because gasoline, oil or any other
gasoline distillates may corrode rubber parts. If oil
spills onto any part, it will be difficult to completely
clean, and ultimately corrosion may be caused to the
rubber parts inside the disc brake.
7. When handling brake pads or brake discs, prevent
any brake fluid or other oils from splashing on them.
If any brake fluid or other oil is applied to the brake
pads or brake discs, please clean them with the fluid
with a high flash point! Do not use any solvent that
will leave oil residue! If it is unable to thoroughly
clean the on the brake fluid or oil on the brake pads,
please replace the new!
8. The brake fluid may quickly corrode the painted
surface, so if any brake fluid spill, you must
immediately wipe it!
9. No matter when you open the brake pipe joint or
exhaust valve, you must exhaust the air in the
brake pipe!
- 336 -
Brake Hose
Disassembling / Installing Brake Hose and Brake Pipe
●See “Regular Maintenance”—“Replacing Brake Hose and Brake Pipe”.
Checking Brake Hose and Brake Pipe
●See “Regular Maintenance”—“Checking the Damage
and Installation of Brake Hose and Brake Pipe”.
- 337 -
Suspension System
Exploded View of Front Suspension System
- 338 -
No. Chinese name and specification Torque Remark
N·m kgf·m
1 Inner hexagon screw M8×1.25×25 25 2.5
2 Upper seat of handlebar
3 Lower handle positioned
4 Damper
5 Double end stud for positioning of handle 25 2.5 L
6 Upper bracket clamp screw 50 5.0
7 Upper bracket
8 Handle positioning washer
10 Upper bracket clamping nut 25 2.5
11 Gland nut 25 2.5
12 Dust seal
13 Steering bearing R、G
14 Steering column
15 Lock ring R
16 Lower bracket
17 Front left shock absorber component
18 Front right shock absorber component
19 Screw M6×14 10 1.0
20 Bolt M6×65 10 1.0
21 Clamp of hydraulic brake pipe
22 Cushion shaft sleeve of headlight
23 Mounting washer bush under headlight
24 Mounting palte below headlight
25 Clutch clamp component
26 Self-locking nut M6 10 1.0
27 Lower bracket clamp component
G: apply grease
L: apply thread fastening glue
R: replace parts
- 339 -
Exploded View of Rear Suspension System
No. Chinese name and specification Torque Remark

N·m kgf·m
1 Swing arm axle 90 9.0 G
2 Swing arm axle sleeve component G，R
3 Middle shaft sleeve
4 Self-locking nut M14×1.5 90 9.0 R
5 Bolt M6×10
6 Protective block G
7 Chain stop dog G
8 Bolt M6×19 8 0.8
9 Rear swing arm welding component
10 Drive chain cover
M6×15
11
Hexagon screw with boss M6×15
12 Chain adjuster welding component
13 Chain adjuster retainer
14 Nut M8
15 Rear shock absorber component
16 Rear shock absorber mounting bolt 50 5.0 L
17 Self-locking nut M10 50 5.0 R
18 Hydraulic brake clamp
19 Cross-head screw M6×16
G: apply grease
L: apply thread fastening glue
R: replace parts
- 340 -
Item Standard
Front shock absorber (each one)
Diameter of front shock absorber φ35 mm
inner pipe
Pressure
Pressure Atmospheric pressure (unadjustable)
Front shock absorber oil: 22# shock absorber oil
Viscosity 20 (at the temperature of 20℃)
Oil quantity 315 ±2ml (after the disassembly, the oil has been drained completely)
Free length of front shock absorber 245 mm (lower use limit: 80.9mm) (maximum deformation: 164.1)
spring
Rear shock absorber
Spring prepressing setting: Double-nut adjustment
Standard Spring length: 141 mm
Applicable scope Spring length: 141 ~80.8mm
(From weak to strong)
- 341 -
Special Tools
Internal calipers: Piston rod puller of front shock absorber
Oil seal and bearing puller: Bearing puller shaft:
Complete set of tools for mounting bearing: Bearing puller head:
Oil seal screwdriver of front shock absorber: Hook wrench:
- 342 -
Front Shock Absorber
Disassembling Front Shock Absorber
●Disassemble:
Middle Fairings (see “Frame”—“Disassembling Middle Fairings”)
Front wheel (see “Wheel/Tire”—“Disassembling Front Wheel”),
Front fender (see “Frame”—“Disassembling Front Fender”)
●Disassemble the clamping bolt at the upper bracket of
front shock absorber [A]
●Disassemble the clamping bolt at the lower bracket of

front shock absorber [A]
●Turn the front shock absorber installing seat down to

remove it.
- 343 -
Installing Front Shock Absorber
●Keep the direction and position of top of outer pipe
[A] as shown in the figure on the right before installing
the front shock absorber.
●Locking torque:
Clamping bolt of front shock absorber (at the lower
side): 22 N·m
Clamping bolt of front shock absorber (at the
upper side): 22 N·m
Remark
○Lock two clamping bolts twice alternately to
ensure that the locking torque is even.
●Install it in reverse order of disassembly (see the corresponding chapters).
Replacing Front Shock Absorber Oil

●Remove the front shock absorber (see
“Disassembling Front Shock Absorber”).
●Clamp the lower end of inner pipe with a vise.
●Remove the head cover [A] from the outer pipe.
- 344 -
●Install the fixing tool [A], as shown in the figure
Remark
○The upper part protecting device [B] shall not
touch the inner pipe when installing the fixing tool;
pull up the outer pipe [C], clamp the outer pipe with
the tool, and then lock the two bolts [D]. The outer
pipe plays a guiding role.
●After the spring is pressed with the special tool,

disassemble the front shock absorber bolt [A] and nut
[B] with a wrench
- 345 -
●Disassemble:
Shock absorber spring [A]
Spring seat [B]
Adjusting sleeve[C]
Damper and adjusting sleeve seat [D]
●Pour the shock absorber oil into a suitable container.

○Pull the piston rod up and down for at least ten times
and pour out the shock absorber oil in the front shock
absorber.
Special Tool—Shock Absorber Piston Rod Puller
[B]:
●Hold the outer pipe vertically and press the inner

pipe [A] and piston rod to the bottom.
●Pour the shock absorber oil of the specified model
and specified quantity.
Shock Absorber Oil
Viscosity: 20 (at the temperature of 20℃)
Oil quantity (shock absorption for each one): 315
±2mL
Oil quantity after it is disassembled and dried
completely: 315 ±2 mL
★If necessary, measure the oil level of shock absorber

oil according to the following methods.
○It is best to use a three-jaw chuck oiling paper to
wrap the inner pipe and fix it vertically.
○Pull the piston rod [B] up and down for more than
ten times by using the piston rod puller [A] to drain the
air in the shock absorber oil thoroughly.
Special Tool—Shock Absorber Piston Rod Puller
○Remove the piston rod puller.

○Wait until the oil level becomes stable.
- 346 -
●Rotate the shock absorber piston rod puller to the end
of piston rod.
Special Tool—Shock Absorber Piston Rod Puller:
●Pull the puller above the top of outer pipe.
●Installing:
Adjusting sleeve,
Damper and other parts
Please replace with new parts!
●Fix the bolt at the top with a wrench and lock the
piston rod nut [A].
Locking torque of piston rod nut: 18-20 N·m
●Clamp the gasket by using the holder and loosen the

front shock absorber spring compressor nut.
●Remove the front shock absorber spring compressor.
●Pull up the outer pipe and cover the outer pipe with
the bolt at the top.
●Install the front shock absorber (see “Installing Front
Shock Absorber”).
- 347 -
Disassembling Front Shock Absorber
●Remove the front shock absorber (see “Disassembling
Front Shock Absorber”).
●Discharge the shock absorber oil (see “Replacing
Shock Absorber Oil”).
●Clamp the inner pipe of shock absorber with the tool.
●Disassemble
Hexagon screw [C]
Washer [B]
Shock absorber mounting base [A]
Locking torque of hexagon screw at the bottom of

front shock absorber: 23 N·m
●Disassemble:
Disassemble the dust seal [14] from the outer pipe
using a small straight screwdriver
●Disassemble:
Disassemble the retainer ring using a small straight
screwdriver
- 348 -
●Separate the outer pipe [A] and inner pipe [B].
●Disassemble
Oil seal [A],
Retainer ring [B],
Dust seal [C]
●Replace the following parts with new ones:
Oil seal [A],
Retainer ring [B],
Dust seal [C]
●Install the following parts on the inner pipe [A].

Dust seal [B],
Retainer ring [C],
Oil seal [D],
Gasket [E]
●Insert the inner pipe into the outer pipe.

●After the gasket is installed, install the oil seal [A]
with the shock absorber oil seal installer [B].
Special Tool—Shock Absorber Oil Seal Installer:
●Install the retainer ring and dust seal in the outer pipe.
●Pour the shock absorber oil of the specified type (see
“Replacing Shock Absorber Oil”).
●Install the disassembled damper component on the
assembled inner and outer pipes.
- 349 -
Checking Inner Pipe and Outer Pipe
●Visually check the inner pipe [A] and replace it if
there is any damage.
●If there are cracks or rust on the inner pipe, the sharp
edge and tilted part can be worn with a millstone. The
sharp edges or raised parts will damage the oil seal.
★If the inner pipe cannot be maintained, please replace
it with a new one! The oil seal will be damaged after
the inner pipe is damaged, so the oil seal must be
replaced when maintaining or replacing the inner pipe.
Note
If the inner pipe is severely bent or wrinkled,
please replace it! The strength of inner pipe will
be reduced when correcting the inner pipe after
excessive bending.
●Assemble the inner and outer pipes and pull the inner
and outer pipes back and forth with hands to see
whether the inner pipe and outer pipe can operate
smoothly.
●If clamp stagnation is felt, the inner and outer pipes
must be replaced.
Warning
The straightened front shock absorber inner or
outer pipe will break down in the using process,
which will cause accidents. Therefore, the
seriously bent or damaged inner or outer pipe
must be replaced and the other pipe shall be
checked carefully before use.
Checking Dust Seal
●Check whether the dust seal [A] is corroded or
broken.
★If necessary, please replace the dust seal!
Checking Spring Tension

●The length of spring will be reduced after it is
weakened, so the state of spring can be checked by
checking its free length [A].
★If any shock absorber spring is shorter than the use
limit, it must be replaced! If the length of new spring
and the other shock absorber spring differs
considerably, the other spring must be replaced at the
same time so as to keep the balance of left and right
shock absorbers to ensure the stability of motorcycle.
Free length of spring

Standard: 245mm
Use limit: 80.9 mm
- 350 -
Rear Shock Absorber
Adjusting Spring Pre-tightening Force
●Remove the rear shock absorber from the frame (see
“Disassembling Rear Shock Absorber”).
●Loosen the lock nut [B], rotate the adjusting nut [A] and
loosen the spring.
Special Tool—Hook Wrench:
●Adjust the spring pre-tightening force, rotate the

adjusting nut [B] to the suitable position and tighten the
lock nut [A].
Spring length [C]
Pre-tightening Force Setting of Spring
Standard: spring length of 141mm
Applicable scope: allowable deformation of 48.2 and
maximum deformation of 60.2
○Standard adjusting nut setting for riders with normal
stature [weight of 68kg (150lb)] (without passengers or
accessories): the spring length is 136mm.
- 351 -
●In order to adjust the spring pre-tightening force, rotate the
adjusting nut [A] to the suitable position and tighten the lock
nut [B] with a hook wrench (the rear shock absorber is fixed
on the frame).
Special Tool—Hook Wrench
★If you feel that the spring is too soft or hard, please adjust
it!
Adjusting Spring
Spring Dampin Settin Load Road Spee
length g force g conditio d
n
Weak Soft Light Good Low
141mm
↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
80.8m Strong Hard Heav Bad High
m
y
Disassembling Rear Shock Absorber

●Disassemble:
Right Guard (see “Frame”—“Disassembling Right
Guard”),
Rear lower fender (see “Rear Swing
Arm”—“Disassembling Rear Lower Fender”)
●Lift the rear wheel above the ground with a jack.
Special Tool—Jack:
Jack Accessories:
●Remove the rear shock absorber clamp bolt [A] at the
upper side
- 352 -
●Remove the rear shock absorber clamp bolt [A] at the
lower side.
●Remove the shock absorber.
Installing Rear Shock Absorber

●Locking torque:
Clamp bolt above rear shock absorber: 50 N·m
Clamp bolt below rear shock absorber: 50 N·m
Checking Rear Shock Absorber
●Remove the rear shock absorber (see “Disassembling
Rear Shock Absorber”).
●Visually checking:
Whether the travel is smooth;
Whether there is oil leakage;
Whether there is crack or dent
★If the rear shock absorber is broken, please replace
it!
●Visually check the rubber bushing.
★If the rubber bushing is broken, please replace it!
- 353 -
Rear Swing Arm
Disassembling Swing Arm
●Lift the rear wheel above the ground with a jack.
Special Tool—Jack:
Jack Accessories:
●Disassemble:
Rear wheel (see “Wheel/Tire”—“Disassembling Rear
Wheel”),
●Disassemble:
Clamp bolt [A] at the lower side of rear shock absorber
[B] (see “Disassembling Rear Shock Absorber”)
●Remove the swing arm installing shaft nut [A].
●Pull out the installing shaft [A] from the right side to
the left side of motorcycle and remove the swing arm.
Installing Swing Arm

●Apply a large amount of grease on the edge of oil seal
[A].
- 354 -
●Put the installing shaft [A] into the frame from the left
side.
●Lock the swing arm installing shaft nut [A].

Locking torque of swing arm installing shaft nut:
108 N·m
Disassembling Swing Arm Bushing

●Disassemble:
Rear swing arm (see “Disassembling Rear Swing
Arm”),
Damper [A]
Middle shaft sleeve [B]
Checking Damper
Note
Do not remove the damper, otherwise it may be
damaged.
●Check the damper [A] installed inside the swing arm.
★ If there is any abnormal wear on the damper or
damage to the cushion rubber, please replace it as a
whole!
Checking Chain Guard

●See “Regular Maintenance”—“Checking Wear of Chain Guide”.
- 355 -
Control System
Exploded View of Control System
- 356 -
Torque
No. Chinese name and specification Remark
N·m kgf·m
1 Internal hexagon screw M6x35 10 1.0
2 Counterbalance
3 Counterbalance installing seat 10 1.0
4 Right grip component
5 Right combination switch
6 Right rearview mirror component
7 Throttle cable component
8 Handlebar
9 Left rearview mirror component
10 Left combination switch
11 Left handlebar grip
12 Clutch handle component
13 Clutch cable jacket
14 Clutch cable component
15 Nut M6 10 1.0
16 Internal hexagon screw M5x14 6 0.6
17 Adjusting solenoid
18 Slotted nut
19 Clutch switch
20 Left handle seat afterbody
21 Left handle seat screw
22 Left handle
23 Nut M6 10 1.0
AD: apply adhesive.
AL: lock the two clamp bolts twice alternately to ensure that the locking torque is even.
G: apply grease.
R: spare parts
- 357 -
Special Tools
Outer ring shaft of head pipe : Steering pipe bearing installing tool (diameter: 42.5):
Steering stem nut wrench: Mounting tooling adapter of steering stem bearing
φ41.5:
Complete set of tools used for mounting bearing: Outer ring screwdriver of head pipe: (diameter: 55):
- 358 -
Control System
Checking Control System
●See “Regular Maintenance”—“Checking Control System Clearance”.
Adjusting Control System
●See “Regular Maintenance”—“Adjusting Control System Clearance”
- 359 -
Steering Lever
Disassembling Steering Lever and Steering Lever Bearing
●Disassemble:
Handlebar (see “Disassembling Handlebar”),
Fairing (see “Frame”—“Disassembling Fairing”),
Front wheel (see “Wheel/Tire”—“Disassembling Front
Wheel”),
Front fender (see “Frame”—“Disassembling Front
Fender”),
Front shock absorber (see “Suspension
System”—“Disassembling Front Shock Absorber”),
●Disassemble:
Upper bracket lock nut [A]
Upper bracket [B],
●Remove the steering lever lock nut [A].

Special Tool—Steering Lever Nut Wrench
(Four-claw):
●Remove the steering lever nut [B].
(Seven-claw):
●Disassemble:
Steering lever [A],
Ball bearing inner ring and ball bearing at the upper
side
- 360 -
●To remove the ball bearing outer ring [A] which is
pressed into the head pipe, insert a rod [C] into the
inner cavity [D] of head pipe [B], and then knock both
sides of ball bearing alternately to remove the outer
ring.
Remark
○If any one of bearings on the upper and lower sides
of steering lever is damaged, it is recommended to
replace both bearings at the upper and lower sides
(including the bearing outer ring) with new ones.
●Remove the lower ball bearing inner ring (and oil seal
of inner ring) [A] pressed on the steering lever at the
[B] position with a chisel (it can be purchased).
Installing Steering Lever and Steering Lever Bearing

●Replace the bearing outer ring with a new one.
●Install the steering lever and steering lever bearing in
the head pipe simultaneously.
Special Tool—Special Tool for Head Pipe Outer
Ring Installation [A]:
Complete Set of Tools for Bearing Assembly:
●Apply the grease to the outer ring.
- 361 -
●Replace the bearing inner ring and oil seal with new
ones.
●Apply grease to oil seals.
●Cover the steering lever with oil seal [A], then install
the ball bearing inner ring [B] at the lower side and
apply grease to the steering lever.
Special Tool—Special Tool for Steering Pipe
Bearing Installation [D]:
●Install the ball bearing [A] at the lower side on the

steering lever.
●Apply grease to the following parts:
Inner and outer rings,
Ball bearings at the lower and upper sides
○The ball bearing at the lower side is the same as that
at the upper side.
●Insert the steering lever [A] into the head pipe and
then install the ball bearing [B].
●Installing:
Steering lever nut [C]
Locking nut [D]
- 362 -
●Install the bearing at the corresponding position
according to the following method.
○Lock the steering lever nut with a locking torque of
55 N·m first and then loosen it for a small circle (less
than one circle) to enable the nut to rotate slightly. And
then lock it with a steering lever nut wrench [A] in
accordance with the specified locking torque.
(Seven-claw):
Locking torque of steering lever nut: 23 N·m
●Tighten the steering lever lock nut manually until the

lock nut touches the steering lever nut.
●Tighten the steering lever lock nut.
(Four-claw):
Locking torque of steering lever nut: 23 N·m
●Install the upper bracket and tighten the steering lever

lock bolt.
●Install the front shock absorber (see “Suspension
System”—“Installing Front Shock Absorber”).
Remark
○Lock the front shock absorber lock bolt at the upper
side, then lock the upper bracket lock nut and lock the
front shock absorber lock bolt at the lower side finally.
○Lock two front shock absorber lock bolts at the lower
side twice alternately to ensure that the locking torque
is even.
Locking torque:
Front shock absorber lock bolt (at the upper side):
22 N·m
Upper bracket lock nut: 78 N·m
Front shock absorber lock bolt (at the lower side):
22 N·m
Warning
Please connect the cable, wire harness and hose
properly (see “Appendix”—“Winding Method of
Cable, Wire and Hose”), otherwise the normal
rotation of handlebar will be affected.
- 363 -
Steering Lever Bearing Lubrication
●See “Regular Maintenance”—“Steering Lever Bearing
Lubrication”.
Checking Deformation of Steering Lever

●If the steering lever is disassembled or the steering
lever cannot be adjusted for smooth rotation, please
check the straightness of steering lever!
★If the steering lever [A] is bent, please replace it!
- 364 -
Handlebar
Disassembling Handlebar
●Disassemble:
Left rearview mirror [A]
Clutch handle lock bolt [B]
Clutch handle [C]
Left combination switch [D]
Handle counterbalance [E]
Left handle grip [F]
●Disassemble:
Right rearview mirror [A]
Lock bolt of master cylinder of front hydraulic brake
[B]
Master cylinder of front hydraulic brake [C]
Right combination switch [D]
Handle counterbalance [E]
Throttle handle [F]
●Remove the bolt [A] of handlebar installing seat.

●Remove all the handlebar installing seats [B] and
handlebars [C].
- 365 -
Installing Handlebar
●Install the handlebar installing seat and handlebar on
the upper bracket.
●Tighten the bolt of handlebar installing seat.
Remark
○Lock the front handlebar installing seat bolt [A]
and then lock the other one [B].
○Lock two handlebar installing seat bolts twice
alternately to ensure that the locking torque is even.
Locking torque of handlebar installing seat bolt: 25
N·m
●Installing:
Front hydraulic brake master cylinder [C] (see “Master
cylinder”—“Installing Front Master cylinder”))
Right combination switch [D]
Throttle handle [F]
Throttle cable [D]
●Apply the thread fastening glue to the thread of
handlebar counterbalance bolt and then tighten the bolt.
●Installing:
Counterbalance [E]
Right rearview mirror [F]
●Installing:
Clutch handle.
Remark
○Lock the upper handlebar installing seat bolt [A]
and then lock the other one [B].
- 366 -
●Installing:
Left handle [A]
Left combination switch [C]
●Apply the thread fastening glue to the thread of
handlebar counterbalance bolt and then tighten the bolt.
●Installing:
Counterbalance [B]
Left rearview mirror [D]
Locking torque of combination switch fastening
screw: 3.5 N·m
- 367 -
Frame
Exploded View of Frame
- 368 -
Torque
N·m kgf·m
1 Frame welding component
2 Bolt M8×70 25 2.5 S
3 Bolt M10×1.25×90 50 5.0
4 Left front hanging plate of engine
5 Right front hanging plate of engine
6 Self-locking nut M8 25 2.5 AL、S
7 Self-locking nut M10×1.25 50 5.0 AL、S
8 Front guard mounting base
9 Bolt M6×12 10 1.0
10 Bolt M10×1.25×110 50 5.0
11 Bolt M8×65 25 2.5
12 Upper hanging plate of engine
13 Side stand welding component
14 Side stand spring
15 Side stand mounting bolt 50 5.0
16 Nut M10×1.25 50 5.0
17 Air filter mounting seat
18 Bolt M8×1.25×30 25 2.5 AL、S
19 Spring gasket 8
20 Rubber washer lining
21 Rubber ring
22 Guard rubber washer
23 Seat lock mounting base
24 Bolt M6×30 10 1.0
25 Washer
27 Shaft sleeve
28 Clamp
29 Voltage regulator mounting base
30 Clutch cable clamp component
31 Frame brandname
32 Brandname rivet 3×6
33 Clutch clamp component
AL: tighten the clamp bolt twice alternately in accordance with the higher locking torque.
G: apply grease.
R: replace parts.
S: obey the specified tightening order.
- 369 -
Exploded View of Left Pedal
- 370 -
Torque
N·m kgf·m
1 Left front pedal bracket
2 Left rear pedal bracket
3 Bolt M8×1.25×30 22 2.2
4 Bolt M8×1.25×40 22 2.2
5 Bolt M8×1.25×35 22 2.2
6 Pedal mounting pin
7 Left front pedal component
8 Limiting spring
9 Pedal ball
10 Bushing
11 Pedal limiting plate
12 Retainer φ5
14 Left rear pedal
15 Pedal spring
16 Pedal mounting plate
17 Gearshift mounting bolt
18 Gearshift pedal component
19 Screw M6×25 10 1.0
20 M6 left joint
21 Self-locking nut M6
22 Left nut M6
23 Gearshift rod
24 Nut M6-8-ZG
25 Joint
26 Gearshift mounting base
27 Bolt M6×20 10 1.0
G: apply grease.
R: spare parts
- 371 -
Exploded View of Right Pedal
- 372 -
Torque
N·m kgf·m
1 Right front pedal bracket
2 Right rear pedal bracket
3 Bolt M8×1.25×30 22 2.2
4 Bolt M8×1.25×40 22 2.2
5 Bolt M6×20 10 1.0
7 Right front pedal component
8 Limiting spring
9 Pedal ball
10 Bushing
11 Pedal limiting plate
12 Retainer φ5
13 Inner hexagon screw M6×35 10 1.0
14 Rear brake pedal mounting screw 45 4.5
15 Self-lubricating bushing
16 Washer
17 Brake pedal
18 Joint M6
20 Upper spring pin
21 Brake pedal reset spring
22 Lower spring pin
23 Eccentric push rod
25 Right rear pedal
26 Pedal spring
27 Pedal mounting plate
G: apply grease.
R: spare parts
- 373 -
Exploded View of Muffler
- 374 -
Torque
N·m kgf·m
1 Exhaust pipe gasket component
2 Oxygen sensor
3 Graphite spacer
4 Clamp
5 Bolt M8×35
6 Master cylinder component II
7 Slave cylinder component II
8 Bolt M8×20 22 2.2
13 Spring gasket 8
R: spare parts
- 375 -
Exploded View of Front Fender
- 376 -
Torque
N·m kgf·m
1 Front fender
2 Left cowling cover of front fender
3 Right cowling cover of front fender
4 Stainless steel screw M6×15.2
5 Grey nylon gasket 6
6 Stainless steel screw M6×20
7 Speedometer cable clamp component
8 Guard mounting bushing
9 Hydraulic pipe clamp component
10 Self-tapping screw ST4.2×13
11 Card ST4.2
- 377 -
Exploded View of Rear Fender
- 378 -
Torque
N·m kgf·m
1 Rear fender
2 Front of rear fender
3 Screw M6×14
4 Card nut M6
5 Battery retainer component
Mounting seat welding component of rear
6
upper fender
7 Screw M6×35 10 1.0
8 Washer 6
9 Spring washer 6
10 Rear upper fender collar
12 Rear license plate mounting plate
13 Rear license plate
15 Rear reflector component
16 License plate light
17 Rear lower fender
18 Bolt M6×19
19 Left connecting plate of rear lower fender
20 Right connecting plate of rear lower fender
21 Card nut M6
22 Rear lower license plate bracket
23 Screw M6×20
24 Washer φ6
26 Front reflector
27 Nut M5
28 Rear reflector
29 Rear license plate light
- 379 -
Exploded View of Cowling
- 380 -
Torque
N·m kgf·m
1 Cowling
2 Cowling cover
4 Sponge bar 1
5 Sponge bar 2
6 Left cowling mounting plate
7 Right cowling mounting plate
8 Inner guard of cowling
9 Front left turn signal light
10 Front right turn signal light
11 Stainless steel screw M6×30
12 Guard collar
14 Upper mounting plate of headlight
15 Bolt M6×20
16 Clamp
17 Washer
18 Bolt M6×16
19 Instrument assembly
20 Headlight
22 Guard mounting collar
23 Crystal label of cowling
- 381 -
Exploded View of Fuel Tank Guard
- 382 -
Torque
N·m kgf·m
1 Middle guard of fuel tank
2 Screw M6×14
3 Fuel tank lock mounting plate
4 Left guard of fuel tank
5 Right guard of fuel tank
6 Tapping screw ST4.2×10
7 Decorative screw M6×25
8 Gasket
9 Rubber cover of front turn signal light bracket
10 Card ST4.2
12 Left front guard of fuel tank
13 Right front guard of fuel tank
14 Connecting plate of left guard of fuel tank
15 Connecting plate of right guard of fuel tank
16 Front decorative cover
- 383 -
Exploded View of Seat Cushion and Guard
- 384 -
Torque
N·m kgf·m
1 Left guard
2 Left guard
3 Screw M6×14
4 Card nut M6
5 Left tail cover
6 Right tail cover
7 Connecting plate between left and right tail covers
8 Decorative cover
10 Decorative cover of left guard
11 Decorative cover of right guard
13 Left decorative plate
14 Right decorative plate
15 Inner hexagon screw M6×14
16 Front seat component
17 Rear seat component
18 Bolt M6×19
19 Collar
20 Taillight
21 Screw M6×12
22 Rear left turn signal light
23 Rear right turn signal light
24 Inner hexagon screw with boss M6×15
Crystal label of connecting plate between left and

25 right caps
- 385 -
Exploded View of Engine
- 386 -
Torque
N·m kgf·m
1 Engine
2 Fuel injector
3 Injector clip
4 Injector seat
5 Intake temperature pressure sensor
6 Inner hexagon screw M6×20 10 1.0
7 Temperature Sensor
8 Throttle body assembly
9 Bolt M6×25 10 1.0
10 Left rear cover assembly
- 387 -
Seat Cushion
Disassembling Seat Cushion
●Insert the ignition switch key [A] into the seat cushion
lock, turn the key counterclockwise, open the seat
cushion [B] and lift up to remove the front seat cushion.
●Disassemble:
Screw [A]
Front seat cushion [B]
Installing Seat Cushion

●Install it in reverse order of disassembly.
●Press down the rear part of seat cushion until the
click sound is generated by the seat cushion lock.
- 388 -
Cowling
Disassembling Cowling
●Disassemble:
Screw [A]
●Disassemble:
Screw [A]
●Pull out the joint of cable [A]
- 389 -
●Take off the cowling, headlight and instrument
combination.
●Disassemble:
Front right turn signal light [A]
Mounting plate of right cowling [B]
Cowling cover[C]
Cowling [D]
Headlight[E]
Instrument [F]
Inner protective cover of cowling [G]
Upper mounting plate of headlight [H]
Mounting plate of left cowling [J]
Front left turn signal light [K]
Installing Cowling
Mounting bolt of upper bracket of headlight: 10 N·m
- 390 -
Guard
Disassembling Left Guard
●Disassemble front seat cushion (see “Seat
Cushion”—“Disassembling Front Seat Cushion”)
●Disassemble:
Screw [A]
●Disassemble:
Screw [A]
Left guard [B]
Installing Left Guard

- 391 -
Disassembling Right Guard
●Disassemble the front seat cushion (see “Seat
Cushion”—“Disassembling Seat Cushion”)
●Disassemble:
Screw [A]
●Disassemble:
Screw [A]
Right guard [B]
Installing Right Guard

- 392 -
Rear Tail Cover
Disassembling Tail Cover
●Disassemble the seat cushion (see “Seat
●Disassemble the left guard (see
“Guard”—“Disassembling Left Guard”)
●Disassemble the right guard (see
“Guard”—“Disassembling Right Guard”)
Disassemble:
Screw [A]
Right tail cover [B]
Right turn signal light [C]
Card nut [D]
Connecting plate of left and right tail covers [E]
Left tail cover [F]
Left turn signal light [G]
Tail light [H]
Installing Tail Cover

- 393 -
Rear Fender
Disassembling Rear Fender
●Disassemble the screw [A] and then remove the rear
fender bracket from the frame
●Unplug the rear turn signal light and rear license plate
cable [C] connector
●Disassemble:
Screw [A]
Self-tapping screw [B]
Rear fender bracket [C]
Rear license plate light [D]
Rear license plate bracket [E]
Rear fender [F]
Rear reflector [G]
Installing Rear Fender

Torque of rear fender bracket fastening screw: 10

N·m
Torque of rear license bracket fastening screw: 10
N·m
- 394 -
Front Fender
Disassembling Front Fender
●Disassemble the screw [A] and remove the front
fender from the front shock absorber
●Disassemble:
Self-tapping screw [A]
Card [B]
Front fender [C]
Left decorative cover of front fender [D]
Right decorative cover of front fender [E]
Installing Front Fender

Torque of front fender fastening screw: 10 N·m
- 395 -
Fuel Tank Guard and Fairing
Disassembling Fuel Tank Guard
●Disassemble the seat cushion (see “Seat
●Disassemble the fuel tank (see “Fuel
Tank”—“Disassembling Fuel Tank”)
●Disassemble
Middle guard of fuel tank [A]
Left front guard of fuel tank [B]
Left guard of fuel tank [C]
Right guard of fuel tank [D]
Right left guard of fuel tank [E]
Connecting plate of left guard of fuel tank [F]
Front decorative cover [G]
Connecting plate of right guard of fuel tank [H]
Mounting plate of fuel tank lock [I]
Installing Fuel Tank Guard

- 396 -
Frame
Disassembling Frame
●Disassemble:
Seat cushion (see “Seat Cushion”—“Disassembling
Seat Cushion”)
Fuel tank (see “Fuel Tank”—“Disassembling Fuel
Tank”)
Guard (see “Guard”—“Disassembling Guard”)
Tail cover (see “Tail Cover”— “Disassembling Tail
Cover”)
Rear fender (see “Rear Fender” — “Disassembling
Rear Fender”)
Rear wheel (see “Rear Wheel” — “Disassembling Rear
Wheel”)
Front wheel (see “Front Wheel” — “Disassembling
Front Wheel”)
Front fork (see “Disassembling Front Fork”)
Muffler (see “Disassembling Muffler”)
Rear swing arm (see “Rear Swing
Arm”—“Disassembling Rear Swing Arm”)
Engine (see “Disassembling Engine”)
Side stand (see “Seat Cushion”—“Disassembling
Guard”)
Front and rear left pedals (see “Disassembling Front
Left Pedal” and “Disassembling Rear Left Pedal”)
Front and rear right pedals (see “Disassembling Front
Right Pedal” and “Disassembling Rear Right Pedal”)
●Disassemble the cables and other electric parts.
Installing Frame
Checking Frame
●Visually check whether there is crack, depression,
bending or deformation on the frame [A].
★If the frame is damaged, please replace it!
Warning
The maintained frame will go wrong in the using
process, which may cause accidents, so please
replace the frame if the crack, depression,
bending or deformation occurs on it!
- 397 -
Side Stand
Disassembling Side Stand
●Lift the rear wheel above the ground by using the
bracket.
●Disassemble:
Side stand spring [A]
Nut [B],
Side stand bolt [C]
Side stand [D]
Installing Side Stand

●Apply the grease to the moving part of side stand [D].
●Apply the thread fastening glue to the thread of side
stand bolt [C].
●Tighten the bolt and lock it with the nut [B].
Locking torque:
Side stand bolt [A]: 50 N·m
Side stand bolt lock nut [B]: 45 N·m
●Install the spring [D] to enable the longer end to face
up.
- 398 -
Left Front Pedal
Disassembling Left Front Pedal
●Disassemble:
Screw [A]
Remove shift shaft rocker [B]
●Disassemble:
Screw [A]
Left front pedal bracket [B]
●Disassemble
Left front pedal bracket [A]
Left front pedal [B]
Front pedal spring [C]
Steel ball [D]
Split retainer [E]
Pedal installing plate [F]
Pedal installing bushing [G]
Pedal mounting pin [H]
Screw [J]
Shift component [K]
Mounting bolt [L] of shift pedal component
Shift shaft rocker M]
Shift adjusting rod [N]
Nut [P]
- 399 -
Installing Left Front Pedal
●Before installation, apply the grease to the pedal
installing bushing.
Locking torque:
Mounting bolt of shift pedal component: 45 N·m
Mounting scew of shift adjusting rod: 10 N·m
Mounting scew of left front pedal bracket: 22N·m
Mounting bolt of shift shaft rocker: 10 N·m
- 400 -
Left Rear Pedal
Disassembling Left Rear Pedal
Disassemble:
Screw [A]
Left rear pedal bracket [B]
●Disassemble:
Pedal mounting pin [A]
Left rear pedal bracket [B]
Left rear pedal [C]
Pedal ball [D]
Retainer [E]
Pedal installing plate [J]
Pedal Spring [G]
Installing Left Rear Pedal

mounting pin.
Locking torque:
Mounting screw of left rear pedal bracket: 22N·m
- 401 -
Front Right Pedal
Disassembling Front Right Pedal
●Disassemble the right front pedal bracket (see
“Brake”—“Disassembling Brake Pedal”)
●Disassemble:
Right front pedal component [B]
Right front pedal bracket [C]
Pedal installing bushing [D]
Pedal installing plate [E]
Split retainer [F]
Steel ball [G]
Front pedal spring [D]
Installing Front Right Pedal

installing bushing.
●。Install it in reverse order of disassembly.
Locking torque:
Mounting screw of right front pedal bracket: 22 N·m
- 402 -
Rear Right Pedal
Disassembling Rear Right Pedal
●Disassemble:
Screw [A]
Right rear pedal bracket [B]
●Disassemble:
Screw [A]
Rear master pump [B]
●Disassemble:
Right rear pedal [B]
Right rear pedal bracket [C]
Pedal ball [D]
Retainer [E]
Pedal mounting plate [F]
Pedal spring [G]
Installing Rear Right Pedal

mounting pin.
Mounting screw of rear master pump: 10 N·m
Mounting screw of right rear pedal bracket: 22 N·m
- 403 -
Muffler
Warning
Do not disassemble the muffler when the
engine is heated to avoid burn. Disassemble the
muffler when it is cooled.
Disassembling Muffler
Loosen the mounting bolt [A] of clamp [B]
●Disassemble:
Screw [A]
Auxiliary cylinder component II of muffler [B]
●Disassemble:
Oxygen sensor [A]
- 404 -
●Disassemble:
Holder nut of front exhaust pipe[A].
●Disassemble:
Screw [A] (two sides)
Master cylinder component II [B]
- 405 -
Installing Muffler
●Replace the exhaust pipe washer [A] with a new
one.

Locking torque:
Mounting nut of frong exhaust pipe: 22N·m
Mounting bolt of master cylinder component II: 22
N·m
Mounting bolt of auxiliary cylinder component II
of muffler: 22 N·m
Clamp fastening bolt: 22 N·m
- 406 -
Disassembling/Installing Engine
Exploded View of Engine Disassembly and Installation
- 407 -
Torque
N·m kgf·m
1 Frame welding component
2 Upper hanging plate of engine
3 Self-locking nut M8 22 2.2 S
4 Self-locking nut M10×1.25 45 4.5 S
5 Right front hanging plate of engine
6 Left front hanging plate of engine
7 Engine
8 Bolt M8×70 22 2.2 S、M
9 Bolt M10×1.25×90 45 4.5 S、M
10 Bolt M10×1.25×110 45 4.5 S、M
11 Bolt M8×65 22 2.2 S、M
M: apply the molybdenum disulphide grease.
R: replace parts
S: obey the specified tightening order.
- 408 -
Disassembling Engine
●Support the rear part of swing arm with a bracket.
●Grasp the brake lever slowly and bind it with a tape.
Warning
The brake lever must be grasped when
disassembling the engine, otherwise the
motorcycle will topple, which will cause accidents
and personal injury.
●Drain the oil (see “Regular
Maintenance”—“Replacing Oil”),
●Drain the coolant (see “Regular
Maintenance”—“Replacing Coolant”);
●Disassemble:
Seat cushion (see “Frame”—“Disassembling Seat
Cushion”)
Guard (see “Frame”—“Disassembling Guard”),
Fuel tank (see “Fuel Injection System
(EFI)”—“Disassembling Fuel Tank”),
Muffler (see “Frame”—“Disassembling Muffler”),
Drive chain (see “Drive”—“Disassembling Drive
Chain”)
Drain the oil (see “Regular Maintenance”—“Replacing
Oil”),
●Loosen the nut [A] and remove the clutch cable
connector [B]
●Loosen the nut [A] and remove the throttle cable

connector [B]
- 409 -
●Loosen the clamp [C] at the connection position of
exhaust pipe of air filter [A] and throttle [B]
Remove the oil-passing bolt [A] of oil cooling pipe [B]
●Disassemble
Bolt [A]
Shift rod rocker [B]
- 410 -
●Disconnect the connectors of cables [A]
●Support the engine using a suitable bracket and keep

the engine balanced.
●Loosen:
Mounting nuts at the engine and upper hanging plate
[A]
Note:
Do not remove the nut
- 411 -
●Loosen:
Front mounting nut of engine [A]
Note:
●Loosen:
Mounting nut at front hanging plate of engine [A]
Note:
●Loosen:
Rear upper mounting nut at engine [A]
Note:
- 412 -
●Loosen:
Rear lower mounting nut at engine [A]
Note:
●Remove:
Mounting bolt at front hanging plate of engine [A]

Front mounting bolt of engine [B]
Front hanging plate of engine [C]
●Remove:
Remove rear upper mounting bolt of engine [A]
- 413 -
●Remove:
Remove rear lower mounting bolt of engine [A]
●Remove
Mounting bolt at upper hanging plate of engine [A]
Upper mounting bolt of engine [B]
Mounting bolt at upper hanging plate of engine [C]
●利用架子取出发动机。Remove the engine by using

the bracket.
- 414 -
Installing Engine
●Support the engine with a suitable bracket.
●Install:
Mounting bolt at upper hanging plate of engine [A]
Upper hanging plate of engine [B]
Nut [C]
Note
Do not tighten the nut [C].
●Lift engine [C]

●Install:
Uppe mounting bolt of engine [A]
Nut [B]
Engine [C]
Note
Do not tighten the nut [B].
●Install
Rear mounting bolt of engine [A]
Rear mounting nut of engine [B]
Front mounting bolt of engine [C]
Front mounting nut of engine [D]
Mounting bolt at front hanging plate of engine [E]
Mounting nut at front hanging plate of engine [F]
Left front hanging plate of engine [G]
Right front hanging plate of engine [H]
- 415 -
- 416 -
●Fasten the bolt, screw or nut according to the
following steps:
○Step 1: fasten the mounting bolt and nut of engine
according to the right figure;
○Step 2: lock the mounting bolt and nut of front
hanging plate of engine;
○Step 3: lock the mounting bolt and nut of upper
hanging plate of engine;
○Step 4: mark each clamp bolt, screw and nut which
have been locked to their specified torques.
Remark
○Fasten the engine mounting bolt, screw or nut in
order by three times
○Locking torque:
Rear mounting bolt of engine: 45N·m
Upper mounting bolt of engine: 22N·m
Front mounting bolt of engine: 45N·m
Mounting screw of front hanging plate of engine: 22
N·m
Mounting screw of upper hanging plate of engine:
22 N·m
●Arrange the lead, cable and hose properly (see
“Appendix”—“Winding Method of Cable, Wire and
Hose”).
●Adjust:
○Throttle cable (see “Regular
Maintenance”—“Checking Throttle Control System”),
○Drive chain (see “Regular Maintenance”—“Checking
Slackness of Drive Chain”)
●Fill the engine with oil (see “Regular
Maintenance”—“Replacing Oil”).
- 417 -
Chapter VI Electrical System
Contents
Precautions................................................................................................................................................. - 421 -
Special Tools .............................................................................................................................................. - 423 -
Electrical Wiring ........................................................................................................................................ - 424 -
Wiring Inspection .............................................................................................................................. - 424 -
Charging System........................................................................................................................................ - 425 -
Circuit Diagram of Charging System ................................................................................................ - 425 -
Battery ............................................................................................................................................... - 426 -
Disassembling Battery ............................................................................................................... - 426 -
Battery Installation..................................................................................................................... - 427 -
Battery Activation ...................................................................................................................... - 427 -
Initial Charge ............................................................................................................................. - 429 -
Charging State Inspection .......................................................................................................... - 430 -
Magneto ............................................................................................................................................. - 430 -
Disassembling Magneto............................................................................................................. - 431 -
Checking Magneto ..................................................................................................................... - 432 -
Installing Magneto ..................................................................................................................... - 434 -
Rectifier ............................................................................................................................................. - 435 -
Disassebling rectifier: ................................................................................................................ - 435 -
Main Wiring Terminal Circuit Inspection .................................................................................. - 435 -
Rectifier Inspection .................................................................................................................... - 435 -
Rectifier Installation .................................................................................................................. - 436 -
Ignition System .......................................................................................................................................... - 437 -
Circuit Diagram of Ignition System................................................................................................... - 437 -
Operation Precautions ........................................................................................................................ - 438 -
Crankshaft Sensor .............................................................................................................................. - 439 -
Disassembling Crankshaft Position Sensor ............................................................................... - 439 -
Check ......................................................................................................................................... - 439 -
Ignition Coil ....................................................................................................................................... - 439 -
Disassembling Ignition Coil: ..................................................................................................... - 439 -
Checking Ignition Coil............................................................................................................... - 440 -
Installing ignition coil ................................................................................................................ - 440 -
Spark Plug.......................................................................................................................................... - 440 -
Checking Spark Plug ................................................................................................................. - 440 -
Check ......................................................................................................................................... - 441 -
IC Igniter Inspection .................................................................................................................. - 441 -
ECU Group ........................................................................................................................................ - 442 -
Ignition System Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... - 443 -
Starter System ............................................................................................................................................ - 444 -
Circuit Diagram of Starter System..................................................................................................... - 444 -
- 418 -
Starter Motor ...................................................................................................................................... - 445 -
Disassembling Starter Motor ..................................................................................................... - 445 -
Checking Starter Motor ............................................................................................................. - 445 -
Carbon Brush Inspection ........................................................................................................... - 446 -
Commutator Cleaning and Inspection ....................................................................................... - 446 -
Carbon Brush Lead Inspection .................................................................................................. - 447 -
Right-hand End Cover Assembly Inspection ............................................................................. - 447 -
Starter Relay ...................................................................................................................................... - 448 -
Disassembling Starter Relay ...................................................................................................... - 448 -
Checking Starter Relay .............................................................................................................. - 448 -
Installing Starter Relay .............................................................................................................. - 449 -
Lighting System ......................................................................................................................................... - 450 -
Headlight ........................................................................................................................................... - 450 -
Tail light ............................................................................................................................................. - 450 -
Turn Signal Light ............................................................................................................................... - 451 -
License Plate Light ............................................................................................................................ - 451 -
Instrument .................................................................................................................................................. - 452 -
Disassembling Instrument.................................................................................................................. - 452 -
Instrument and Indicator Light .......................................................................................................... - 452 -
Status Indicator Light................................................................................................................. - 453 -
Function Buttons ........................................................................................................................ - 453 -
Tachometer: ............................................................................................................................... - 454 -
All / part of kilometer counters .................................................................................................. - 454 -
Speedometer .............................................................................................................................. - 454 -
Digital clock (8): ........................................................................................................................ - 454 -
Fuel gauge (9): ........................................................................................................................... - 454 -
Switch, Sensor and Other Parts ................................................................................................................. - 455 -
Power Lock Switch ............................................................................................................................ - 455 -
Disassembling power lock ......................................................................................................... - 455 -
Power Lock Inspection .............................................................................................................. - 455 -
Handle Switch.................................................................................................................................... - 456 -
Switch State (Non-Europe) ........................................................................................................ - 456 -
Switch State (Europe) ................................................................................................................ - 457 -
Checking the time to turn on brake lamp ........................................................................................... - 459 -
Adjsuting the time to turn on brake lamp .......................................................................................... - 459 -
Switch Inspection............................................................................................................................... - 459 -
Rear Brake Lamp Switch Connection........................................................................................ - 459 -
Side Stand Switch Connection ................................................................................................... - 459 -
Oil Level Sensor ................................................................................................................................ - 460 -
Disassemble Oil Level Sensor ................................................................................................... - 460 -
Checking Oil Level Sensor ........................................................................................................ - 460 -
Installing Oil Level Sensor ........................................................................................................ - 461 -
Horn ................................................................................................................................................... - 462 -
Disassembling Horn................................................................................................................... - 462 -
Checking Horn ........................................................................................................................... - 462 -
Installing Horn ........................................................................................................................... - 462 -
- 419 -
Fuse .................................................................................................................................................... - 463 -
Disassmbling Fuse ..................................................................................................................... - 463 -
Installing Fuse ............................................................................................................................ - 463 -
Checking Fuse ........................................................................................................................... - 463 -
- 420 -
Precautions
Many important precautions must be understood when maintaining the electrical system. Learn and follow all of
the following rules.
 Do not reverse the positive and negative electrodes of storage battery, otherwise the diode of electrical
component will be burned out.
 Check the battery state before checking other parts of electrical system. To carry out the accurate electrical
system test, the battery must be fully charged.
 Electrical components shall not be beat with hammers or fell on a hard surface. This impact may damage the
electrical components.
 To prevent the electrical components from being damaged, do not disconnect the battery cable or any other
electrical connection when the ignition switch is on or the engine is running.
 The current is larger, so do not press the start button all the time when the starter motor does not rotate,
otherwise the current may burn out the starter motor coil.
 Be careful not to short-circuit the cable between positive electrode of storage battery and ground wire of
frame
 Sometimes a failure may involve a project, and sometimes it may involve all projects. Do not replace the
defective part when the exact fault cause is not found. If the fault is caused by other causes, the repairing or
replacement must be carried out immediately, otherwise the newly replaced part will be damaged again
easily.
 Make sure that all circuit connectors are clean and tight and check whether there are burning or wear signs on
the wires. The broken wires and poor contact will affect the electrical system operation.
 Measure the coil and winding resistance after the components are cooled (under indoor temperature)
- 421 -
Item Standard
Battery
Type Maintenance-free storage battery
Model YTX7L-BS
Capacity 12 V 6 Ah
Voltage 12V
Charging system
Type Three-phase AC
AC generator output voltage 5000 r/min 55V or above when it is 5000 r/min (rpm)
Stator coil resistance 0.05-0.5Ω (normal temperature of 20℃)
Charging voltage 14.2 -15.2 V
(Voltage regulator/rectifier output voltage)
Ignition system
Crankshaft position sensor resistance 130-170Ω
Ignition coil:
Primary coil resistance 3.6-4.4Ω
Secondary coil resistance 8.5-11.5kΩ
Primary voltage peak 72 V or above
Spark plug:
Type CR8E
Clearance 0.6 -0.7 mm
Electric starting system
Starter motor:
Carbon brush length 10 mm (service life: 5.0 mm)
Commutator diameter 28 mm (service life: 27 mm)
Meter, gauge, indicating device
oltage of velocity sensor power About 12 V
Switch and sensor
Rear brake lamp switch action clearance ON after the pedal travel is about 20mm
Engine oil voltage switch connector Engine stop: ON
Engine running: OFF
Water temperature sensor resistance In the text
Oil level sensor resistance:
Full oil level 9 -11 Q
Empty oil level 213 -219 Q
- 422 -
Special Tools
Multimeter: Needle ammeter probe:
- 423 -
Electrical Wiring
Wiring Inspection
●Visually check the melting, wear and other phenomena of
wires.
★If the wire is broken, replace the damaged wire.
●Pull out each connector [A] to check corrosion, dirt and
damage.
★If the connectors are corroded or soiled, carefully clean
them. If the connectors are damaged, replace them.
●Check whether the connection of circuit is normal.
○Find the power wire terminal which may have problems
by using the wiring diagram.
○Connect the multimeter between the power wire terminals.
Special Tool—Multimeter:
○Set the scope of multimeter as ×1Ω and read the multimeter readings.
★If the multimeter does not have readings and 0 Ω is displayed, there are problems in the power wire. If
necessary, replace the lead or main cable [B].
- 424 -
Charging System
Circuit Diagram of Charging System
- 425 -
Battery
Disassembling Battery
●Close the power lock
●Disassemble the seat cushion (see “Finished
Motorcycle—Seat Cushion” chapter)
●Disassemble
Upper cover of air filter [A]
●Remove the negative electrode of battery [A]

* Note
○Make sure to disconnect the negative electrode (-)
of cable
●Remove the positive electrode of battery [A]
- 426 -
●Remove the storage battery bracket [A]
●Remove the battery [B] from the battery fixing
bracket
Battery Installation
●Install the battery into the bracket
●Connect the negative (-) cable to the battery
●Apply a thin layer of grease on the terminal to prevent
corrosion
●Connect the position (+) cable to the battery
●Cover the (+) terminal with a red cover [A]
●Install the battery bracket on the battery
●Connect the connector
●Connect the negative electrode (-) cable to the frame
●Install:
Upper cover of air filter
Seat cushion
Battery Activation
●Filling Electrolyte
○Make sure that the model [A] marked on the
electrolyte bottle matches with the model [B] of the
battery. These models must be the same.
Storage battery model: YTX7L-BS
Warning
Make sure to use the electrolyte of the model
same as that marked on the storage battery,
because the volume and density of used
electrolyte are different if the storage battery
models are different. This is to prevent that the
storage battery life is shortened and the storage
battery performance is reduced due to filling too
much electrolyte.
- 427 -
Warning
Do not tear the aluminum sealing fin [A] from the
filling port [B] before use. Make sure to use the
special electrolyte storage container to guarantee
that the electrolyte of correct volume is filled
○Place the battery on the horizontal plane
○Check whether there are peeling, crack or hole on the
sealing fin
○Disassemble the sealing strip
* Note
○The battery is vacuum sealed. If the sealing fin
enables the air to be leaked into the battery, the first
charging time may be longer.
●Remove the electrolyte bottle from the plastic bag
●Remove the strip covers [A] from the container, place
them aside and then use them to seal the battery.
*Note
○Do not puncture or open the sealing layer [B] of
electrolyte bottle. Do not attempt to separate the
individual liquid storage cavitys.
●Topple the electrolyte bottle and put six sealing

grooves in the filling port of battery. Keep the
electrolyte bottle level and push it down to puncture the
sealing of all six liquid storage cavitys. As the sealed
liquid storage cavitys are inserted into the filling port,
you will see that there will be rising bubbles in the
liquid storage cavitys.
* Note
○Do not tilt the electrolyte bottle
●Check the electrolyte flow

★If there are no rising bubbles in the filling port [A],
or if the electrolyte is not completely injected into the
storage battery, tap the electrolyte bottle [B] several
times.
●Keep the electrolyte bottle at this position for 20
minutes or above. Do not remove the container from
the battery before it becomes empty, because all the
electrolyte in the container is required for normal
operation of battery.
- 428 -
Warning
If the electrolyte in the electrolyte bottle is not
injected into the storage battery completely, the
service life of storage battery may be shortened.
20 minutes are needed when the electrolyte is
injected into the storage battery completely, so do
not remove the electrolyte bottle in advance.
●Disassemble the electrolyte bottle from the battery
lightly
●Let the battery stand for 60 minutes before charging
to enable the electrolyte to penetrate into the metal
plate so as to reach the optimum performance.
* Note
○If the battery is charged immediately after filling,
the battery life will be shortened. Enable it to stand
for at least 60 minutes after filling.
Initial Charge
●Lightly put the strap [A] cover on the filling port and
do not press it in completely
●The newly activated maintenance-free storage battery
needs the initial charge
Standard charge: 0.9A × 5-10 hours
* Note
○The charging rate depends on the battery storage
time and temperature and the type of used charger
○After the initial charge, let the battery stand for
30 minutes, and then check the voltage with a
voltmeter.
If the voltage does not reach at least 12.6V, repeat
the charging cycle.
●After the charging is completed, vigorously press the

strap cover [A] with both hands to make it enter into
the battery (do not thump or beat it). After it is installed
properly, the strap cover and the top of battery will be
parallel.
Warning
Once the strip cover is inserted into the battery,
do not remove the cover and do not add water
or electrolyte to the battery.
* Note
○To ensure the maximum battery life and higher
customer satisfaction, it is recommended to carry
out a load test of 15 seconds for the battery at
three times the ampere-hour rate of battery. Check
the voltage again and repeat the charging cycle
- 429 -
and load test if the voltage is less than 12.6V. If the
voltage is still below 12.6V, the battery is defective.
Charging State Inspection
●The battery can be checked by measuring the battery
terminal voltage with a voltmeter [A].
●Disassemble the battery
●Measure the battery terminal voltage
*Note
○Use a digital voltmeter which can read a decimal
place to measure the voltage
●If the reading is 12.6V or higher, no additional energy

is required; however, if the reading is below the
specified value, the power needs to be supplemented.
The terminal voltage and charging method are shown in
the table below:
Terminal voltage Charging method
11.5-12.6V 0.9A × 5-10h
Less than 11.5V 0.9A × 20h
●After the power is supplemented, the battery state is

confirmed and the charging is completed, let the battery
stand for 30 minutes and then determine the battery
state by measuring the terminal voltage according to
the following table.
Standard Judgement
1 12.6V or above Good
12.0-12.6V Undercharge→Repeated
charging
Less than 12.0V Unavailable→Replacement
●During inspection, the battery shall be tested with an
avometer under the complete charging state.
●Install the completely charged battery after the engine
is heated.
●Connect the voltmeter between the terminals of
battery.
●Start the engine and increase the speed slowly to
measure the limiting voltage.
Limiting voltage/speed: 15V (5000rpm) (DCV
range)
●Check the voltage regulator when the limiting voltage
is not within the range of specified value.
Magneto
* Note
○The charge coil of magneto can be checked on the
engine.
- 430 -
Disassembling Magneto
●Magneto power wire connector
●Put a suitable container below the magneto cover
●Loosen the left cover mounting bolt [A] and remove
the left cover [B] and coil
●Pull out the magneto power wire between the engine
and bracket
●Disassembling stator coil:

Magneto cover (see the magneto cover disassembly
section)
Stator coil bolt [A]
Stator coil [B]
Magneto outgoing line rubber cover [C]
Trigger bolt [D]
●Disassembling flywheel:
Disassemble the magneto cover (see the magneto cover
disassembly section)
Use the flywheel remover to remove the flywheel
mounting bolt.
Disassemble the flywheel from the crankshaft with the
flywheel puller
- 431 -
Flywheel puller
●Remove the flywheel
Checking Magneto
●There are three types of magneto faults: short circuit,
open circuit (the wire is burned out) or magnetic loss of
rotor. A short or open circuit of coil will result in low
output or even no output. The magnetic loss of rotor
will result in low output, this loss may be caused by the
dropping or beating suffered by the AC generator, and it
may also caused because the rotor is placed near the
electromagnetic field, or due to the aging only.
- 432 -
K direction P direction
White White
Green / Blue /
White white white
●Turn off the ignition switch

●Remove the 3P connector of magneto.
●Measure the impedance value among three black
terminals of magneto with a multimeter.
Standard value: 0.8±0.3Ω (normal temperature:
20℃)
★ If the resistance value is greater than the value
indicated above, or if there are no readings (infinite
values) on any two power wire multimeters, the stator
circuit is open and must be replaced. If the resistance
value is far below this resistance value, it means that the
stator is short-circuited and must be replaced.
●Use the maximum resistance range of multimeter to
measure the resistance between each black power wire
and chassis ground.
★Use the tester coil to test whether there is a breakover
on the engine body; if there is a breakover, the short
circuit of coil and engine occurs and the charge coil
needs to be checked.
★If the resistance of stator coil is normal, but it shows
that there are faults on the magneto after voltage
inspection, it is possible that the rotor magnetism is
reduced and the rotor must be replaced at this time.
●Start the engine
○Operate the engine according to the revolutions per
minute (rpm) given by the Table 1
- 433 -
○Record the voltage readings (3 measurement values in
total)
Table 1 Magneto Output Voltage
Wiring Readings when it is
Range of tester
Connect tester (+) to Connect tester (-) to 5000rpm
750 V AC A black power wire The other black power wire 65V or higher
★If the displayed output voltage value is the value in

the table, it indicates that the magneto runs normally.
★If the reading is much lower than the value in the
table, it indicates that there are faults in the magneto.
Installing Magneto
●Install the magneto in reverse order of disassembly
Fastening torque of stator coil bolt: 10 N·m
Fastening torque of bracket bolt: 3N·m
Fastening torque of trigger bolt: 5N·m
Fastening torque of flywheel mounting bolt: 70N·m
- 434 -
Rectifier
Disassebling rectifier:
Disassemble right fuel tank guard (see “Frame” –
“Disassembling Fuel Tank Guard” for details)
●Disassemble:
Connector [A]
Bolt [B]
Voltage regulator/rectifier [C]
Main Wiring Terminal Circuit Inspection

Remove the motorcycle body guard.
Remove the plug of voltage and current regulator and
check the breakover among main wiring terminals in
the following method.
Rectifier Inspection
1. Multimeter: select the diode gear;
2. Connect the black probe to the red wire terminal of
voltage stabilizer and connect the red probe to the white
- 435 -
wire terminals of voltage stabilizer (white 1, white 2,
white 3); the pointer table shows a certain value (range
of 0.1-0.5V), otherwise it indicates that the voltage
stabilizer is damaged and needs to be replaced.
3. Connect the red probe to the black wire terminal at
the voltage stabilizer port and connect the black probe
to the white wire terminals of voltage stabilizer (white
1, white 2, white 3); the pointer table shows a certain
value (range of 0.3-0.8V), otherwise it indicates that the
voltage stabilizer is damaged and needs to be replaced.
Rectifier Installation
●Install the rectifier in reverse order of disassembly
order
Fastening torque of rectifier bolt: 10 N·m
- 436 -
Ignition System
Circuit Diagram of Ignition System
黑/红1 1
Black/Red
黑/白1 1
Black/White
白蓝
White blue
/ /
绿白
Green white ECU
触发头
Trigger probe
点火电源
Ignition power
Ignition system
- 437 -
Operation Precautions
1. Check the ignition system in accordance with the
order of fault diagnosis table step by step.
2. The ignition system is the electronic automatic angle
feeding device and has been cured in the ECU group,
so the ignition time does not need to be adjusted.
3. Check the ignition system in the order listed in the
fault diagnosis table.
4. Most of ignition system faults are caused by the poor
contact of connector, so check whether the contact of
various connector parts is poor first.
5. Check whether the heat value used by the spark plug
is appropriate, because the inappropriate spark plug
will cause the unsmooth running of engine or make the
spark plug be burned out.
6. Check the main switch in accordance with the
breakover table of switch part. (Appendix)
7. Please disassemble the magneto and stator according
to the disassembly description.
Warning
The ignition system will generate extremely high
voltage. Do not touch the spark plug or coil when
the engine is running, otherwise you may suffer a
severe electric shock.
*Note
Do not disconnect the battery connecting wire or any
other electrical connection when the ignition switch
is on or when the engine is running. This is to
prevent from damaging the ECU. Do not install the
battery reversely. The negative electrode side shall
be grounded. This is to prevent from damaging the
ECU.
- 438 -
Crankshaft Sensor
Disassembling Crankshaft Position Sensor
●It cannot be disassembled separately and integrated
with the magneto (see “Charging System” –
“Disassembling Magneto” for details)
●Crankshaft position sensor [A]
Check
●Use the tester
* Note
The trigger can be checked on the engine.
●Remove the trigger lead connector.
●Measure the impedance values of red and yellow Green/white
White White
outgoing lines of engine.

Blue/white
White
Standard value: 150±20Ω (20℃)

Trigger
connector
★If the measured resistance value is higher than the
specified value, the coil circuit is disconnected and
needs to be replaced.
★If the resistance value is lower than the specified
value, the coil is short-circuited and must be replaced.
Ignition Coil
Disassembling Ignition Coil:
●Remove the screw [B] above the two installing
columns at the ignition coil [C] under the fuel tank and
remove the connector [A].
Warning
When removing the coil, you cannot pry up the
connector of coil.
- 439 -
Checking Ignition Coil
●Check the primary coil
●Measure the impedance among the terminals of
primary coil.
Standard value: (0.58±10%)Ω（20℃）
Coil resistance: Primary 0.58±10%Ω(20℃),
Secondary 8±10%KΩ (20℃)
High-pressure cap, internal resistance of
5±10%KΩ
★The impedance value is good in the standard value.
★If the impedance value is “∞”, it indicates that the
wire in the coil is disconnected and the ignition coil
needs to be replaced. Ignition coil
* Note
• If the spark plug does not generate sparks, check
whether the wiring parts are loose or whether their
contact is poor,
• Because there are many brands of multimeter and
their internal impedances are different, the test
values are different.
Installing ignition coil

●Install the ignition coil in the reverse order of
disassembly
Spark Plug
Checking Spark Plug
●Disassemble the spark plug (see the spark plug
disassembly section)
●Visually check the spark plug
○If the central electrode [A] and/or side electrode [A]
of spark plug is/are corroded or damaged, or the
insulation terminal [C] is broken, replace the spark plug
★If the spark plug is dirty or there are carbon deposits
on the spark plug, replace the spark plug
○Measure the clearance [D] with a linear feeler gauge
○If the clearance is incorrect, replace the spark plug
Clearance of spark plug: 0.6-0.7 mm
○Use the standard spark plugs or spark plugs in the
same grade
Spark plug: A7RC (BOSCH)
- 440 -
Check
●Start the engine according to the following conditions
First Check
Condition:
Drive device → 1st gear
Clutch handle → hold
Side stand → up
○Turn on the ignition switch and press the start button
○If the start-up system circuit is normal, the starter
motor will not rotate
●If the engine starts, check the starting power-off
switch, side stand flameout switch, gear switch and
relay box
●If the parts are all in good condition, replace the ECU
• start the engine according to the following conditions
Second Check
Condition:
Gear → neutral
Clutch handle → release
Side stand → down
○Turn on the ignition switch and press the start button
○Then the starter motor starts, and the start-up system
circuit shall be normal
★If the starter motor does not start, check the start
switch, gear switch and relay box
★If the parts are all in good condition, replace the
electronic control unit
Third Check
●After carrying out the following operations, check
whether the engine can be safely extinguished
●Run the engine according to the following conditions
Condition:
Gear → 1st Gear
Side stand → up
●If the side stand is placed on the ground, the engine
will flame out
★If any one does not flame out, check the gear switch,
start switch, side stand flameout switch and relay box
★If the parts are all in good condition, replace the
electronic control unit
IC Igniter Inspection
○IC igniter is put inside the electronic control unit.
●Refer to the following items
1. Electrical start-up safety circuit-related
components operation inspection (see the
- 441 -
electrical start-up safety circuit-related
components operation checking section)
2. Ignition system troubleshooting (see the
ignition system section)
3. Electronic control unit voltage inspection (see
the electronic control unit power inspection
section in the chapter of electronic fuel injection
system (ECU))
ECU Group
●System inspection
●Remove the ECU group and check the parts related to
the ignition system at the wiring terminal. (See the
electronic fuel injection system, ECU section)
- 442 -
Ignition System Troubleshooting
Error ignition (no spark)
Battery inspection Not good Battery charging or battery replacement
Good
Ignition system circuit and connector Not good Repair or replace the damaged part
inspection
Good
Spark plug inspection Not good Replace the spark plug
Good
Primary side coil peak voltage inspection Not good Replace the ignition coil
Good
Primary side coil peak voltage inspection Not good Voltage is lower than the specified value
Good Not good
There is a fault in the ignition Voltage is zero or almost Checking: Not

coil, please replace it zero 1. Check the lower voltage on the multimeter good
2. Check the peak voltage of crankshaft sensor
3. Check the peak voltage of camshaft position
sensor
Not good Checking: Good Replace the faulty part or check it

1. Check whether the adapter is connected incorrectly or with a multimeter
there is a fault in the adapter
2. Check the ignition switch and engine flameout switch
3. Check the peak voltage of crankshaft sensor
4. Check the peak voltage of camshaft position sensor
Good
Replace the faulty part There is a fault in the electronic control unit, so it needs to be replaced
- 443 -
Starter System
Circuit Diagram of Starter System
THE ON OFF SWITCH BATTERY RELAY

B R START SWITCH FLAMEOUT SWITCH
G/Y O/R
O/R
B G G
R/W
Gr
G/Y O/R
STARTOR MOTOR
MAIN SWITCH
- 444 -
Starter Motor
*Note
Before the starter motor is disassembled,

turn “OFF” the main switch, remove the bond
strap of battery, and then turn on the power to
see whether the motor runs to confirm safety.
*Note
Do not pat the starter motor shaft or body,
otherwise the motor body may be damaged
Disassembling Starter Motor
●Disassemble the starter motor cable terminal nut
●Disassemble the starter motor assembling bolt [A]
●Pull out the starter motor [B] from the left side
Checking Starter Motor

●Start the engine according to the following conditions
Condition:
Gear → neutral
Side stand → down
●Turn on the ignition switch and press the start button
○If other start-up system circuits are normal, the starter
motor does not start
○Remove the starter motor and directly connect it to
the positive and negative electrodes of storage battery;
if it can run normally, it is the engine
○Matching problem: if it does not run, the starter motor
is broken.
- 445 -
Carbon Brush Inspection
●Measure the length [A] of each carbon brush [B]
★If any carbon brush has reached the use limit, replace
the carbon brush plate assembly
Length of Starter Motor Carbon Brush
Standard: 11.5 mm
Use limit: 6.0mm
Commutator Cleaning and Inspection

●If necessary, polish the surface [A] of commutator
with a crocus cloth [B] and clear the groove
●Measure the diameter [A] of commutator [B]

★If the diameter of commutator is shorter than the use
limit, replace the starter motor with a new one
Commutator Diameter
Standard: 22.3mm
Use limit: 21mm
★If the resistance between two commutators is higher

or there is no reading, the coil is open-circuit and the
starter motor must be replaced.
●Measure the resistance between commutator and shaft
[B] with a multimeter
★If the reading is 0, the armature is short-circuited and
the starter motor must be replaced
- 446 -
Carbon Brush Lead Inspection
●Measure the resistance by using a multimeter with the
range set as × 1Ω, as shown in the figure
End bolt and positive carbon brush [A]
Right-hand end cover and negative carbon brush
[B]
★★If the resistance is not close to zero ohms, the
carbon brush lead is open-circuit. The carbon brush
plate assembly needs to be replaced
Right-hand End Cover Assembly Inspection

●Measure the resistance by using a multimeter with the
range set as the maximum, as shown in the figure
Terminal and right-hand end cover [A]
★If there is any reading, the right-hand end cover
assembly is short-circuited. Replace the right-hand end
cover assembly
- 447 -
Starter Relay
Disassembling Starter Relay
●Disconnect the starter motor cable and battery
negative electrode (-) cable disconnection connector
[A] from the starter relay
●Disconnect the starter motor cable and battery
positive electrode (+) cable disconnection connector
[B] from the starter relay
●Unplug the starter relay cable connector
● Take out starter relay
Checking Starter Relay

●Check
Remove the body protector.
When the main switch is rerated to “ON”, check
whether a “click” sound is made after turning on starter
motor.
It is normal when a sound is made.
When there is no sound:
• Check starter relay voltage.
• Check bond strap circuit of starter relay.
• Check the operation of starter relay.
●Check voltage of starter relay

Erect main foot, and measure the voltage between the
negative electrode (green/yellow) of starter relay
connector and bond strap of motorcycle body.
Place the main switch at the position of “ON”, pull the
Black
brake lever and ensure that the battery voltage meets
the regulations. Green /
yellow
When no voltage is applied to the starter relay wire,
check the continuity and wire of brake switch.
Bond strap
Starter relay
- 448 -
●Inspection of bond strap circuit of starter relay
Remove starter relay connector.
Check the continuity between black wire connector
terminal and bond strap of body.
Ensure that the continuity between black wire
Black
connector terminal and bond strap of body is good after
start button is pressed. Green /
yellow
When it is nonconductive, check the continuity and
wire of start button.
Bond strap
Starter relay
●Operation Inspection
Connect the starter relay to the battery and connect the
terminal of starter motor to multimeter.
Connect the fully charged battery between the black
and green/yellow wires of the relay. At this point, “Da”
sound is made in the relay and the resistance indication Starter
of multimeter is “zero”. relay
●Connect the multimeter and 12V battery to the starter

relay, as shown in the figure
●If the relay does not work as specified, there is a fault
in the relay and it needs to be replaced
Testing Relay
Range of tester: × 1Ω range
Standard: when battery is connected→ 0Ω
When the battery is disconnected→ ∞Ω
Installing Starter Relay

●It should be conducted in the reverse order of
disassembly.
Tightening torque of terminal nut of starter relay:
8 N·m
- 449 -
Lighting System
Headlight
Note
LED light source is used for the light. If the high
beam or low beam position lamp is not on, the
entire headlight needs to be replaced.
●Disassemble the headlight [A] (see “Frame”-“Fairing

Disassembly”)
●After replacing headlight, adjust the condensation of
headlight (see “Headlight Condensation Inspection
Part” in chapter “Regular Maintenance”)
Tail light
Remove the tail light [A] (see “Frame” –
“Disassembling Cover”)
- 450 -
Turn Signal Light
Remove the front turn light [A] (see
“Frame-Disassembling Cowling”)
Remove the rear turn light [A] (see

“Frame-Disassembling Cover”)
License Plate Light

Remove the license plate light [A]
- 451 -
Instrument
Disassembling Instrument
●Disassembling instrument [A] (see
“Frame-Disassembling Cowling”)
Instrument and Indicator Light

When the ignition key is rotated to the position of
“ON”, the instrument and indicator light will be on.
After the initial inspection, the information will
correspond to the overall condition of the motorcycle at
that time.
There are the following indiator lights on the
dashboard.
- 452 -
Status Indicator Light
Turn indicator light (green)
If this indicator light is flashing, the turn signal
light is on.
Neutral indicator light (green)
If this indicator light is on, the motorcycle is in a
neutral state.
High beam indicator (blue)
If this indicator light is on, the high beam light is
on.
Oil pressure warning light (Red).
If this indicator light is on, the fault code of EFI
system (yellow) is diagnosed.
When the key is turned on, the EFI indicator light
will be on and the fuel pump will operate for 3 seconds.
At this time, the motorcycle is started. If the indicator
light goes out after the motorcycle starts, the
motorcycle is normal and there is no fault; if the
indicator light is on, there is a fault. In the same way, if
the light is off during running, the motorcycle is
running normally. If the indicator light is on, the
motorcycle has a fault and needs to be stopped and
checked. Please contact Benelli & Qianjiang
Motorcycle Dealer to check the motorcycle with the
dedicated motorcycle fault diagnostic apparatus.
Function Buttons
Key function table

Function Power Current interface Left key Right key Displayed interface after
display switching
Function switching
Function switching
Function switching TRIP A clearing
Function switching TRIP B clearing
Function switching
Function switching ＜3 seconds
Function switching ＜3 seconds

Close setting ＜3 seconds Hour bit is flashing
＜3 seconds Hour bit + 1 (0-23)
＜3 seconds Switch to the ten’s place of

minute to flash
＜3 seconds Ten’s place of minut +1 (0-5)
＜3 seconds Switch to the unit’s place of

minute to flash
＜3 seconds Unit’s place of minut +1 (0-9)
＜3 seconds Exit clock menu

Note In the state of clock adjustment, it will automatically exit the menu when the key is not pressed for 5 seconds
- 453 -
Tachometer:
It indicates the revolutions per minute of engine at
this time.
All / part of kilometer counters
Depending on your needs, you can select either the
releative mileage (TRIPA, b) or total mileage (TOTAL)
on the odometer, or you can select mph or km as the
unit.
Relative mileage (TRIP): It is a type of odometer
that can be cleared to record miles traveled during a
certain period of time.
Total mileage (TOTAL): Keep a record of all
mileage that have been travelled.
The number of kilometres traveled by the motorcycle is
recroded using odometer.
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle
and the selected unit is mph (miles per hour) or km/h
(kilometres per hour).
Digital clock (8):
The displayed time is in hours and minutes. If you
need to adjust the time, see the table above.
Fuel gauge (9):
It is used to indicate the oil in the fuel tank.
- 454 -
Switch, Sensor and Other Parts
Power Lock Switch
Disassembling power lock
●Remove the fairing (see “Frame” – “Disassembling
Cowling” for details).
●Remove the main switch lead connector.
Power Lock Inspection

●Check the continuity of connector terminal.
★If the result does not comply with the continuity
table, please replace the main switch
Wiring principle diagram

Wire color
Position
R R/W
- 455 -
Handle Switch
Switch State (Non-Europe)
1. Lamp control switch
2. Flameout switch
3. Start switch
Red/White Orange/Blue Yellow/Red Dark green Green/Yello Dark green Red

w
4. Dimmer switch
5. Steering switch
6. Horn switch
7. Overtaking switch
Dimmer switch Steering switch Horn switch

Yellow/ Light Red/Wh Green/B Black Green/ Red/Wh Brown
Blue blue ite lack White ite
Red
PASS
- 456 -
Switch State (Europe)
1. Warning switch
2. Flameout switch
3. Start switch
Green Orange Green Flameout

white black switch
Red Dark Start switch
green
Green Dark
yellow green
4. Dimmer switch
5. Steering switch
6. Horn switch
7. Overtaking switch
- 457 -
Dimmer switch Steering switch Horn button
Blue Yellow/ Light Red/W Green/ Black Green/ Red/W Brown
Red Blue hite Black White hite
PASS
- 458 -
Checking the time to turn on brake lamp
●See the brake lamp switch operation inspection
section in the chapter of regular maintenance
Adjsuting the time to turn on brake lamp
●See the brake lamp switch operation inspection section in the chapter of regular maintenance
Switch Inspection
• Check whether only the connection in the table is
connected by using a handheld multimeter
○For the switch housing and main switch, see the table
in the circuit diagram section
★If the switch is open-circuited or short circuited,
repair it or replace it with a new one
Rear Brake Lamp Switch Connection
Rear brake lamp switch connection
Color BR BL
When the brake pedal is pressed
When the brake pedal is released
Side Stand Switch Connection

Side stand switch connection
Color BK G
When the side stand is pressed
When the side stand is released
- 459 -
Oil Level Sensor
Disassemble Oil Level Sensor
●Disassemble:
○Fuel tank guard (see “Frame” – Disassembling Fuel
Tank Guard)
●Remove:
Bolt [A]
Oil level sensor [B]
Checking Oil Level Sensor

● Check whether the fuel sensor floater moves
smoothly without clamping stagnation. It shall move
down under the effect of its own gravity
★ If the floater cannot move smoothly, replace the
sensor
When the floater is full [A]
When the floater is empty [B]
Floater arm stopper [C]
● Use the handheld multimeter [A] to measure the

resistance around the oil level sensor plug-in [B]
terminal
Special Tool—Handheld Multimeter:
Pointer Adapter Device:
★ If the multimeter reading does not meet the
specifications or the reading does not change smoothly
with the up and down movement of float block, replace
the sensor
Oil Level Sensor Resistance
Standard: Full oil level [C]: 5-9Ω
Empty oil level: 90-96Ω
- 460 -
Installing Oil Level Sensor
●Install the oil level sensor in the reverse order of
disassembly.
- 461 -
Horn
Disassembling Horn
●Remove the horn wire [A].
● Remove
○Bolt [B]
○Horn [C]
Checking Horn
●After connecting the horn with the battery, it indicates
that the horn is good if it can ring
○Resistance: 3.2Ω
Installing Horn
●Install the horn in the reverse order of disassembly.
○Torque:
Horn mounting bolt: 10N.m
- 462 -
Fuse
Disassmbling Fuse
●Disassemble the front seat cushion (see “Frame” –
“Disassembling Seat Cushion”)
○Fuse box [A]
●Open the clip, lift the cover and fuse [A] of use box
●Use sharp-nose pliers to pull the fuse out of the fuse
straightly
Installing Fuse
★If there is a fault on the fuse during operation, check
the electrical system to determine the cause, and then
replace the fuse with a new one with suitable ampere
●Install the fuse box at the original position of cover
according to the regulations
Checking Fuse
●Disassemble the fuse (see the section of disassmbling)
●Check the fuse parts
★If the fuse is blown out, replace the fuse. Before
replacing the blown fuse, check the amperage of the
affected circuit. If the amperage is equal to or greater
than the rated current of the fuse, check the circuit and
related parts to see whether they are short-circuited
Shell [A]
Fuse part [B]
Connector [C]
Blown fuse [D]
Note
○If the charging quantity of battery is insufficient
- 463 -
severely, there may be large current and the large
current may fuse the fuse after the engine starts.
Warning
When replacing the fuse, make sure that the
current of new fuse matches the rated current of
specified fuse of that circuit. If the fuse with the
current which is higher than the rated current is
installed, the circuit or part may be damaged.
- 464 -
Chapter VII Appendix
Contents
Chapter VIII Appendix ...................................................................................................................................... - 465 -

Winding Method of Cable, Wire and Hose .......................................................................................... - 467 -
Main Cable .................................................................................................................................. - 467 -
Throttle Cable .............................................................................................................................. - 470 -
Clutch Cable ................................................................................................................................ - 471 -
Oil Pipe ........................................................................................................................................ - 472 -
Troubleshooting Guide ...................................................................................................................... - 473 -
Troubleshooting Guide ........................................................................................................................ - 473 -
The engine cannot start or is difficult to start: ............................................................................. - 473 -
Starter motor does not run: .................................................................................................. - 473 -
Starter motor is running, but the engine does not run: ......................................................... - 473 -
Engine does not run: ............................................................................................................ - 473 -
There is no fuel flow: ........................................................................................................... - 473 -
There is no spark; spark is weak: ......................................................................................... - 473 -
There is problem with fuel / air mixture: ............................................................................. - 474 -
Cylinder pressure is too low: ............................................................................................... - 474 -
The running is abnormal during low-speed driving: .................................................................... - 474 -
Spark is weak: ...................................................................................................................... - 474 -
Others: ................................................................................................................................. - 475 -
Motorcycle cannot run properly or do not have sufficient power at high speed:................. - 475 -
Ignition is abnormal: ............................................................................................................ - 475 -
There is a “click” to give an alarm for fault:........................................................................ - 476 -
Others: ................................................................................................................................. - 476 -
Temperature is too high: .............................................................................................................. - 476 -
Ignition is abnormal: ............................................................................................................ - 476 -
Muffler is overheated: .......................................................................................................... - 476 -
Cylinder pressure is too high: .............................................................................................. - 477 -
Insufficient engine output power: ........................................................................................ - 477 -
Improperly adding lubrication oil: ....................................................................................... - 477 -
Oil cooler is abnormal: ........................................................................................................ - 477 -
Clutch is abnormal: ...................................................................................................................... - 477 -
Clutch is slipping: ................................................................................................................ - 477 -
- 465 -
Clutch cannot be properly separated:................................................................................... - 477 -
There is a problem with shifting： .............................................................................................. - 477 -
It is unable to engage the gear; control pedal cannot be reset： .......................................... - 477 -
Trip Stop .............................................................................................................................. - 477 -
Excessive speed change: ...................................................................................................... - 478 -
Engine gives an abnormal noise: ................................................................................................. - 478 -
There is a “click” to give an alarm for fault:........................................................................ - 478 -
There is knocking noise at piston: ....................................................................................... - 478 -
Valve gives a noise:.............................................................................................................. - 478 -
The drive system makes an unusual noise: .................................................................................. - 478 -
Clutch noise: ........................................................................................................................ - 478 -
Transmission device makes a noise: .................................................................................... - 479 -
Drive system makes a noise: ................................................................................................ - 479 -
The frame gives an unusual noise: ............................................................................................... - 479 -
Front fork gives a noise: ...................................................................................................... - 479 -
Rear shock absorber gives a noise: ...................................................................................... - 479 -
Brake disc gives a noise:...................................................................................................... - 479 -
Other noises: ........................................................................................................................ - 479 -
Oil perssure warning light is on : ................................................................................................. - 479 -
Too much exhaust: ....................................................................................................................... - 479 -
White exhaust: ..................................................................................................................... - 479 -
Black exhaust:...................................................................................................................... - 479 -
Brown exhaust: .................................................................................................................... - 479 -
Poor performance and / or stability: ............................................................................................ - 479 -
The handlebar is difficult to turn: ........................................................................................ - 479 -
The handlebar shakes or vibrates severely: ......................................................................... - 480 -
Handlebar is swinging to one side: ...................................................................................... - 480 -
Shock absorption effect is not ideal: .................................................................................... - 480 -
Brake cannot work ............................................................................................................... - 480 -
Battery fault: ................................................................................................................................ - 480 -
Battery power runs out:........................................................................................................ - 480 -
Battery overcharging: .......................................................................................................... - 481 -
Circuit Diagram ................................................................................................................................... - 482 -
- 466 -
Winding Method of Cable, Wire and Hose
Main Cable
Make main cable pass

through the clamp and
go into the inside of
frame from left hole

through the clamp at Clamp the main cable
the left of head pipe using a iron clip
Tie the main cable and

power output connector
at the frame using a
fastener
Tie the main cable and
Tie the main cable and main cable relay branch
main cabl relay branch at the frame using a
using a fastener rubber fastener
Tie the main cable at Make main cable

the frame using the go into the outside
fastener with a retaining of frame from here
bracket
- 467 -
Make the tail of main
cable pass through the
inside of frame and tie
it at the frame
Make the ECU wire of

main cable go into the
side of frame from here

through the battery and
air filter
Tie the relay wire

and oxygen sensor
wire at the frame
using a fastener
here
- 468 -
Tie the main cable
branch and sensor
wire using a fine
fastener
Make magneto
wire and gear
display wire go
along the inside of
frame
Tie the magneto and

gear display wire and
canister solenoid valve
using a fine fastener
Clamp magneto wire and

gear display wire, bond strap
wire and canister solenoid
valve wire using iron clamp
Clamp the canister

solenoid valve pipe,
gear display wire and
magneto wire at the
frame
Make the bond strap

wire go backward along
the inside of frame, and
tie it with relay wire,
negative wire of battery
on the frame
- 469 -
Throttle Cable
Make throttle cable go
into the right front ***
among upper
connecting plate and
head cover
Tightly tie the throttle
cable at the frame using Make throttle cable go
a rubber fastener, and along the outside of
make throttle cable go frame
into the inside of frame
from here
Make the throttle

cable go through the
upper clamp of
ignition coil
Make the throttle Make the throttle

cable go through the cable go through the
upper clamp of clamp at the inside of
ignition coil frame
- 470 -
Clutch Cable
Make clutch cable go

through the right clamp
of head, and go into the
frame from here
Make clutch wire

walk down along the
front of iginition coil
Clamp the clutch cable

and oxygen sensor
cable and rectifier
plug-in cable with a
iron clamp
Clamp oxygen sensor

cable and rectifier
plug-in cable with a
frame clamp
Make clamp pass

through the clamp
- 471 -
Oil Pipe
Fuel vaporization system
pipe
Fuel vaporization system
pipe
Fuel pipe
Fuel injector connector
Leaking pipe
- 472 -
Troubleshooting Guide
Remark
○For most of EFI faults, see the chapter “EFI”.
○This table is not exhaustive and it is unable to list the
possible causes of each issue and can only be used as a
basic guide to help solve some common problems.
The engine cannot start or is difficult to start:
Starter motor does not run:
 The main switch or the engine flameout switch is
not turned on;
 Starter locking switch or gear switch fault;
 Starter motor fault;
 Battery voltage is low;
 Starter relay contact is not good or cannot work
properly;
 Start button contact is not good;
 Short circuit or open circuit of starting system;
 Main switch fault;
 Engine flameout switch fault;
 Main fuse or main switch fuse blows out.
Starter motor is running, but the engine does not run:
 Motorcycle rollover sensor (EFI) is actuated;
 Anti-theft control system fault;
 Overrun clutch fault;
 Starting idler fault.
Engine does not run:
 Valve is seized;
 Valve mandrel is seized;
 Cylinder and piston is seized;
 Crankshaft is seized;
 Small end of connecting rod is seized;
 Big end of connecting rod is seized;
 Transmission gear or bearing is seized;
 Camshaft is seized;
 Starting idler is seized;
 Balanced shaft bearings is seized.
There is no fuel flow:
 There is no fuel in the tank;
 Fuel pump fails;
 Vent hole of fuel tank is blocked;
 Fuel filter is blocked;
 Fuel pipe is blocked.
There is no spark; spark is weak:
 Motorcycle rollover sensor (EFI) falls off;
 The main switch is not rotated to “On”;
 The engine flameout switch is not rotated to “Off”;
 Not grasp the clutch handle or gear is not at
neutral position;
 Spark plug is dirty, damaged or electrode
clearance is abnormal;
 Spark plug is not applicable;
 Short circuit or poor contact of high voltage
package;
- 473 -
 High-voltage package fault;
 Engine control unit (ECU) fails;
 Camshaft position sensor fault;
 Gear switch, starting lock switch or single switch
fault;
 Crankshaft sensor fault;
 Short circuit of main switch or engine flameout
switch;
 Short circuit or open circuit of starting system;
 Main fuse or main switch fuse blows out.
There is problem with fuel / air mixture:

 Bypass screw and / or idling adjustment screw is
abnormal;
 Airway is blocked;
 Air filter is blocked, sealing is poor or missing;
 Oil filling port cover, crankcase ventilation pipe or
air filter drain pipe leaks;
Cylinder pressure is too low:
 Spark plug is loosened;
 Cylinder head is not tight;
 Cylinder and piston is worn;
 Piston rings are damaged (worn, weak, damaged
or stuck);
 The gap between the piston ring and the piston
ring groove is too large;
 Cylinder head gasket is damaged;
 Cylinder head is deformed;
 Valve spring is damage or the elasticity is poor;
 There is no valve clearance;
 Valve is not installed properly (valve is bent or
worn or there is carbon deposition at valve seat).
The running is abnormal during low-speed driving:
Spark is weak:
package;
 Spark plug is dirty, damaged or clearance is
abnormal;
 Camshaft position sensor fault;
 Crankshaft sensor fault.

 Bypass screw is abnormal;
 Airway is blocked;
 Exhaust pipe and exhaust vent is blocked;
 Idle air channel is blocked;
 Air filter is blocked, leaky or not installed;
 Fuel tank vent is blocked;
 Fuel pump fails;
 Throttle body assembly fixer is loosened;
 Vent pipe fixer is loosened.
- 474 -
or stuck);
worn or there is carbon deposition at valve seat)
 Camshaft and cam wear
 It continues to run after cutting off main switch:
 Main switch fault;
 Engine flameout switch fault;
 Fuel injector fault;
 The battery negative (-) or engine control unit
(ECU) grounding wire is loosened;
 There is carbon deposition at the valve seat;
 The engine is overheated.
Others:
 Throttle body negative pressure imbalance;
 Oil viscosity is too high;
 Drive system fault;
 Brake dragging;
 Clutch is slipping
 Engine is overheated
 Suction valve fault;
 Secondary air compensating valve fault.
Motorcycle cannot run properly or do not have sufficient power at high speed:
Ignition is abnormal:
 Spark plug is dirty, damaged or abnormal;
package;
 Engine control unit (ECU) fails.
 Air filter is blocked, the sealing is poor or there is
no air filter;
 Ventilation pipe fixer is loosened;
 There is water or foreign matter in the fuel;
 Insufficient oil supply to fuel injector;
 Air tank airway is blocked;
 Fuel pipe is blocked;
 Fuel pump fails.
or stuck);
- 475 -
worn or there is carbon deposition at valve seat).
There is a “click” to give an alarm for fault:
 There is carbon deposition in combustion
chamber;
 Fuel quality is poor or fuel type is not applicable;
Others:
 Throttle cannot be fully opened;
 Brake dragging;
 Clutch is slipping;
 Engine is overheated;
 Oil level is too high;
 Camshaft and cam is worn;
 Suction valve fault;
 Secondary air compensating valve fault;
 Catalytic agent melting caused due to the
overheating of muffler.
Temperature is too high:
Ignition is abnormal:
 Spark plug is dirty, damaged or abnormal;
 Spark plug does not apply;
Muffler is overheated:
 For Benelli emission pollution control systems,
even if the cylinder is not ignited or the running is
abnormal, do not start the engine (go the nearest
repair point for maintenance);
 For the Benelli emission pollution control system,
if the battery power runs out, do not start the
motorcycle (connect another fully charged battery
using jumper, and then electrically start the
engine);
 For Benelli emission pollution control systems, if
ignition is abnormal because of very dirty spark
plug or poor contact of high pressure package,
please do not start the engine;
 For the Benelli emission pollution control system,
when the main switch is rotated to “Off”, do not
ride a motorcycle and slide using inertia (rotate the
main switch to “On”, and start engine);
 Ventilation pipe fixer is loosened;
 Sealing of air filter is poor or there is no air filter;
 Air filter is blocked.
- 476 -
Cylinder pressure is too high:
 There is carbon deposition in the combustion
chamber.
Insufficient engine output power:
 Clutch is slipping
 Brake dragging.
Improperly adding lubrication oil:
 Oil level is too low;
 Oil is poor or not applicable.
Oil cooler is abnormal:
 The oil cooler is blocked.
Clutch is abnormal:
Clutch is slipping:
 Friction plate wear or deformation;
 Steel wear or deformation;
 Clutch spring damage or poor elasticity;
 Clutch jacket is worn and uneven;
 Clutch master cylinder fails;
 Clutch slave cylinder fails.
Clutch cannot be properly separated:
 Clutch plate is deformed or too rough;
 Clutch spring compression is uneven;
 Oil deterioration;
 Clutch jacket and drive shaft is seized;
 Clutch jacket nut is loosened;
 Clutch jacket spline is damaged;
 Clutch friction plate is installed incorrectly.
There is a problem with shifting：
It is unable to engage the gear; control pedal cannot be reset：
 Clutch cannot be separated;
 Shift fork is bent or stuck;
 Shifting gear is stuck at the shaft;
 Shifting lever is blocked
 Shifting reset spring has poor flexibility or is
damaged;
 The pin of shifting reset spring is loosened;
 The spring at shifting link rod claw
 is broken;
 The shifting link rod claw
 is broken;
 The shifting claw is damaged.
Trip Stop
 The fork of shifting fork is worn or bent; .
 Shifting gear groove is worn;
 The joint between the protrusion at the inner edge
of gear and concave hole is worn;
 Shifting drum groove is worn;
 Gear lever spring has poor flexibility or is
damaged;
 Shifting fork guide pin is worn;
 Drive shaft, output shaft and / or gear spline is
worn.
- 477 -
Excessive speed change:
 Gear lever spring has poor flexibility or is
damaged;
 The spring at shifting link rod claw
 is broken;
Engine gives an abnormal noise:

There is a “click” to give an alarm for fault:
 Engine control unit (ECU) fails
 There is carbon deposition in combustion
chamber;
 Fuel quality is poor or fuel type is not applicable;
 Engine is overheated.
There is knocking noise at piston:
 The clearance between cylinder and piston is too
large;
 Link rod is bent;
 Piston pin or piston pin hole is worn;
Valve gives a noise:
 The valve clearance is incorrect;
 Valve spring is damaged or the elasticity is poor;
 Camshaft bearing is worn;
 Valve plunger wear
 Other noises:
 The clearance at the small end of connecting rod is
too large;
 The clearance at the big end of connecting rod is
too large;
ring groove is too large
 Piston ring is worn, damaged or stuck;
 Piston ring groove is worn;
 Piston is seized or damaged;
 Cylinder head gasket leaks;
 The exhaust pipe of cylinder head connecting part
leaks;
 Crankshaft oscillation is too large;
 Engine is loosened;
 Crankshaft bearing is worn;
 Main gear is worn or has a gap;
 Camshaft chain tensioner fault;
 Camshaft chain, sprocket or guide plate is worn;
 The suction valve is broken;
 Secondary air valve is broken;
 Magneto rotor is loosened;
 Overheating of muffler causes melting of catalytic
agent (Benelli emission pollution control system).
The drive system makes an unusual noise:

Clutch noise:
 Clutch shock absorber function is weak or
damaged;
 The clearance between clutch housing and friction
plate is too large;
 Clutch shell is worn;
- 478 -
 External friction plate is installed incorrectly.
Transmission device makes a noise:
 Bearing is worn;
 Transmission gear is worn or has a gap;
 The metal fragments is stuck on the rotating teeth
of gears;
 Oil shortage;
Drive system makes a noise:
 The chain is not adjusted properly;
 Chain is worn;
 Rear sprocket and / or engine sprocket is worn;
 Chain lubricating oil shortage;
 Rear wheel is not adjusted averagely at the right
and left.
The frame gives an unusual noise:
Front fork gives a noise:
 Lack of lubricating oil or too thin oil film;
 Spring has poor elasticity or is damaged
Rear shock absorber gives a noise:
 Shock absorber is broken;
Brake disc gives a noise:
 Brake pads are not installed correctly;
 Brake pad surface polishing;
 Brake disc deformation;
 Caliper fault;
Other noises:
 The brackets, nuts, bolts and other parts are not properly installed or locked.
Oil perssure warning light is on :
 The oil pump is broken;
 Oil strainer is blocked;
 Oil filter element plugging;
 The oil level is too low;
 The oil viscosity is too low;
 Camshaft bearing is worn;
 Crankshaft bearing is worn;
 The oil pressure switch is broken;
 There is a problem with the line;
 Relief valve is stuck and in open state;
 The O-ring seal of crankcase oil path is damaged.
Too much exhaust:
White exhaust:
 Piston oil ring is worn;
 Cylinder is worn;
 Valve seal is damaged;
 Valve catheter is worn;
 Oil level is too high.
Black exhaust:
 Air filter is blocked.
Brown exhaust:
 Vent pipe clamp is loosened;
 Air filter has poor airtightness or there is no an air
filter.
Poor performance and / or stability:
The handlebar is difficult to turn:
 Wiring method of cable is incorrect;
 Wiring method of hose is incorrect;
- 479 -
 Wiring method of wire is incorrect;
 Steering column nut is too tight;
 Steering column bearing is broken;
 Lubricating oil in steering column bearing is
insufficient;
 Steering column is bent;
 Tire pressure is too low.
The handlebar shakes or vibrates severely:
 Tire is worn;
 Swing arm main shaft bearing is worn;
 Rim deformation or imbalance;
 Wheel bearing is worn;
 Handlebar fixer bolt is loosened;
 Steering column nut is loosened;
 The run-out of front shaft and rear shaft is too
large;
 Engine mounting bolt is loosened;
Handlebar is swinging to one side:
 Frame is bent;
 The wheels are misaligned;
 The arm is bent or twisted;
 The oscillation of main shaft of swing arm is too
large;
 Steering column adjustment error;
 Front fork is bent;
 Left and right front shock absorption oil level is
uneven.
Shock absorption effect is not ideal:
(too hard)
 Excessive front shock absorption oil;
 The viscosity of front shock absorption oil is too
high;
 Rear shock absorber is too hard
 Tire pressure is too high;
 Front fork is bent;
(Too soft)
 Tire pressure is too low;
 Front shock absorption oil is insufficient and / or
leaks;
 The viscosity of front shock absorption oil is too
low;
 Rear shock absorber is too soft
 The elasticity of front fork and rear shock absorber
springs are too poor;
 Rear shock absorber leaks.
Brake cannot work
 There is air in the brake pipe;
 Friction plate or brake disc is worn;
 Brake fluid leaks;
 Brake disc is deformed;
 Friction plate is contaminated;
 Brake fluid deterioration;
 The main reservoir and secondary reservoir in the
master cylinder are damaged;
 The inner wall of master cylinder is damaged.
Battery fault:
Battery power runs out:
 Not enough power;
- 480 -
 There is problem with battery (voltage too low);
 Poor battery cable contact;
 Load is too large (such as: bulb power is too
large);
 Main switch fails;
 Magneto fails;
 There is a problem with the line;
 Regulator / rectifier fails.
Battery overcharging:
 Magneto fault;
 Regulator / rectifier fails;
 There is problem with battery.
- 481 -
Circuit Diagram
Headlight indicator
Indicator Light control Turn signal
Right turn indicator light switch Flameout switch Storage battery
switch Relay Fuel injector
Intake temperature sensor
Oil indicator Left turn indictor Horn switch Start switch Brake switch Brake switch Idle speed Water temperature Oxygen Intake pressure
Tachometer Fuel pump Speed sensor stepper motor Throttle sensor sensor Sensor sensor Odometer
Fault lamp PASS

1 2
Canister solenoid valve
R/W
G/Y
G/Y
Dg
N
BL/O
LBL
R/W
O/R
R
R
Y/R
R
BL
B
N/W
B
R/BL
N/B
B2
R/W
P
R/W
P
Gear display
Dg R/W
LR
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
B/O
BL
B
W/O
B/N
W/BL
Gr/W
B
B
B
R
B/BL
W/N
B/BL
O/G
B/BL
W/R
B/R
B/R
W/Gr
W/B
B/R
B/BL
R/Gr
Y/G
B/BL
W/O
B/Y
R/G
Y/W
N/LG
R/G
BL/O
B2
G/R
R/BL
B/R
LBL/R
FUSE
FUSE 15A
20A
N/BL
R/P
Diagnostic
LR
R/N
G/B R/W B R/W LBL Dg Gr/R G/Y R/WP R/W apparatus
BL W/BLR/W N BL P
B
Right turn G/W1 G/W2 Right turn signal
signal light N/W N/W
BL P
B B
Headlight LBL R/W
R/W
G/B
B Taillight
G/B2
N/B
Position light Left turn signal
B
Left turn signal light G/B1 B

N/B R/W
Horn B License plate lamp
N
B/Y
W/R
W/G
W/Gr
O/G
Gr/W
R/N
R/P
G/R
R/Gr
R/G
LR
B/N
Y/W
B/W
BL/W
Y/G
B/BL
Dg
N/LG
N/BL
W/B
W/Y
W/O
W/N
LBL/R
BB/WB/R
O/R
G/BL
Y/B
B/Y
B B/R
O/R Y/B
B R/W B/RLR DgB WWW B G/B2
R WWW B R BL/W W/BL W/OB/O G/B1 B
Gr/W G/W2 G/W1R/W
Gr R/G Ignition 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Ignition coil
R/WB Y/R Flasher
Rectifier B/BLG/BL W/G coil
J1 J2
Spark coil
大灯控制器 Spark coil
离合器开关 Power lock Fuel pump relay Electric motor Magneto
Oil level sensor
ECU
Side stand flameout switch
Gear

Motorcycle Maintenance Manual: Benelli

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Motorcycle Maintenance Manual: Benelli

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Motorcycle Maintenance Manual: Benelli

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are some of the main components of the motorcycle discussed in the manual?

What are some of the main components of the motorcycle discussed in the manual?

What systems does the manual discuss for reducing emissions?

What systems does the manual discuss for reducing emissions?

TNT125

Motorcycle Maintenance Manual

Exhaust Emission Control Information ..................................................................................................................... 1

Notes before Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... - 21 -

Sharp Edge of Part

Collecting and Cleaning Removed Part

Storing Removed Part

The common sense and basic ability of judgement

Gasket and O-Ring Seal

If the gasket and O-ring seal hardens, shrinks or is

Mould Closing Glue and Threaded Fastening Glue

If it is needed to use the mould closing glue or

If not necessary, do not remove the ball or needle in

Oil Seal and Grease Oil Seal

If not necessary, do not remove the oil seal or grease

Apply the grease on the edges of oil seal in

Rotation Direction of Engine

Frame No. Engine No.:

Nameplate is riveted on the frame

China Registered Vehicle

Enrope and Non-Europe:

Regular Maintenance Table ......................................................................................................................... - 46 -

Jack: Jack accessories:

Oil filter wrench Pilot screw adjuster adapter φ5：

Pilot screw adjuster adapter C： Throttle sensor adjuster adapter

★If necessary, adjust the upper end of throttle cable [E]

Checking Idle Speed

●Check whether the winding method of hose meets the

●Check whether the connection of hose joint is firm.

○Remove the bolt [A] used for fixing canister.

○Remove the canister [A] and take the hose used to

●Remove the canister solenoid valve according to the

○Remove the hose used to connect separator and

● Check the hose of fuel evaporation and recovery

assembly with the timing mark on the left cover

●After ensuring that the timing mark is aligned, put the

★If the valve clearance is not within the specified

★To prevent the adjuster [C] from rotating together, fix

●Check the valve clearance again and carry out

★If necessary, adjust the throttle cable [A] according to

★ If the requirements of free travel cannot be met after

Checking Whether Wheel/Tire is Broken

Checking Whether Drive Chain is Loose

●Screw the lock nuts [A] of two chain adjusters on the

Checking Wear of Drive Chain

Free Travel of Front Brake

Free Travel of Rear Brake

Checking Brake Fluid Level

●Check the brake fluid cylinder diaphragm on the

●Check whether the level of the brake fluid in the rear

●Check the brake fluid diaphragm on the reservoir.

●Check whether the level of the brake fluid in the rear

●Check the brake fluid diaphragm on the reservoir.

●Install the cover of rear brake fluid reservoir correctly

Checking Brake Light Switch